JP2016209099A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which executes read-ahead notice that is novel and unexpected and can eventually enhance a game's interest.SOLUTION: A liquid crystal display device displays, on a first 3-shaku (ca 90 cm diameter) bomb reservation display area 610, a reservation image in a display color in a special display mode in the case that there is a reservation image whose display color is temporarily determined as the special display mode when a state in which the reservation image (3-shaku bomb) is displayed on a second 3-shaku bomb reservation display area 620 turns to a state in which the reservation image (3-shaku bomb) is displayed on the first 3-shaku bomb reservation display area 610 as the storage number of reservation information pieces reduces from over 4 to 4 or less. On the other hand, when it does not occur that the number of storage of the reservation information pieces reduces from over 4 to 4 or less, even in the case that there is a reservation image whose display color is temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reservation image is displayed on the first 3-shaku bomb reservation display area 610 in a display color different from that in the special display mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 179

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state that is relatively advantageous to a player.

  When a gaming medium such as a game ball wins (passes) a predetermined passing area provided on the gaming board, the gaming machine determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player. When the determination result indicates that the state is shifted to the specific gaming state, the identification information is variably displayed on the display device and is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. There is something to make.

  In such a gaming machine, when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing area during the variation display of the identification information, information for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state is stored as the hold information, On the condition that the identification information in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the above determination is performed using the stored hold information, and the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in accordance with the determination result.

  Further, in this type of gaming machine, it is possible to notify the storage number (holding number) of the hold information by displaying a plurality of hold images corresponding to the plurality of stored hold information. Before performing the above-described determination, it is determined in advance whether or not the hold information indicates the transition to the specific gaming state, and by changing the display mode of the hold image based on the result of the prior determination, the hold image is displayed. There is one that can suggest the possibility of transition to a specific gaming state with respect to the corresponding holding information (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the thing of the said patent document 1, when several pending | holding information is memorize | stored, while performing the above-mentioned determination using pending | holding information in the memory | storage order, while erasing the pending | holding image according to the pending | holding information which concerns on the said determination Based on the determination result, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, by changing the display mode (aspect) of the held image that is displayed without being erased, the identification information that is currently in the variable display state is changed. A so-called “pre-reading notice (pre-reading effect)” is realized, which suggests that the identification information that is variably displayed later may be stopped and displayed in a specific manner.

JP2013-212403A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, whether or not to change the display mode of the reserved image as a pre-reading notice is determined only when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing area, Since the display mode of the reserved image is changed only in a predetermined pattern, the look-ahead notification is not surprising and monotonous, and there is room for improvement in order to enhance the fun of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a novel and unexpected pre-reading notice, and thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area through which game media can pass in the gaming area;
Specific game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Identification information display means capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means;
A game state control means for performing control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the identification information display means;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the passage area, the specific mode for the identification information On-hold information storage means capable of storing on-hold information including information indicating whether or not to stop display at an upper limit of a predetermined number;
A hold image display means capable of displaying a hold image as an image corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means;
Display of the hold image corresponding to the hold information based on whether or not the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is specific hold information indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. A provisional image display mode provisional determination means capable of provisionally determining any one of a plurality of display modes including a special display mode;
The identification information display means is capable of starting a variable display of identification information based on the hold information on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display unit based on the stored hold information, the hold information storage unit may reduce the number of stored hold information by deleting the hold information.
The on-hold image display means includes:
When the number of stored hold information in the hold information storage means is a specific number or less, a hold image corresponding to the hold information of the specific number or less can be displayed in the first display area,
When the number of stored hold information in the hold information storage means is larger than the specific number, at least a hold image corresponding to the specific number of hold information can be displayed in the second display area,
In a state where the number of stored hold information is larger than the specific number and the stored number is reduced, and the hold image can be displayed in the first display area, the hold image display mode provisional determination means When there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
If the number of stored information does not decrease in a state where the number of stored hold information is greater than the specific number, even if there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the reserved image display mode temporary determining unit The hold image can be displayed in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode.

  According to such a configuration, when a reserved image is displayed in the second display area, if the number of stored hold information decreases, if there is a reserved image temporarily determined as a special display mode, the reserved image is displayed. While displayed in the first display area in the special display mode, if there is no decrease in the number of stored hold information more than the specific number, even if there is a hold image temporarily determined as a special display mode The reserved image is displayed in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode. As a result, the regularity of the pattern in which the reserved image is displayed in the special display mode is broken, so that the prefetching notice using such a reserved image can be made novel and surprising, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be increased.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
The passage area is
A first passing region;
A second passage region different from the first passage region,
The specific game state transition determination means is
First specific game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific game state on condition that a game medium has passed through the first passage area;
And a second specific gaming state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the specific gaming state on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the second passage area,
The identification information display means includes
First identification information display means capable of variably displaying and stopping the first identification information based on the determination result by the first specific gaming state transition determining means;
Second identification information display means capable of variably displaying and stopping the second identification information based on the determination result by the second specific gaming state transition determining means,
The gaming state control means enters the specific gaming state when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode on the first identification information display means or the second identification information display means. It is possible to perform control to shift,
The holding information storage means includes
When the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display means, the first passing area is displayed as a game medium. When the variable display of the first identification information is suspended based on the fact that the first identification information is passed, the first suspension information including information indicating whether or not the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, First holding information storage means capable of storing the first predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display means, the second passage area is displayed as a game medium. Second variable information including information indicating whether or not the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode when the variable display of the second identification information is suspended based on the fact that Second hold information storage means capable of storing the second predetermined number as an upper limit,
The first hold information is provided on the condition that the first identification information display means stops displaying the first identification information, and the second identification information display means stops displaying the second identification information. It is possible to start the variable display of the first identification information based on
The second hold information is provided on the condition that the second identification information display means stops displaying the second identification information and the first identification information display means stops displaying the first identification information. It is possible to start the variable display of the second identification information based on
The first hold information storage means first deletes the first hold information when the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display means based on the stored first hold information. The number of stored hold information may decrease,
The second hold information storage means erases the second hold information when the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display means based on the stored second hold information. The number of stored hold information may decrease,
The on-hold image display mode provisional determination means
Based on whether or not the first hold information stored in the first hold information storage means is the first specific hold information indicating that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. The display mode of the hold image corresponding to one hold information can be determined to any one of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
Based on whether the second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is the second specific hold information indicating that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. 2 The display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information can be determined from any of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
The on-hold image display means includes:
A hold image can be displayed as an image corresponding to the first hold information and the second hold information stored in the first hold information storage means and the second hold information storage means;
When the sum of the number of stored first hold information in the first hold information storage means and the number of second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number, the first hold equal to or less than the specific number A hold image corresponding to the information and the second hold information can be displayed in the first display area;
When the sum of the number of stored first hold information in the first hold information storage means and the number of second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is greater than the specified number, at least the specified number of first A hold image corresponding to the hold information and the second hold information can be displayed in the second display area;
A hold image can be displayed in the first display area after the total of the stored numbers decreases in a state where the total stored number of the first hold information and the stored number of the second hold information is larger than the specific number. In the state, when there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the reserved image display mode temporary determining means, the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
In the state where the total number of storages of the first hold information and the storage number of the second hold information is greater than the specific number, the stored image display mode provisional determination means Even if there is a hold image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the hold image can be displayed in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode,
The specific number is not less than the first predetermined number and not less than the second predetermined number.

  According to such a configuration, when the hold image is displayed in the second display area, if the total number of the first hold information and the second hold information is reduced even once, the temporary display is temporarily determined. If there is an on-hold image, the on-hold image is displayed in the first display area in a special display mode, while the total number of stored first hold information and second hold information is decreased in a state where it is greater than the specific number. Otherwise, even if there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reserved image is displayed in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode. Such a specific number is equal to or greater than a first predetermined number that is a storable number of first hold information, and is equal to or greater than a second predetermined number that is a storable number of second hold information. Therefore, when the total number of stored first hold information and second hold information is greater than the specific number, both the first hold information and the second hold information are always stored. Accordingly, the regularity of the pattern in which the hold image corresponding to the hold information is displayed in the special display mode according to the stored number of both the first hold information and the second hold information is destroyed. The pre-reading notice using the image can be made novel and surprising, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The on-hold image display means includes:
In the first display area, it is possible to individually display the hold image for the hold information stored in the hold information storage unit,
In the second display area, it is possible to display one hold image for the specific number of hold information stored in the hold information storage means,
The reserved image corresponding to the first display area can be displayed in the special display mode on condition that the one reserved image is no longer displayed in the second display area.

  According to such a configuration, when one reserved image is no longer displayed in the second display area, the reserved image corresponding to the first display area is individually displayed in the special display mode. When the display position of the hold image is switched from the second display area to the first display area, the hold image displayed in the special display mode can be clearly distinguished from the others, so that the so-called pre-reading notice is easily recognized. be able to.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a novel and unexpected pre-reading notice and thus enhancing the interest of the game.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the game board in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing relevant to the big prize opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening-and-closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus bonus pattern selection table for the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st modification of a big prize opening shutter. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a front view which shows the 2nd modification of a game board and a variable prize apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd modification of a variable winning apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification from another direction. It is a top view which shows the internal structure of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a right view which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a left view which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a perspective view which shows the drive unit of the variable prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a part of drive unit of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a front view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main components of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing operation | movement of the variable prize-winning apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the direction change apparatus provided in the game board in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the starting port unit provided in the game board in the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of a starting port unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the croon device contained in a starting port unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the production mode of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the display screen of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the holding | maintenance information storage area of the work RAM of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the jewelry reservation information storage area of the work RAM of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for jewelry reservation display pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the holding information display pattern temporary determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the prefetch notice execution determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the prefetch notice classification determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the prefetch notice object hold information determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the holding information display combination final display color pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for hold display change pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for hold display change pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for hold display change pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for holding information display combination movable pattern determination of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the pyrotechnician last display number-of-people determination table for the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the pyrotechnician initial display number determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pyrotechnics coloration pattern determination of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the pyrotechnician reduction pattern determination table for the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pyrotechnician reduction gash pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the promotion timing number determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the promotion execution propriety decision table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the promotion pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the promotion pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the demonstration display control process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pending | holding information update process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch notice process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch notice pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the holding information display combination prefetch notice pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pyrotechnician prefetch notice pattern determination process of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal mode effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pyrotechnic promotion pattern determination process of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special mode effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ST mode effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd pending | holding information update process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch notice termination process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode transfer process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the demonstration display (2) of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the demonstration display (3) of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the demonstration display (4) of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo | simulation ream of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pyrotechnic prefetch notice of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pyrotechnic prefetch notice of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding information display combination prefetch notice of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the reservation information number change prefetch notice of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of a main part of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base in which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (a player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3) A rear frame base plate (not shown) provided detachably, and a rear frame (not shown) supported rotatably by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame is Since it is accommodated in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame components provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained. In addition, in the dish unit 8, respective cover members (an upper dish upper cover 8a, a lower dish cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In the state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

  A decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp which will be described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

  Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp / LED 27) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 and is sensed from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics. Thereby, since the change in the display mode by light can be given, the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 that is provided below the upper tray 17 and can store, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p that can store a game ball, an upper plate upper cover 8a that is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decoration member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

  The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge outlet 20 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the rear side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball path of a game ball paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), or a ball path cover (illustrated) that connects the discharge port and the supply port 21 to form a ball path. Abbreviation) is provided. When a game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the game ball is paid out, but the upper ball 17 stays in the vicinity of the payout port 20. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are transferred from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. 18 is sent.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the upper plate 17. By using this plated member 17b, the decoration effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

  The upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects as a player operates (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the arrangement configuration (position, direction) of the operation unit 9, in the drawing, as an example, the pressing operation button 9A protrudes from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 configured to be provided with a jog dial 9B is shown.

  In addition, about the front frame 3, in the part in the left side (namely, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) toward the player side from the surface (front surface), for example, fraud such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act by the unauthorized member is performed on various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the part.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an unauthorized act, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back side of the front frame 3 at a portion where the invading act by the unauthorized member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an unauthorized member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering portion, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to prepare a member for each of these functions separately. Therefore, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituting member includes a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. And a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

  A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the above-described dish unit 8. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

  The launch handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, and a support ball. A firing stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the camera, a firing stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning on / off the firing stop switch, and a handle disposed so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d. And a cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased or decreased according to the rotation amount (rotation angle), and is stored in the upper plate 17 by the driving force at that time. The played game ball is launched at a predetermined timing toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). For example, in this embodiment, 90.9 game balls can be launched per minute by the launch drive device, and one game ball can be launched approximately every 0.66 seconds. At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the launch driving device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by a payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, there is provided a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times. The game ball is fired by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by a protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

  In addition, as a method of increasing / decreasing the launch intensity of the game ball in the launch device 26, the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b, By changing the power supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown), the launch intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased, but as other launch devices, it is linked to the turning operation of the handle grip of the launch handle. It may be provided with a launching spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism for winding (clamping) the launching spring. In such a launching device, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip of the launching handle to increase or decrease the degree of winding (clamping) of the launching spring. The firing intensity can be increased or decreased.

  The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the dish unit 8 in the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper dish 17 and the lower dish 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can flow and roll. doing. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 opens and closes the first guide rail 30, the second guide rail 30 ′, the stage 31, the first start port 32, the second start port 33, and the second start port 33. The blade member 34, the passing gate 35, the big prize opening 37, the big prize opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the big prize opening 37, the plurality of general prize winning openings 40, the out opening 41, the upper movable production member 42A, and the lower movable production member 42B. , A cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the big winning port 37, and the general winning port 40 form a passing region through which a game ball can pass. . The big prize opening shutter 37A is a displacement member that can be displaced into a first mode in which a game ball can easily pass through a passing area (a big prize opening 37) and a second mode in which it is difficult to close. Equivalent to. FIG. 3 shows a state where the cover member 43 is removed. The special winning opening 37, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the cover member 43 are provided as components or parts constituting the variable winning device.

  The first guide rail 30 is disposed so as to extend from the left side toward the upper center of the game board 1 toward the game board 1, and is constituted by an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The second guide rail 30 ′ is arranged so as to extend from the upper right side toward the lower right side toward the game board 1, and includes an outer rail 30 </ b> C and an inner rail 30 </ b> D. The outer rail 30 </ b> C and the inner rail 30 </ b> D are for guiding the game ball from the upper right side of the game board 1 to the big winning opening 37 arranged at the lower right side. A plurality of convex portions 30E that can come into contact with the game balls flowing down between the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are provided at predetermined intervals on the surfaces where the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D face each other. Yes. As a result, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30 'is prevented from advancing by repeatedly coming into contact with the convex portion 30E before being released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30', resulting in a grand prize. The traveling speed of the game ball is effectively decelerated before reaching the mouth 37. The lower end of the second guide rail 30 'is located near the upper right side of the cover member 43 (see FIG. 4). As a result, the game ball released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 ′ abuts on an upper surface 43 a of a cover member 43 to be described later, and then rolls along the upper surface 43 a toward the big prize opening 37. And move on. FIG. 3 shows a form in which the convex portions 30E of the outer rail 30C and the convex portions 30E of the inner rail 30D are arranged at equal intervals along the direction in which the game balls are guided while facing each other. These convex portions may be arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions shifted from each other along the direction in which the game balls are guided.

  The stage 31 distributes the game ball flow area in the game area 1 p and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or a stage 31 or the like driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning at any one of the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the big winning port 37, and the general winning port 40, and if the game ball is not won or passed When the player passes through the gate 35 and does not win a prize after that, it is recovered by being discharged from the out port 41.

  Note that winning means that the game ball passes through the passing area or enters the passing area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through or enters the passage area, a situation that is advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second start opening 33, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.) is given. Means. At this time, passing through the passing area by the game ball means simply passing, and entering the passing area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, the passing and the entering are substantially synonymous. Accordingly, both the passing of the game ball to the passing area and the entering of the game lead to winning, and therefore, in the following description, it is unified as “winning” unless otherwise specified.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, since the launch force applied to the game ball is generally small, the game ball flows down mainly on the left side of the stage 31. When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launch force applied to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30 ′. . In general, the method of hitting the game ball down to the left side of the stage 31 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball down along the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30 ′ is “ It is called “right-handed”.

  The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 provide a lottery opportunity on the condition that a game ball wins (passes), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives the opportunity to do.

  The first start port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins the first start port 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 32 is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided directly below the first start port 32. When a game ball wins the second start port 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The second start port 33 is determined to be difficult to win by a blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 33 is detected by the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to have a forward tilting / retreating posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start port 33, This is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win a game ball at the start port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  Note that the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to one that opens and closes the blade member 34 in the front-rear direction, but for example, a so-called electric tulip type that widens the starting port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1 Or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the start port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of a game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by a passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The big prize opening 37 is opened in a winning game state (such as a big hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. The big winning opening 37 is provided at the lower right side of the game area 1p and substantially at the right side of the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. In addition, the position where the special winning opening 37 is arranged is not limited to the position described above, and can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  The big winning opening 37 includes an opening having a relatively large size in the left-right direction so that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. The special winning opening 37 is formed by the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A and the cover member 43. The special winning opening 37 is formed as an open opening between the front face of the game board 1 and the cover member 43 when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in an open state, and is closed when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state. It becomes.

  The special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the special winning opening 37. The size in the short direction of the big prize opening shutter 37A is about the diameter of the game ball. The special prize opening shutter 37A is provided so as to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. In the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A, the state protruding forward of the game board 1 becomes a closed state in which the special winning opening 37 is closed, and the state retracted to the rear of the gaming board 1 becomes an open state in which the special winning opening 37 is opened. . The upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is an inclined surface with a relatively gentle downward-sloping tendency in the closed state. The special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to be opened and closed by a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the cover member 43 is disposed so as to face the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A. The cover member 43 has an upper surface 43 a that is connected to the closed large winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A, a front end guide portion 43 b, and an opening 43 c corresponding to the large winning opening 37. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the upper surface 43a extends from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 'to the right end of the big prize opening 37 (opening 43c), and is relatively gently lowered to the left. Make a trend slope. The upper surface 43a is disposed so as to lead to the big winning opening 37 (opening 43c) located at the left end while supporting the plurality of game balls emitted from the second guide rail 30 '. The front end guide portion 43b forms an upright wall and is formed to extend from the right end of the upper surface 43a to the left end of the special winning opening 37 (opening 43c). On the inner surface of the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 43d that can come into contact with the game ball are provided at predetermined intervals. In addition, a plurality of convex portions 1d that can come into contact with the game ball are also provided at predetermined intervals on an appropriate front portion of the game board 1 that faces the front end guide portion 43b. The convex portion 1d of the game board 1 and the convex portion 43d of the cover member 43 are arranged in a staggered manner at positions shifted from each other along the traveling direction of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball that rolls along the upper surface 43a and the front end guide portion 43b repeatedly abuts on the convex portions 1d and 43d alternately while moving to the left end of the big prize opening 37 (large prize opening shutter 37A). The progress of the game ball is effectively decelerated before passing through the special winning opening 37 (large winning opening shutter 37A). The upper surface 43a, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the front end guide portion 43b form a passage through which a game ball can flow when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state, and suppress the progression of the flowing game ball. The suppression part 430 is formed. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the opening 43 c is disposed at a position corresponding to the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A and forms the big prize opening 37. A ball passage (not shown) for collecting game balls and a big prize opening count switch 370 are provided at the location of the game board 1 located inside the cover member 43. The game ball that has dropped from the open big winning opening 37 is led to the big winning opening count switch 370 through the ball passage, and is detected as a win by the big winning opening count switch 370. In addition, the detailed configuration and operation related to the special winning opening 37 will be described later.

  One or more general winning ports 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 40, a lottery is not performed, but a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non-probability / non-short-time gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are not probable. There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming state) that becomes higher than the non-temporary gaming state, and a time-short gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probabilistic non-temporary gaming state, and the special symbol in the normal gaming state When the lottery is won, the game shifts to a big hit game state (specific game state).

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning to the second starting port 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric projectile. This state is a so-called “electric support”, and it becomes easy to store a reserved ball of a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game ball by winning the second start opening 33. Specifically, the short-time gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-short gaming state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (short-time gaming state 2). ), Which means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (time-short game state 3). For example, the short-time gaming state includes a state in which the short-time gaming state 1, the short-time gaming state 2, and the short-time gaming state 3 proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a short time gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, it will surely shift to the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state (the normal gaming state that is the probability-changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state), and the non-probable / non-time-short gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state). Therefore, the game is not shifted to the normal game state which is a non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, the normal game that is in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state when the symbol variation number of the special symbol game (the number of games) reaches a predetermined number without shifting to the big hit gaming state in the probability variation / short time gaming state Transition to the state.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, 10 special symbol lotteries (10 special symbol variation display or stop display) were performed in the probability variation / short time gaming state. In addition, the game shifts to a non-probability / non-short-time gaming state. It should be noted that the probabilistic / short-time gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. Is arranged. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotating operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

  The LED unit 5 informs the player of each gaming state and the lottery result. As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2 has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes a lamp corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the normal transition to the big hit gaming state is confirmed. It is lit (or flashes) when a special symbol changes in the gaming state, or when an additional character to be described later appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit gaming state.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory when the game ball wins the passing gate 35. The lottery result for “game” is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be turned on in red and blue, for example. In the normal symbol game, the LED lamp 511 is lit in red when winning, while it is lit in blue when lost in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is allowed. In addition, other lighting modes may be used as the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, for example, the lighting state or the blinking state in the case of winning, and the lighting state in the case of losing. It may be.

  In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing a variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524. In this case, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display that has been put on hold for performing the variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are positioned on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, and 524 are turned off. When the number of holdings is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522, and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holds is “4”, all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are lit.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the “special symbol game” and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 32, and the first The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port 33, and the second The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol.

  The variation display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED and the like, and each segment individually turning on and off. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the second special symbol are different from each other. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and there is a nominal jackpot symbol such as “probability variation 1” that indicates that the transition to the probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. (See FIG. 7). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and the designations such as “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” that indicate the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. And a small hit symbol of a name such as “small hit” that triggers the transition to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 7). That is, the winning symbol of the first special symbol does not have a small hitting symbol that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state, and the winning symbol of the second special symbol hits the small hit that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state There is a design. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554. When the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the first starting port 32, the first special symbol for the next special symbol game is displayed. The number of times the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the screen can be executed (the number of hold) is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564. When the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Or, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the second starting port 33, it is reserved for the symbol variation display for the special symbol game after the next time. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (the number of suspensions) is displayed. Each of the 1st special symbol reservation display part 55 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display part 56 is arranged side by side up and down, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display part 52. The display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the hold number by the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are moved to the first start port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. A game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 that has been suspended The symbol variation display is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second special symbol display unit 54. 2 The number of variable display suspensions of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of a game ball at the start port 33 is four at the maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (FIG. 6) is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory (start memory information), and the information of the four first special symbol games that are held is stored in the first special symbol start memory area ( 1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which is stored as the start storage. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area ( 0) is stored as the start memory, and the information of the second special symbol game for the four times held is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Remembered. Accordingly, the total number of winning holds in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 The winning suspension to the first starting port 32 and the winning suspension to the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

  The round display unit 59 is lit while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games (round games) to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is basically defined as 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “16R”). In this case, the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. To do. Note that the number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may indicate the number of orders indicating the order in which round games are executed sequentially. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16R” is described, and when the latter is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16Rth” is written. In the following description, “round game” may be simply referred to as “round”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged at the approximate center so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of winning lottery based on winning of game balls to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images relating to the game, for example, an identification pattern for performance, an effect image in the normal game state, an effect in the big hit game state An image, a demonstration image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the variation of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first start port 32 or the second start port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 62.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start port switch 320 disposed behind the first start port 32. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330 receive a predetermined detection signal as a winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. This is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected with a pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 350, a normal symbol lottery is performed on the assumption that the game ball has won the pass gate 35. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may make it do.

  The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. Thereby, the pass gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning port left switch 400A and a general winning port right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning port 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a big prize port count switch 370 disposed below the big prize port 37. The big prize opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 37. When a winning of the game ball is detected by the big winning port count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 or the lower plate 17 or the lower plate. Dispensing to the plate 18. The big prize opening count switch 370 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 when the game ball passes through the big prize opening 37.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a special prize opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving a special prize opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the special prize opening 37. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 37 and a closed state in which a winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. When the special winning opening 37 is opened by such a special winning opening shutter 37A, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, and the big winning game state is set. Performed when migrated.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 51 in the predetermined light emission mode, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second start port 33. It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in a gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state (“non-probability change / non-short-time gaming state” in this embodiment) is 0/257, and the blade member 34 Will never be released. On the other hand, the normal symbol hit probability in the high probability state (time-short game state) is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is released for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Further, the number of normal symbols that become a winning symbol in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second start port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 displays the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 when the game ball is detected by the first start port 320 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. The first one based on the winning of a game ball at the first start port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 The number of the special symbol variable display execution (start) is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the first special symbol that has been reserved as the number of the reserved symbols relating to the first special symbol is started.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol hold display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 330, the second special symbol hold display unit 56 The second based on the winning of a game ball at the second start port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of suspension (execution) of the special symbol variation display (ie, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol) is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. . Note that the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 may be variably displayed in the order of winning in accordance with the winning order.

  In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of suspensions in which the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 places the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 in the upper limit. When the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of the variable display hold numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 each. (That is, up to 4 detection times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable symbol display, the number of holdings is again added up to four.

  When the number of first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games corresponding to four holding numbers is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, in the case of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of the second special symbol game held is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings is 4 in the main RAM 63. 2 are sequentially stored as starting memories in the special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4).

  Therefore, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is 8 in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol are displayed. The number of hold displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display section 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the big prize opening 37 by the big prize opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the big prize opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, one winning number) or in advance. It is maintained until one of the conditions such as a specified later-described opening time elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the big prize opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the big prize opening shutter 37A is driven so as to close the big prize opening 37.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit gaming state, a game in which the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times based on a big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later is referred to as a “round game (round game)”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. Regarding the state from when the grand prize opening 37 is closed by one round game until the grand prize opening 37 is opened as the next round game, “inter-round game” or “inter-round interval” or Also simply called “interval”. In the present embodiment, the big prize opening 37 is opened and closed only once in one round, but in other examples, the big prize opening 37 is opened several times in one round. And there may be a closed state. In addition, when a plurality of big prize openings are provided, it is possible to exclusively control the open / closed states of the plurality of big prize openings in one round. That is, in one round, while one large winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the remaining large winning openings are continuously closed.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from that of the big hit game state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit gaming state of the present embodiment, it is prescribed that the big winning opening 37 is opened only once. . Of course, in the small hit gaming state, an arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state that shifts when a small hit is made by special symbol lottery. The game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, in the non-probability changing gaming state, when the small hit win is made and the game state is shifted to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state remains the non-probability changing gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probable gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit win is made in the probability variation gaming state and a transition is made to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the small hit gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability change gaming state before the transition to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with respect to “round” with numbers such as 1 round or 1st round, for example, 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc., simply “R In the case of a single round game, when the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, the specified number of winnings per round is reached before the open state is opened. Will close the round winning game without closing the big winning opening for the remaining number of times of opening.

  In the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made up of numbers, except for specific cases, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to know that it is a “hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, in any one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to “big hit” that can be obtained by many balls. When the display is stopped, the combination of effect decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 has a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in a plurality of symbol rows) In addition, an effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, other readable / writable storage media can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when power is cut off.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, and an external terminal board 80.

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall, or a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots. For data communication.

  The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a pass gate switch 350, a big winning port count switch 370, a general winning port left switch 400A, and a general winning port. A right switch 400B and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation of the hall manager.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / firing control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving means.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal for requesting lending of game balls in accordance with a player's operation, and signals can be transmitted to and received from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the general winning opening 40. Ten game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the big prize opening 37.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power, and the game ball is controlled to be launched toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes a timer interrupt process as an interrupt process even during execution of a main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed in response to an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60 and is configured to be supplied with commands from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. A circuit 76, a sound control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79; The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the audio control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down button switch 90A provided on the push-down button 9A and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60.

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. For example, the display control circuit 76 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 77 is for performing control related to sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that performs control related to sound, a sound data ROM that stores various sound data, a sound signal, and the like. An amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the signal is included. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. In response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71, the sound source IC is used to select one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (oscillates) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the push-down operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9. Etc.) may be controlled.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
Next, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot gaming state is 1 / 99.75 (657/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state), the high probability In time (probability game state), it is 1 / 1.05 (5020/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol in the small hit gaming state is 1 / 29.92 (2190/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to a maximum of 10 times as the number of games (the number of variations of the special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, the winning opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is the winning pattern 1, and the round game round number is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the big winning slot is 7R), the bonus name indicating the effect mode in the big hit gaming state is “normal bonus”, and the bonus content is “7R bonus”. This “normal bonus” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and 0 from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. Thereby, in the “normal bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 105. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100. In the present embodiment, “bonus” means a notification effect related to the number of prize balls.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability change 1”, the winning pattern is 2, and the round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “large extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “large extra bonus” Bonus ”. With regard to the “large bonus”, with regard to winning at the big winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R is one and the estimated number of winnings from 8R to 16R is four. As a result, in the “large bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 645. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 2”, the winning pattern is 3, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “middle bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 1 ”. The “medium bonus 1” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and 3 from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, the number of planned award balls is 510 for “middle bonus 1”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 2” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 20/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 3”, the winning pattern is 4 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “medium bonus bonus 2”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 2 ”. “Nakagami Bonus 2” is an estimated number of winnings for the 1R to 7R, 2 for the 8R and 9R, and 10 for the 10R and 11R. The number of winnings is 3, the estimated number of winnings in the 12th R is 1, and the estimated number of winnings in the 13th to 16Rs is 4. As a result, the number of planned award balls is 510 for “middle bonus 2”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 3” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 4”, the winning pattern is 5, round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “small extra bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “small” The bonus is 1 ”. “Small top bonus 1” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and two estimated winning numbers from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, in the “small extra bonus 1”, the planned number of winning balls is 375. The probability (entrance rate) of “probability variation 4” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 15/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 5”, the winning pattern is 6 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “small extra bonus 2”, and the production content is “small” The bonus is 2 ”. In the “small bonus 2”, the estimated number of winnings from the 1R to 13R is 1 and the estimated number of winnings from the 14R to 16R is 4 for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, in “small extra bonus 2”, the planned number of winning balls is 375. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 5” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 6”, the winning pattern is 7, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “no extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “no extra” Bonus ”. In the “no extra bonus”, the estimated number of winnings from 1R to 16R for the winning in the big winning opening 37 is one. As a result, in the “no extra bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 240. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 6” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the small bonus symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 8, and the bonus name and bonus content are “small bonus”. The rush rate of the small hit symbol is set to 100/100. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state does not have the concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  The number of winning prizes corresponds to a specified number of winnings that triggers when the winning prize opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state in one round. In this embodiment, the number of winning points (specified number of winnings) Is set to “1”. That is, when one winning prize is counted in the round winning prize opening 37, the big winning prize opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state. It should be noted that the number of winning prize counts (specified number of winnings) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. In other words, even when a winning exceeding the number of large winning mouth counts is detected in one round, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning number is paid out. As a result, over-winning that exceeds the number of large winning mouth counts is possible. This point will be described later.

  The short-time performance (specification of the short-time gaming state) is set so that the short-time gaming state continues for a high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state). The number of winning balls will be 3 per winning prize at the starting opening (first starting opening 32 and second starting opening 33), 10 per winning prize at the general winning opening 40, It is set to be 15 per winning prize. The normal symbol hit probability is set to 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of symbols per normal symbol is set to one. The winning count when the second start port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit.

  The specifications may include the following contents. For example, for special symbols, the jackpot probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win the jackpot when the probability is high than when the probability is low. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the winning probability in the other special symbol is higher than that in one special symbol. The special symbol digestion order may be a winning order without setting the priority order for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be a specification for preferential digestion of the first special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the kind of jackpot symbol of a 1st special symbol. Further, an extra bonus may be executed even in the big hit gaming state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings) is set to “1”, but is not limited thereto. For example, the number of winning prizes may be set to 2 or more. In such a case, it is desirable to provide a large winning opening shutter or the like that allows more game balls than the large winning opening count to pass simultaneously. The short time performance may be greater than the ST count (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST count including, for example, 0. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls related to the big winning opening is set to a value different from the above, the estimated number of winning balls is calculated using the value and the estimated winning number, and the number of extra balls to be described later is notified. Can be. For normal symbols, the hit probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low, and may be won when the probability is low, for example. The number of symbols per normal symbol is not limited to the above, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The number of winning counts at the second start port may be a value other than those described above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, three types of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as one round opening / closing patterns (one round opening / closing patterns) for the special winning opening 37. The open / close patterns A to C are open / close patterns corresponding to the big hit game state, and the open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern corresponding to the small hit game state. The opening / closing pattern C in the small hit gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown as an opening / closing pattern for one round for convenience. The open / close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the number of types, specific times for defining the open / close patterns, and the like may be other than illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 10 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section in which the open state is 10 s is a long open in which the open state of the special winning opening 37 is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 10 s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 5 seconds. The opening / closing pattern B is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section in which the open state is 5 s, the middle winning opening is shorter than the long opening in the open state of the special winning opening 37. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, middle opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 5 s.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only 0.1 s. The section in which the open state is 0.1 s is a short opening that is considerably shorter than the middle opening. That is, the open / close pattern C is a pattern in which the short circuit is opened only once, and the open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.1 s.

  The substantial round game in the big hit game state is a round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing patterns A and B including the long opening or middle opening in which the game ball can be won among the opening / closing patterns A to C described above. Applicable. The round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing pattern C is a non-real round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

  Note that the following contents may be used as the open / close pattern of one round. The open patterns are not limited to the above three types, and may be two types or less or four types or more. For the opening / closing pattern A, the opening time is not 10 s but may be, for example, less than 10 s or more than 10 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round. For the opening / closing pattern B, the opening time is not 5 seconds, but may be, for example, less than 5 seconds or more than 5 seconds, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round. Furthermore, the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B may have the same opening time, or the opening / closing pattern B may have a longer opening time than the opening / closing pattern A. For the opening / closing pattern C, the opening time is not 0.1 s, but may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the round interval in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 8 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns). The winning pattern 1 occurs in the case of a normal bonus, and the number of rounds defined for the open round (hereinafter referred to as “specified number of rounds”) and the long opening or middle that enables winning to the big winning opening 37. The actual number of rounds defined only for rounds including at least the opening is a hit pattern defined as 7R. The interval between rounds starts immediately after a specified number of game balls (1) are detected by the grand prize counter switch 370 in one round, and is a big prize until the first open state in the next round. This corresponds to a section in which the mouth 37 is closed. The interval between rounds may be started immediately after the special winning opening 37 is completely closed in one round. As shown in the figure, the interval pattern between rounds includes an interval pattern a in which the time for closing (closing time) is 0.3 s, an interval pattern b in which 1.65 s is set, and an interval pattern in which 2.31 s is set. c, an interval pattern d of 2.97 s is defined. In the winning pattern 1, all the intervals between rounds are interval pattern a, and the winning a prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds, and the winning prize opening 37 is in the 8R to 16R rounds. It is defined to be an open / close pattern C. That is, the hit pattern 1 stipulates that the substantial rounds are 7 rounds from 1R to 7R, and the remaining 9 rounds from 8R to 16R are executed as non-essential rounds.

  The winning pattern 2 is a winning pattern that is generated when the extra bonus is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 2, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern d, and the 1R to 16R It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the extra bonus that is executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 2, the number of winning balls based only on the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings: 1) is 240. However, if over winning is included, the expected number of winning balls is Therefore, the number (405) corresponding to these differences is reported as an additional number in the first half round (rounds 1R to 7R).

  The winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern that occurs when the medium addition bonus 1 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 3, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern c, and the 1R to 16R It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the medium addition bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 3, the number of award balls based on the prescribed number of winnings is 240, but if the over winning is included, the scheduled number of winning balls is 510. The number to be performed (270) is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern that is generated when the medium addition bonus 2 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 9R is the interval pattern b, and from the end of the 9R to the start of the 11R The interval between rounds is interval pattern c, the interval between rounds between the 11th and 12th rounds is interval pattern a, the interval between rounds from the end of the 12th R to the start of the 16th R is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16th Rs It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the middle addition bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 4, the number (270) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (510) is the second half round (rounds after the 8th round). It is reported as an additional number.

  The winning pattern 5 is a winning pattern that is generated when the bonus 1 is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 5, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern b, It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small extra bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 240, but when including over prizes, the planned number of prize balls is 375. The number (135) to be reported is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The winning pattern 6 is a winning pattern that is generated when the bonus 2 is added and is specified with the specified round number and the actual round number being 16R. In the hit pattern 6, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 13Rth is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 13Rth to the start of the 16th R is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16Rths It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small extra bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 6, the number (135) corresponding to the difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the planned number of winning balls (375) is reported as an additional number until the second half round. .

  The winning pattern 7 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is not added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 7 is defined so that the interval between all rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 16thR is the interval pattern a, and the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all the rounds of the 1R to 16R. Has been. In the extra bonus executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 7, there is no difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the planned number of winning balls (240) because over-winning is unlikely to occur, and the number of added balls is notified. Absent.

  The winning pattern 8 occurs in the small winning gaming state, and is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C only once. That is, the winning pattern 8 is executed as a winning pattern in which the possibility of winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening 37 becomes extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the interval time between rounds is defined as the above-described interval patterns a to d on the assumption that the game ball is continuously fired. The interval time between rounds may be defined with reference to the starting point of the launch operation. For example, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls are continuously fired due to the start of the launch operation, for example, the second game ball can reach the winning prize opening shutter 37A from the start of the launch operation. The assumed maximum arrival time of the second wax is 3.99 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s). Similarly, the third assumed maximum arrival time is 4.65 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), the fourth assumed maximum arrival time is 5.31 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), 5 The assumed maximum arrival time of the individual is 5.97 s (3.33 s + 0.66 + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s). Thereby, as interval pattern b, you may prescribe | regulate the time corresponding to such 2nd assumption maximum arrival time. That is, the interval patterns a to d may be other than the above-described times, but the interval pattern a is preferably a time less than the second assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern b is the third assumed maximum. Preferably, the interval pattern c is less than the fourth assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern d is less than the fifth assumed maximum arrival time. It is preferable to become. In this embodiment, the interval pattern d, which is the maximum time of the interval between rounds, is defined as a time in which 4 winnings per round (3 winnings over) can be realized, but 5 or more per round It may be a time for winning a prize. However, in the case where five or more winnings are possible, it is preferable that the longitudinal dimension of the large winning opening shutter 37A is a length that allows at least five game balls to pass simultaneously. In addition, the hit pattern 1 may be assigned with the same opening / closing pattern for all of the rounds, or may be different only in some rounds. Further, the hit pattern 1 may have a different interval pattern only in some intervals between rounds. The hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different opening / closing patterns in some or all rounds. In addition, the hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different interval patterns only in some intervals between rounds.

[Specifications of the big prize opening shutter]
Next, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as different from FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 (not shown) (the direction indicated by the white arrow in the figure). For example, when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, the long dimension L is about d × 8 + a (6 mm) = 94 mm. As a result, a maximum of eight game balls can be simultaneously passed through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. However, in the present embodiment, when one game ball is launched in response to the start of the launch operation, the firing interval from when one next game ball is launched or one game ball is launched. 10B, considering the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A (the upper region of the right end portion of the closed big winning opening shutter 37A). In addition, a maximum of four game balls can be passed at the same time. Note that the time until the game ball that has reached the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A is detected by the big prize opening count switch 370 (the time until the interval between rounds starts) is about 0.1 s. The time required for the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A to move from one position to the other position of the closed position and the open position is about 0.01 s. It is.

  That is, in this embodiment, the launching device 26 has a firing rate of 90.90 per minute and a firing interval of 0.66 seconds. Further, the game ball passes through the first guide rail 30 and the second guide rail 30 ′ from a launch preparation position (not shown) to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A as approximately 3.00-3. It takes 33 seconds. As a result, in a state in which the player continues to make a right strike, after the first game ball reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next game ball wins a big prize approximately 0.33 to 0.99 seconds later. It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. In addition, the prize winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of 94 mm, and a maximum of eight gaming balls with a diameter d = 11 mm can be passed in a row at the same time. Since it has an inclined surface that advances by 11 mm in 33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds, a maximum of four game balls can substantially pass at the same time. The inter-round interval is started when a winning of one game ball is detected during the round game, and is started immediately before the big winning port shutter 37A completely closes the big winning port 37. Also, regarding the time from when the game winning ball shutter 37A is opened immediately after the game ball reaches the right end portion of the game winning port shutter 37A until the game ball winning is detected by the game winning port count switch 370. 0.1 seconds is required. Furthermore, it is assumed that 0.01 second is required for one opening / closing operation in which the special prize opening shutter 37A moves from the closed position to the open position or from the open position to the closed position.

  In the present embodiment, by assuming the various times as described above, in the state where the right hit is continuously performed in the big hit gaming state, the interval time between the rounds after the end of the 1R round is an interval. If the pattern d is 2.97 s, four winnings including three over winnings per round are possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern d, for example, after the game ball that is detected for winning in the first round reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next game ball will take the big prize opening after 0.99 seconds at the maximum. From reaching the right end portion of the shutter 37A, the time that four game balls including this game ball will be positioned on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is approximately 0.99 s + 0.66 s × 3 ( ) = 2.97 s. In addition, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 2.31s of the interval pattern c, three winnings including two over winnings per round are possible. This can be assumed as a state where the number of over-wins is reduced from two over-wins. Thereby, with respect to the time of the interval pattern c, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d corresponding to the above-mentioned three over winnings with respect to the time when three game balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. This is considered to be obtained by subtracting one passage time from 2.97 s-0.66 s = 2.31 s. Similarly, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 1.65 s of the interval pattern b, two winnings including one over winning per round are possible. This can be assumed as a state in which two over winnings are reduced to one over winning. Thereby, for the time of the interval pattern b, 2.31 s of the interval pattern c corresponding to the two over winnings described above for the time when two game balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It is considered that the passing time for one piece is subtracted from 2.31s−0.66s = 1.65s. Furthermore, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 0.3 s of the interval pattern a, there is no over winning per round and only one winning is possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern a, for example, after the game ball that is detected for winning in the first round reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball will be the big prize opening after 0.33 seconds at the shortest. In order to reach the right end portion of the shutter 37A, it is proved that the next game ball is opened before reaching the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A in 0.3s shorter than 0.33 seconds. The

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. The table defines lottery value (random value) information for determining predetermined items based on lottery values (random numbers) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”. 11 and 13 show the selection rate (%) corresponding to the lottery rate.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. This additional pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern selection table is a table for selecting an extra pattern as a hit effect pattern to be described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 7. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 7 and defines various additional patterns that are items to be determined and the selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

  According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the hit pattern 2, the extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the extra bonus. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle add-on patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle add-on patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 6) associated with the hit pattern 6, the small extra patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) associated with the hit pattern 7, the no-addition pattern 1 is selected at a predetermined selection rate (100% in this embodiment) as the extra pattern corresponding to the no extra bonus. Is done.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating an additional pattern that is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. Each of the additional pattern selection tables other than the additional pattern selection table (success pattern 7) defines four additional patterns. However, the additional pattern selection table may define three or less additional patterns, or each additional pattern selection table. The number of patterns defined for each may be different. Also in the additional pattern selection table (pattern 7), a plurality of additional patterns may be defined.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an addition pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table that is referred to in the effect processing during the round (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern table is a table for defining the extra number for the effect and the round for performing the notification according to the extra pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines an additional pattern and round number as reference items and an additional number as a decision item. In addition, the number of additions is notified together with the appearance of an additional character described later.

  According to the extra pattern table (large extra bonus) corresponding to the extra extra bonus, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each extra extra pattern 1 to 4 as an extra pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number to the 2R, “105” is notified as the addition number to the 4R, and “270” is notified as the addition number to the 7R. The total number added up is “405”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 1) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 1 to 4 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number in the 2R, “105” is notified as the addition number in the 4R, and “135” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number added is “270”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 2) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 5 to 8 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 5, “135” is notified as the addition number at 8R, and “135” is notified as the addition number at 9R. The total number added is “270”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 1) corresponding to the small additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number to the 2R, and “105” is notified as the addition number to the 4R. The total number of these added is “135”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 2) corresponding to the small additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 5 to 8 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 5, “135” is reported as the addition number only to the 8th R.

  According to the extra pattern table (no extra bonus) corresponding to the no extra bonus, the number of rounds corresponding to the no extra pattern 1 as the extra pattern and the reported extra number are defined. For example, in the no-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not notified in any round.

  Note that the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, but the additional number (405, 270, 135) obtained from the difference between the number of prize balls and the expected number of prize balls is appropriately distributed. You can do it. In addition, after a numerical value exceeding the total added number is notified as an additional number, a numerical value to be notified may be set so as to be subtracted, so that the predetermined total additional number may be finally obtained. . In addition, for example, “210” may be defined as an initial value, and an additional number may be notified in any round.

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The added character lottery table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra character lottery table is a table for selecting, by lottery, an extra character that appears at the start of the extra bonus or informing the extra number according to the extra pattern. The added character lottery table defines various added patterns as reference items, added characters as determined items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an added character by lottery. As an additional character, “animal”, “female”, and “fireworker” are defined.

  For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the “female” addition character is generally higher than that of the “animal” addition character, and the selection rate of the “fireworker” addition character is higher than that of the “female” addition character. Is specified to be high. In the intermediate addition patterns 1 to 8, the selection rate of the additional characters “female” and “fireworks” is generally higher than the additional characters “animal”. The small addition patterns 1 to 8 are generally defined such that the selection rate of the “animal” additional character is higher than that of the “female” or “fireworker” additional character. In the no-addition pattern 1, it is defined that the selection rate of the additional character “animal” is the highest. According to the added character appearing based on such an added character lottery table, the type of bonus is suggested, and the degree of expectation for the prize ball is also increased from the added number that is notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  Note that the selection rate for allocating additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various added characters, additional patterns that cannot be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the “animal” additional character cannot be selected only in the large additional pattern, the “female” additional character cannot be selected only in the no additional pattern, and the “fireworks” additional character is Alternatively, the selection rate may be defined so that only the medium addition pattern or the large addition pattern can be selected.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
14 and 15 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 14, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S <b> 12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power interruption detection state is present. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power interruption detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set, and the process proceeds to S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S <b> 14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 15), and if it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, it proceeds to S16. Move processing.

  In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S17, and if it determines that there is no power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 15). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, moves the process to S30. .

  In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a display to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state in the case of the probability variation gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the start or end of the first fluctuation after power-on.

  In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S24, where the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S <b> 34, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process for the work area when the RAM is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S <b> 35, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. In the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S <b> 36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the rendering condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S42, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process proceeds to S37.

  In S <b> 42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the big winning opening 37 that is opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Large winning opening opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that an illegal act has occurred. The process of updating various timers is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. Although described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a winning determination random number value and a winning symbol determination random number value in accordance with detection signals from the first starting winning port switch 320 and the second starting winning port switch 330 and stores them in the main ROM 62. With reference to a big hit determination table (not shown), it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big lot and small lottery lottery) has been won, and the result of determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process in S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random number value, and the normal symbol determining table stored in the main ROM 62 are determined. Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the winning symbol is used, and the result of the determination is stored. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if not winning, the determination result indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, 3 times in 1.3 seconds, or 4 times in 1.4 seconds, or 6 times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing member 34 is opened, and when the wing member 34 is in the open state, the game ball can easily win the second starting port 33. If this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. The process to memorize is performed. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variably displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for generating data related to game information signals to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the first start port switch 320 and the second switch detected by the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S71, S72 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated in accordance with the execution of the change display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process for storing in the main RAM 63 a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above-described steps. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and opens / closes the LED power source (common signal) for turning on the LED, the special prize opening shutter 37A, and the blade member 34. Supply solenoid power for driving the solenoid that opens and closes. If this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning mouth related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main process, the main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in accordance with a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by one. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on the condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 starts from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a winning determination random number counter, a winning symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. The hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, a fixed timing every 2 ms is required to ensure this. I am trying to update with. If this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  In S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each passing area has detected a winning. For example, when the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the passing area determined to have won. The switch input process in S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. The payout request command corresponding to is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out a prize ball corresponding to a passing area whose bit is “1 (ON)” in accordance with the winning of a game ball from the payout device 83. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. Further, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the passing area that is the trigger of the command setting is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is finished, this timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S70, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor that can detect radio waves (not shown), a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S71. If any of the sensors described above is in the detected state, an error notification may be given, and even if, for example, a big prize opening count switch detects a winning of a game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it do.

  In S71, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter of the normal symbol game, the hit determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the normal RAM 63 normal Processing to store in the symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S73.

  In S73, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first start winning opening switch 320 or the second When it is determined that there is an input from the start winning prize switch 330, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding start opening winning counter is performed. When this process is finished, this switch input process routine is finished.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S80, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is finished.

[First start switch check processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first start port 32 is detected based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start port If the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S91, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the first starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the first start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first symbol symbols stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Then, the rendering condition determination random value is extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and are obtained by winning the game ball at the first starting port 32 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  In S94, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S95.

  In S95, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S <b> 96, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and the winning lottery result is determined. It becomes like this. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the effect display when it is determined that the winning effect is determined in the process of S95. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory before the execution of variation is possible. When this process is finished, the first start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Second start-up switch check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S <b> 100, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the second start port 33 is detected based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second start port If the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S101, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the second starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. The random number value for effect condition determination is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and the various kinds obtained by winning the game ball at the second starting port 33 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  In S104, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S106.

  In S <b> 106, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is finished, the second start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Big prize opening switch check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S <b> 110, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the big prize opening 37 is detected based on a detection signal from the big prize opening count switch 370. . In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 moves to S111 and determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 37 is not detected. In this case, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the big prize winning prize counter. The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls detected in one round has reached a predetermined winning number. If this process ends, the process moves to S112.

  In S <b> 112, the main CPU 61 sets a big prize opening prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The big prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 37. Become. On the condition that such a large winning opening winning command is received, the sub-control circuit 70 adds, for example, the number of extras displayed during the extra bonus to the expected number of winning balls described later. When this process is finished, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is finished.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 22, the numerical values shown at the sides of S <b> 121 to S <b> 128 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the control state flag storage area in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the first S120, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In S121 to S128, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and allows one of the processes in S121 to S128 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. Details of S121 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination elapses, the process of S123 is set to be executed. Details of S122 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. In the case of big hit or small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the process of S124 is set to be executed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. Details of S123 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main winning a prize mouth shutter read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening 37A is stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 in FIG. 15, the main CPU 61 reads out data for opening the big prize opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63, and outputs a signal for opening the big prize opening shutter 37A. It is supplied to the big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A. As a result, the main CPU 61 performs opening / closing control of the special winning opening 37. In other words, a winning game state is executed in which a predetermined advantageous game (a round game in which the special winning opening 37 changes into an open state in which the game ball 37 can easily receive a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to receive through an interval period) is repeated a predetermined number of times. Become. In this case, a small hit gaming state in which the special winning opening 37 is short-opened only once may be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) to the special winning opening open time timer. set. That is, it sets so that the process of S126 may be performed. Details of S124 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 executes a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a to d) has elapsed. The grand prize opening number counter is stored and updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S126 may be performed. Details of S125 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 61 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “1” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the special winning opening 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value indicating the hit end interval (06H) in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before re-opening of the big prize opening in the case of not being the final round. Is set in the control status flag. Details of S126 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S127.

  In S127, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. Details of S127 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S128.

  In S128, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S121. Details of S128 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flags to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ), (07H) in order, the processing of S121, S122, S123, and S128 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit or small hit. ) In order, the processing of S121, S122, and S123 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in order of (03H), (04H), (05H), and the process shown in FIG. The processes of S124, S126, and S125 shown are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S125, S127 to S128 shown in FIG. 21 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), (07H) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, it moves the process to S131. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of the start memory. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S132. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S133.

  In S132, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is “0” for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command stored in this way is supplied as a demonstration display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Thereby, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

  In S133, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is greater than “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is “0”. If it is determined that there is more data, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S134. It is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not more than “0”, that is, no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If so, the process proceeds to S135.

  In S <b> 134, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S <b> 135, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S136, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  In S137, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) to the first special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data in (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) that are jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the high probability jackpot determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with a small number is referred. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability-changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state as a special gaming state that easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big-hit gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition will be higher than the non-probable variable gaming state as a non-special gaming state that is less likely to transition to the specific gaming state than the probability-changing gaming state as the special gaming state.

  The special gaming state is a probability change / short time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state, but the special gaming state is at least one of a probability variation gaming state and a time saving gaming state. It may be in one game state. The non-special game state may include a case where the non-probability game state and the short-time game state are entered.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is used for determining whether or not the special symbol start storage area is extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in the process of S138, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S139, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination process of S138. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the gaming state flag.

  The main CPU 61 extracts a random number for determining the hit of the special symbol start storage area extracted in the winning of the game ball and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected small hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value.

  Since the small hit can occur in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit determination disturbance stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area. The small hit determination process is performed based on the numerical value, but the small hit determination process may be performed based only on the random number value for the hit determination stored in one of the special symbol start storage areas.

  As described above, in the process of S139, either the small hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is determined when both the big hit determination process of S138 and the small hit determination process of S139 are not won. Loss is determined as a game determination result. If this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  In S140, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a big hit win, and determines the small hit symbol when the small hit determination result is a big hit win, for either the big hit or the small hit. If it is lost, a process of determining a lost symbol is performed. Details of S140 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S141.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S140, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S138 and S139, and the value of the probability variation counter. A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random value extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same in the ST gaming state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S142, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the current variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S151. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S156.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S150 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 if the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 is the value (02H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S154.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random number value for determining the hit symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the first special symbol jackpot symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol allocation in FIG. 7) based on the winning symbol determination random number value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process for determining whether the symbol corresponds to probability variation 1) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 7) based on the random symbol value for determining the jackpot symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process of determining which of the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 is a symbol) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S139 in FIG. 23) is a win in the small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S157 when the small win is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S161 when it is not the small win.

  In S157, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the small bonus symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the first bonus symbol in FIG. 7) based on the random symbol value for winning symbol determination extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the small hit determination table. A process for determining whether or not the second special symbol small hit symbol allocation) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S158.

  In S158, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the small hit symbol and a command set of the small hit symbol of the determined first special symbol or second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol based on the data of the big hit symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command for the small special symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. . Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S159, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S160.

  In S160, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 61 displays the data related to the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 37 regarding the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 37, that is, the probability change 1 according to the first special symbol or the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 according to the second special symbol, Processing for setting the corresponding data in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines in S161 that it is neither big hit in S150 nor small hit in S156, that is, it is lost, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a mode based on the lost symbol data. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the manner of disabling display. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating special symbol variation time management (value set in the special symbol storage check process: 01H). If the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer set in the special symbol storage check process is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S172. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the processing to S173. At this time, the main CPU 61 recognizes the symbol stop by the symbol display device control process, and derives the display result with the symbol determined by the special symbol determination process.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. The symbol stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S <b> 174, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, if the symbol to be stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, for example, 1002 ms is set as the waiting time after decision, and if it is a lost symbol, for example, 540 ms is set as the waiting time after decision. . It should be noted that the same waiting time after determination may be used for both the winning symbol and the lost symbol, or the waiting time after fixing may be longer for the winning symbol than for the winning symbol. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S181. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S182. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit, it moves the process to S183. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S184.

  In S183, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S190.

  In S184, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation frequency) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S185.

  In S185, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S186.

  In S186, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S187. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189.

  In S187, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied as a command indicating the game state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S188.

  In S188, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 61 performs a process for determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S190. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S194.

  In S190, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S191. In the present embodiment, the hit start interval time corresponding to the case where the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol of “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” is the right end of the big winning opening shutter 37A after the game ball is fired. It is shorter than 3000 ms, which is the shortest time to reach the portion, for example, 2500 ms.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating a specific hit pattern as well as the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Based on the data indicating the winning pattern included in the winning start display command, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern such as an extra pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit start interval management process (03H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S201, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S202. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S202, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S203. On the other hand, if it is determined that the main CP is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S205.

  In S203, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and moves the process to S204.

  In S204, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening opening number counter, and moves the process to S205.

  In S <b> 205, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big win symbol or the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the winning pattern (big winning opening / closing pattern) shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol determined in S205. If this process ends, the process moves to S206.

  In S <b> 206, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In S <b> 207, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S208.

  In S <b> 208, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S209.

  In S <b> 209, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 10 s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the special winning opening opening number counter (for example, if the big win symbol of the first special symbol is “probability 1”). If this process ends, the process moves to S210.

  In S <b> 210, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the special winning opening 37. The variables stored in this way drive the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the special winning opening 37. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

  In S <b> 222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S223.

  In step S <b> 223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S225.

  In S <b> 225, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S <b> 226, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S227.

  In S <b> 227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the waiting time question management process routine before reopening the big prize opening is finished. In this process as well, data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the special prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big prize opening, the process proceeds to S231. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, the main routine for opening the special prize opening is ended.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize winning prize counter is “1” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “1” or more, it moves the process to S234. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “1” or more, it moves the process to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process corresponding to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the process to S233. In S232, a big prize opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the big winning opening opening time is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine for opening the special winning opening.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the big prize opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variables stored in this way are for closing the prize winning shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S240. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit of the number of large winning opening (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the large winning opening number (rounds), and the value of the large winning opening number counter It is determined whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of times that the special winning opening is opened is 16 (16R). If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the process proceeds to S240. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In addition, the time corresponding to interval pattern ad is set to the interval display time between rounds. If this process ends, the process moves to S238.

  In S238, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S239.

  In S <b> 239, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S241.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S <b> 242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The winning end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S251. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  In S251, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, it moves the process to S252. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

  In S252, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S253.

  In S253, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the type of the winning game state that has been completed is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S256.

  In S 254, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “01H” indicates a probability variation gaming state and a short-time gaming state. Note that the game state flag “00H” indicates the non-probability changing game state and the non-time-saving game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  In S <b> 255, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “10” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the hit end interval management process routine ends.

  In S256, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of winning gaming state (big hit, small hit) that has been completed in addition to information indicating a gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Such a gaming state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as a display control process.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S271.

  In step S <b> 271, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S272.

  In S272, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S273. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S273, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for display in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) receives various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and rendering image data based on data for displaying the rendering image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S274.

  In S274, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In step S <b> 275, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S <b> 276, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is finished, the process moves to S271, and thereafter, the processes of S271 to S276 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 71 is executing the main process, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute a command reception interrupt process or a timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 33 and the timer interrupt process with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S280, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S282, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S280 to each register. When this process is finished, the command reception interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S290, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S291.

  In S291, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. If this process ends, the process moves to S292.

  In step S292, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A is operated. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. If this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S290 to each register. When this process is finished, the timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in S300, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has not been received, the command analysis processing routine ends.

  In step S301, the sub CPU 71 reads the received command data, and performs processing according to the command data in subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S303. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S304.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a decorative symbol variation display mode based on the received variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the decorative symbol variation display mode is determined. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S306.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  The decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative symbols (numbers) have a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits). )) Is basically a big hit game state when the same decorative symbols (numbers) are arranged. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is “probability variation 1”, for example, with a predetermined probability (for example, the probability of 1/10 when the second special symbol is “probability variation 1”), The decorative design is a uniform line of numbers “3” or “7”. In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probability 1” of the first special symbol is a uniform line of the numbers “1”, “2”, “4” to “6”, and the jackpot symbol “2” of the second special symbol “ The decorative symbols corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” are numbers “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”. In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol has a specific appearance that is, for example, the number “135” as a combination of specific symbols, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the loss is a non-specific random symbol. Note that the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the decorative symbol is a uniquely determined relationship, for example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probable variation 1” is a uniform “3” or “7”, and the jackpot symbol “probable variation”. The decorative symbols corresponding to “2” to “probability 6” may be aligned with “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”. Also, for example, in the case of “Large bonus”, the decorative symbol is “3” or “7”, and in the case of “Middle bonus”, the decorative symbol is “1” or “5”. In the case of “Small extra bonus” and “No extra bonus”, the decorative symbol is “2”, “4”, or “6”, and the decorative symbol is stopped for each type of jackpot May be defined uniquely.

  In S306, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol stop command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S307. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S308.

  In step S <b> 307, the sub CPU 71 performs a decoration symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variably displayed. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command is received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S309. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S310.

  In S309, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. This winning effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S311. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S312.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the round. This in-round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S313. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. This winning end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This winning effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional pattern or the like as an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “08H” to the winning effect pattern flag in accordance with the special symbol stop symbol designation information included in the received winning start display command. As for the winning effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to a normal bonus, and “02H” to “07H” are a large extra bonus, a middle extra bonus 1, 2, a small extra bonus 1, 2, and a no extra bonus, respectively. Correspondingly, “08H” corresponds to a small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus or no extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S328.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern selection table in accordance with the value of the winning effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected addition pattern selection table and performs a process of selecting one of the addition patterns. At this time, for example, any additional pattern can be selected using a random number for determining the effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S324.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the selected addition pattern in the addition pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 21 additional patterns are provided as the additional patterns, and each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the middle and upper additional patterns 1 to 8, the small additional patterns 1 to 8, and the non-additional pattern 1 has an additional pattern. Flags “01H” to “15H” correspond. If this process ends, the process moves to S325.

  In S325, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional character selection table and performs a process of selecting the additional character according to the value of the additional pattern flag. At this time, for example, any additional character can be selected using the random number for determining the effect. As the additional character, an additional character of “animal”, “female”, or “fireworker” is selected. If this process ends, the process moves to S326.

  In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval corresponding to the value of the additional pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data until the start of the round game, including the display of the added character determined based on the added character selection table and the display of the added number as the initial value. If this process ends, the process moves to S327.

  In S <b> 327, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “240” in the prize ball number counter. This value of “240” corresponds to at least the number of prize balls that will be paid out in the round game of 16R, and is displayed as the initial value of the number of expected prize balls in the hit start interval. If the number of extras is not notified at all, that is, if there is no extra bonus, the initial value “240” is continuously displayed without being added over each round. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

  In S328, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the hit start interval according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data until the start of the round game corresponding to the normal bonus or the small hit. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

[Direction processing during round]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the in-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round effect process is a process for determining whether or not to report the additional number for each round, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time a round game is executed (every time a winning prize opening display command is received), and the number of currently executed round games (the number of round games executed). This is a counter for indicating the number of times), and is basically counting the same value as the special winning opening opening number counter used in the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an extra bonus (including no extra bonus) is being executed based on the value of the winning effect pattern flag. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag corresponds to any of “02H” to “07H” and it is determined that the bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S332. On the other hand, if the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “07H” and it is determined that the bonus is not being executed, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern table in accordance with the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S333.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected addition pattern table, and performs a notification of the addition number based on the value of the addition pattern flag (addition pattern) and the value (round number) indicated by the round number counter. The process which determines whether it is is is performed. If it is determined that it is a round in which the additional number is notified, the process proceeds to S334. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a round in which the additional number is notified, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S334, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for reporting the number of additions based on the addition pattern table. As a result, the added number is displayed together with the selected added character in the display area 4A during the corresponding round. If this process ends, the process moves to S335.

  In S335, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a value corresponding to the additional number to the prize ball number counter. Thereby, in the prize ball number counter, the additional number defined based on the additional pattern table is added from the initial value “240”, and the counter value increases to the planned number of prize balls for each addition. For example, in the case of the large extra pattern 4, the extra number “135” is added at the 1R, 4R, and 7R, and the final award number “645” that is combined with the initial value “240” is displayed. Will be. The scheduled number of winning balls is displayed based on the value of the winning ball number counter, but the number of scheduled winning balls is not displayed immediately after addition to the winning ball number counter, and an effect corresponding to the addition is executed. Addition is displayed later. If this process ends, the process moves to S336.

  In S336, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round number counter. For example, in the case of an extra bonus, the sub CPU 71 sets data for displaying different effects including background images for the 1R to 7R eyes and the 8R to 16R eyes. In the case of a normal bonus and a small hit, the same effect data is always set in any round. When this process is finished, the round production process routine is finished.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the bonus is an extra bonus or no extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S341. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S342.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the prize ball counter and resetting the counter value. The planned number of winning balls is displayed based on the value of the winning ball number counter, but the number of scheduled winning balls is not displayed as 0 immediately after the resetting of the winning ball number counter. At the same time, the display of the number of scheduled prize balls can be switched. Further, when the value of the prize ball counter is reset, the scheduled prize ball number may not be displayed as “0”, but the display of the scheduled prize ball number itself may be hidden. If this process ends, the process moves to S342.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the winning gaming state. At this time, as end effect data, data of different effect contents is set according to any of normal bonus, extra bonus (including no extra bonus), and small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S344.

  In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” in the round number counter. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, an operation example when an over winning is generated at the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when an over winning is generated. 39 and 40 schematically show the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 as being different from FIG. 3 for the sake of convenience. Although the behavior from the start of the hit start interval in the bonus to the interval between rounds after passing the 1R and after the end of the 2R is shown schematically, as an interval between the rounds between the 1R and 2R, for convenience, Unlike the one shown in FIG. 9, the interval pattern d is applied. The game balls are continuously fired immediately after the start of the hitting start interval, and after a uniform 3.1 s, the right winning portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding big winning prize opening 37 in the open state). Shall reach. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1),.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39A, the big prize opening shutter 37A keeps the big prize opening 37 in a closed state until, for example, 2.5 s which is a hit start interval time elapses. That is, since the hit start interval time is shorter than the shortest time 3 s required for the game ball to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A after the game ball is launched, immediately after the start of the hit start interval. Even if the game ball launching operation by right-hand strike is started, the game ball does not reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A which closes the big prize opening 37.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, when the hit start interval time elapses, the 1R-th start is started, and the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened in the open arrow direction by retreating in the direction of the outlined arrow. And Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the game ball (0) launched immediately after the start of the hitting start interval is released from the large winning opening 37 that is opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). Rolls to near right end.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the game ball (0) passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. . That is, when a winning that reaches the prescribed winning number “1” is detected, the first round ends, and the interval between rounds before the start of the second round starts. At this time, the time from the start of the hit start interval until the winning of the game ball (0) launched immediately after that is about 3.2 s.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (E), along with the start of the interval between rounds, the big prize opening shutter 37A starts to project in the direction of the white arrow to make the big prize opening 37 closed again. To do. At this time, the special winning opening shutter 37A completes the operation of projecting from the open position to the closed position in about 0.01 s. Moreover, since the launch interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1) has reached the vicinity of the right end of the big prize opening 37 that is in the transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (F), when the big prize opening shutter 37A completely closes the big prize opening 37 during the round interval before the 2R start, the game ball (1) It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. The time for the game ball (1) to reach such a position is approximately 3.1 s after the launch, and is approximately 0.56 s when calculated from the start point of the interval between rounds (the point in FIG. 39D). After the lapse.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40 (G) to (I), the special prize opening shutter 37A closes the special prize opening 37 until the time defined as the interval between rounds, for example, 2.97s of the interval pattern d elapses. State. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (1) to (4) pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) sequentially reach the right end portion of the big prize shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and roll at a speed of about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. To go. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) are in a state of being positioned with an interval of about one on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. In addition, when counting from the start time of the interval between rounds (the time point of FIG. 39D), the time to reach the state of FIG. 40G is approximately 1.22 seconds later and reaches the state of FIG. The time is after about 1.88 s, and the time to reach the state of FIG. 40 (I) is after about 2.54 s.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (J), when 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses, the interval between rounds ends and the second round starts, and the prize winning opening shutter 37A has an operation time of about 0.01 s. By retreating in the direction of the white arrow, the grand prize winning opening 37 is again opened. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) are still passing at a relatively low speed on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) pass through the open big winning opening 37 all at once and fall downward, and the big winning opening counting switch 370 gives four wins. Is detected. That is, immediately after the start of the second round when the interval between rounds is over, three over-winnings are detected in addition to one of the predetermined number of winnings from four. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over winnings are detected and the interval pattern a 0 .3 s, it can be easily understood that only one winning corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings is detected and no over winning is detected.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (K), the winning of the game ball (game ball (4) not shown in the figure in the figure) that has first reached the position of the big winning opening count switch 370 is detected, so that 2R The eye ends and the interval between rounds before the start of the 3R eye starts. At this time, the next game ball (5) is positioned in the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 that is in the transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (L), in the interval between rounds before the start of the third round, when the big prize opening shutter 37A completely closes the big prize opening 37 again, the game ball (5) The right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A will be reached. By controlling such a series of operation timings based on the interval patterns b to d, 1 to 3 over-winnings are realized in a predetermined round after the 2R.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows the operation timing in the extra bonus according to FIGS. 39 and 40. In FIG. 41, for convenience, the interval pattern d is applied as the interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R and after the end of the 2R, unlike the one shown in FIG. The “fired state” indicates a state in which a firing operation is not performed or a firing stop operation is performed as “not fired”, and a state in which a firing operation is performed is denoted as “fired”. “Game state” indicates a round game and an interval in the big hit game state. “Required time” indicates the time required for the round game and the interval. “Big prize opening” indicates a closed state or an open state of the big prize opening 37. “The number of balls on the shutter” indicates the number of game balls located along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. The “elapsed time after the change in the number of balls on the shutter” indicates the elapsed time when the number of game balls on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is changed. The “shown state” indicates a symbol at the end of FIGS. 39 (A) to 40 (L). In addition, (E) and (K) shown as illustrated states are marked with “*” because the special winning opening 37 is not completely closed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the big hit is confirmed (the big hit starts) and the launch operation is started after about 0.1 s, the time until the game ball is actually fired is about 0.66 s. The time required for the game ball thus fired to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A is approximately 3.1 s. On the other hand, at the time when 2.5 s has passed as the winning start interval after the big hit is confirmed, the big winning opening 37 is in an open state. Thereby, the game ball that has reached the position corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning entry count switch 370 in approximately 0.1 s. That is, after the jackpot is confirmed, the launch operation is started, and the time until the first game ball thus fired is detected by the big prize count switch 370 is 0.1 + 0.66 + 3.1 + 0.1 = 3.96 s. The time 1.46 s obtained by subtracting the time 2.5 s of the hit start interval from this time is the 1R opening time.

  Thereafter, an interval between rounds after the end of the first round starts, and the special winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is closed for 2.97 seconds of the interval pattern d. Then, in the closed prize opening shutter 37A in the closed state, the number of game balls located on the upper surface increases by about every 0.66 s until the start of the 2Rth when the prize winning opening 37 is opened again. Four game balls are supported by the special winning opening shutter 37A. Therefore, when the 2R-th is started and the big winning opening 37 is opened, the winning of four game balls is detected. When a winning of one game ball is detected for the first time after about 0.1 s, the big winning opening 37 is closed and an interval between rounds after the end of the second round is started. A winning game ball is detected. As described above, if the interval time between rounds is 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, 1 + 3 over winnings can be realized. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over winnings can be realized, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over winnings can be realized.

[Additional bonus screen display example]
42 to 44 are diagrams illustrating examples of screen display of an extra bonus. 42 shows a screen display example of an extra bonus corresponding to the large extra pattern 1, FIG. 43 shows an example of screen display of an extra bonus corresponding to the small extra pattern 5, and FIG. 44 corresponds to the no extra pattern 1. It is an example of a screen display of an extra bonus to be performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 42A, when a large extra bonus corresponding to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the extra bonus and the great extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A, for example, “Fireworks” selected by lottery, appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+240” of the scheduled prize ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the 1R eye is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of the added character is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the number of expected prize balls for each addition of the added number. And a display field 706 for displaying the first half round period as an “additional special zone” and a second half round period as a “prize ball increase zone” to be described later. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of the 16th round. For example, in the display field 704, “Fireworks” corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of the 16th round. On the other hand, in the display column 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the planned number of winning balls including the additional number is displayed in addition. In the large addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 12), in the 1R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705 and the center of the screen is displayed. No additional number is displayed on. The display field 706 basically displays an “additional special zone” from the 1st to the 7th R, and a “prize ball increase zone” from the 8th R. As a result, the “addition-specific zone” is displayed in the 1R display column 706. In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the “addition bonus” may be simply displayed instead of the “prize ball increase zone” in the display column 706 after the 8th R. The “additional special zone” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that the addition display of the number of scheduled prize balls is performed with a high probability. The “prize ball addition zone” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that the game is in a round game where over winning can be expected. The “extra bonus” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that a round game in which an over-winning due to the extra bonus cannot be expected. An “addition bonus” image 700 displayed at the top of the display area 4A indicates the start of the addition bonus.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the 2Rth is started, it is specified that the additional number “30” is displayed in the 2R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703A of “+30” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the third round is started, the expected number of winning balls “270” including the addition number 703A of “+30” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 3R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 3R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42E, when the 4R-th is started, it is specified that the additional number “105” is displayed in the 4R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, followed by an additional number 703B of “+105”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (F), when the 5R-th is started, the expected number of winning balls “375” including the addition number 703B of “+105” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 5R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 5R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the 6R-th is started, the same number of the expected prize balls “375” as in the previous round is continuously displayed in the display field 705. Further, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed in the 6R (see FIG. 12), the extra character 702A and the extra number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 6R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (H), when the 7th R is started, it is specified that the additional number “270” is displayed in the 7R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703C of “+270” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), when the 8th R is started, the expected number of winning balls “645” including the addition number 703C of “+270” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 42 (I) and 42 (J), a “prize ball increasing zone” is displayed in the display field 706 of the 8R to 16R. Further, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 8th to the 16th R (see FIG. 12), the extra character 702A and the extra number are added to the center of the screen in the 8th to 16th R. Not displayed, the display field 705 displays that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “645”. Although a player cannot effectively generate an over-winning in the first half round by such a series of display of the number of extras and the number of scheduled prize balls, the second half round can be used as a guide for the number of scheduled prize balls displayed in addition. The game can be advanced while expecting an over-winning prize, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43A, when the small additional bonus 2 corresponding to the hit pattern 6 is determined as the additional bonus and the small additional pattern 5 is selected as the additional pattern, the display area 4A in the hit start interval is displayed. On the screen, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702B selected by lottery, for example, “animal” appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+240” of the expected number of prize balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the 1R eye is started, display columns 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this 1R, “animal” corresponding to the additional character 702B is displayed in the display field 704. The small addition pattern 5 also stipulates that the addition number is not displayed in the first R (see FIG. 12). In the first R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705. The added number is not displayed in the center.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, the “upward specialization zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 1R to 7R. Further, in the small extra pattern 5, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 1st to the 7th R (see FIG. 12), in the 1st to the 7th R, the extra character 702B and the extra number are in the center of the screen. Not displayed, the display field 705 continues to display the planned number of winning balls without changing from the initial value “240”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), when the 8th eye is started, “addition bonus” is displayed in the display field 706. In addition, in the small additional pattern 5, since it is defined that the additional number “135” is displayed in the 8th R (see FIG. 12), after the additional character 702B is displayed at the center of the screen of the display area 4A. , An additional number 703D of “+135” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), when the 9th eye is started, a “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display field 706. In addition, in the display column 705, the planned number of winning balls “375” obtained by adding the additional number 703D of “+135” displayed in the previous round is added and displayed. Furthermore, in the small additional pattern 5, since it is defined that the additional number is not displayed after the 9th R (see FIG. 12), the additional character 702A and the additional number are not displayed at the center of the screen after the 9R. In the display column 705, it is displayed that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “375”. Even with such a series of display of the number of extras and the expected number of winning balls, the player cannot substantially generate an overwin until the second half of the round (from 1R to 13R), but is added and displayed. The game can be advanced while expecting an over win until the final round (16R) with the planned number of winning balls as a guideline, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44A, when an extra bonus according to the hit pattern 7 is determined as the extra bonus and the no extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702C, for example, “female” selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value “+240” of the planned number of winning balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the 1R eye is started, display columns 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this 1R, “female” corresponding to the additional character 702C is displayed in the display field 704. In the no-addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in all rounds including the 1R (see FIG. 12), the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705 in the 1R. The additional number is not displayed in the center of the screen.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 44B to 44D, in the 1st to 16th eyes, the added character 702B and the added number are not displayed in the center of the screen, and the display field 705 shows the initial number of expected winning balls. The display is continued without changing from the value “240”. As shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D), the “addition bonus” is simply displayed in the display column 706 from the 8th R.

  The added character may appear in response to the operation of the effect button, and the added number may be displayed after the appearance. In addition, the added character appearing after the 8Rth and the added character appearing before the 7Rth may be different from each other in appearance, for example, even in the same person. As a numerical value to be displayed, when a game ball wins a prize winning opening, “+15” corresponding to the number of winning balls may be displayed, and the number of payouts or the number of payouts may be displayed cumulatively. Further, regarding the expected number of winning balls, an assumed numerical value may not be directly displayed but indirectly suggested by, for example, light or sound. In “Additional Bonus”, the display of the number of scheduled award balls is displayed in the round following the round in which the number of additional balls is displayed. Alternatively, the number of scheduled prize balls may be added and displayed in rounds after the round in which the additional number is displayed.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of game balls that exceed the prescribed number of winnings in the next round game is the suppression unit 430 (large winning mouth shutter). 37A is controlled so as to flow into the upper surface of 37A. Specifically, in the interval patterns b to d, the time is controlled so that two or more game balls can simultaneously pass through the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, when the big winning opening shutter 37A is opened from the closed state of the interval between rounds in response to the start of the round game, a larger number of game balls than the prescribed winning number that has flowed onto the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. Is led to the big winning opening 37, so that it is possible to realize an over winning in a predetermined round game and to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, by appropriately controlling the interval time between rounds in which the big prize opening 37 is closed between the desired round game without changing the opening time of the big prize opening shutter 37A, The number of over winnings can be adjusted appropriately. Specifically, with respect to the interval between rounds, the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7 which is a relatively short time (interval pattern a) and the hit pattern 2 which is longer than that (interval patterns b to d) By providing 6 jackpot game states, the number of prize balls awarded based on over winnings can be varied according to the time between the rounds. Can be attached.

  In addition, an over winning prize that will be awarded to the grand prize opening 37 according to the number of prize balls given each time a game ball wins the big prize opening 37, the number of round games executed, and the interval time between rounds. Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number, it is possible to pre-calculate the expected number of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state and report the scheduled number of winning balls as an additional number or initial value. As to whether or not the number of prize balls can be obtained, it is possible to notify of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and diversity, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, the over-winning is basically realized by adjusting the interval time between the rounds after the 7th round. For example, by making the hit start interval time relatively long You may make it possible to make an over-winning from the 1Rth.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
First, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, the jackpot probability of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot gaming state is 1 / 399.60 (164/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state), and when the probability is high (probability gaming state) ) Is 1 / 130.54 (502/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol in the small hit gaming state is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, the winning pattern is 1, and 16R is given as the number of rounds of the round game (of which 7R is the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the jackpot). The bonus name shown is “normal bonus”, and the bonus content is “7R bonus”. With regard to the “normal bonus”, the estimated winning numbers from the 1R to 7R are 10 and the estimated winning numbers from the 8R to 16R are 0 with respect to winning in the big winning opening 37. Thereby, in the “normal bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 1050. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability change 1”, the winning pattern is 2, and the round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “large extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “large extra bonus” Bonus ”. This “large bonus” has 10 estimated winnings from 1R to 7R and 12 estimated winnings from 8R to 16R. As a result, in the “large bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 2670. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 2”, the winning pattern is 3, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “middle bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 1 ”. The “middle bonus 1” has 10 estimated winnings from the 1R to 7R and 11 estimated winnings from the 8R to 16R. As a result, the number of scheduled award balls is “2535” in “middle top bonus 1”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 2” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 3”, the winning pattern is 4 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “medium bonus bonus 2”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 2 ”. The “middle bonus bonus 2” has 10 estimated winnings from the 1R to 11R, 11 estimated winnings from the 12R, and 12 estimated winnings from the 13R to 16R. As a result, the number of planned award balls is “2535” in “middle top bonus 2”. The probability (inrush rate) of “probability 3” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 4”, the winning pattern is 5, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “small extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “small extra bonus” Bonus ”. The “small extra bonus 1” has 10 estimated winnings from 1R to 16R. As a result, in the “small extra bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 2400. The probability (entrance rate) of “probability variation 4” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  The small hit has the same contents as the small hit according to the first embodiment described above except that the hit pattern 6 corresponds.

  The big winning mouth count number corresponds to a prescribed winning number that is an opportunity to end one round game, and in this embodiment, the big winning mouth count number (prescribed winning number) is set to “10”. That is, when 10 winning prizes are counted in one round, the round ends. Also in the present embodiment, the number of winning prize counts (specified number of winnings) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. In other words, even when a winning exceeding the number of large winning mouth counts is detected in one round, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning number is paid out. As a result, it is possible to make an over-winning that exceeds the number of large winning mouth counts. This point will be described later.

  The short-time performance, the number of winning balls corresponding to the starting opening and each winning opening, the probability of winning a normal symbol, the number of winning symbols for a normal symbol, and the second starting opening winning count are the same as in the first embodiment.

  The specifications of the present embodiment may also have the following contents. For example, for special symbols, the jackpot probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win the jackpot when the probability is high than when the probability is low. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the winning probability in the other special symbol is higher than that in one special symbol. The special symbol digestion order may be a winning order without setting the priority order for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be a specification for preferential digestion of the first special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the kind of jackpot symbol of a 1st special symbol. Further, an extra bonus may be executed even in the big hit gaming state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings) is set to “10”, but is not limited to this. For example, the number of winning prizes may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The short time performance may be greater than the ST count (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST count including, for example, 0. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls related to the big winning opening is set to a value different from the above, the estimated number of winning balls is calculated using the value and the estimated winning number, and the number of extra balls to be described later is notified. Can be. For normal symbols, the hit probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low, and may be won when the probability is low, for example. The number of symbols per normal symbol is not limited to the above, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The second start opening prize count may be a value other than the above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, five types of opening / closing patterns A to E are defined as the one round opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The open / close patterns A to E are open / close patterns corresponding to the big hit game state, and the open / close pattern E is an open / close pattern corresponding to the small hit game state. The open / close pattern A and the open / close pattern E of the present embodiment are the same as the open / close pattern A and the open / close pattern C of the first embodiment, but the open / close patterns B to D of the present embodiment are the ones according to the first embodiment. Differently, it is defined to be in an open state a plurality of times (in this embodiment, twice) in one round game.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, the closed state is 2.64 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s, and finally the closed state. The opening / closing pattern B is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section where the open state is 5.21 s or 3.00 s is shorter than the long opening of the opening / closing pattern A, and thus corresponds to the middle opening. A section that is closed for 2.64 seconds between two middle releases is referred to as an “inter-round interval” in the following description. That is, in the open / close pattern B, two middle releases occur with an interval during the round, and the total open time of the open / close pattern B is 8.21 s.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, the closed state is 1.98 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s, and finally the closed state. The open / close pattern C is also defined as a round interval from the first open state to the final closed state. Such an open / close pattern C is also such that two middle releases occur across the mid-round interval, but the round interval time is shorter than the open / close pattern B. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 8.21 s, which is the same as that of the opening / closing pattern B.

  The open / close pattern D is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, then the closed state is 1.32 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s, and finally the closed state. The open / close pattern D is also defined as a round interval from the first open state to the final closed state. Such an open / close pattern D is also such that two middle releases occur across the interval during the round, but the interval time during the round is shorter than the open / close pattern C. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 8.21 s, which is the same as the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern C.

  The real round game in the big hit game state is a round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing patterns A to D including the long opening or middle opening in which the game ball can be won among the opening / closing patterns A to E described above. Applicable. The round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern E is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

  Note that the following contents may be used as the open / close pattern of one round. The open patterns are not limited to the above five types, and may be four types or less or six types or more. For the opening / closing pattern A, the opening time is not 10 s but may be, for example, less than 10 s or more than 10 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the open / close patterns B to D, it is opened twice during one round, but may be opened three times or more. The middle opening time in the open / close patterns B to D may be a time that allows a predetermined number of game balls to win. Further, the opening / closing patterns B to D may have different middle opening times. About the opening time of middle opening, it can set suitably according to the time of the interval between rounds and the interval between rounds. For the opening / closing pattern E, the opening time is not 0.1 s, but may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the round interval in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 6 are defined as the special prize opening / closing patterns (winning patterns). As an interval pattern between rounds, only an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s is defined. The winning pattern 1 is a winning pattern that occurs in the case of a normal bonus and is specified as a specified round number of 16R and a real round number of 7R. The winning pattern 1 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern E in the 8R to 16R rounds. That is, the hit pattern 1 stipulates that the substantial rounds are 7 rounds from 1R to 7R, and the remaining 9 rounds from 8R to 16R are executed as non-essential rounds.

  The winning pattern 2 is a winning pattern that is generated when the extra bonus is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 2 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 8R to 16R rounds. In the extra bonus to be executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 2, the number of winning balls based only on the number of winning prizes (the number of predetermined winnings: 10) is 2400. 2670. For this reason, in the extra bonus, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and a number “570” corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the expected number of prize balls is added in the first half round. It is reported as a number.

  The winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern that occurs when the medium addition bonus 1 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 3 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 8R to 16R rounds. In the middle addition bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2400. However, when over-winning is included, the planned number of prize balls is 2535. Therefore, even in the medium addition bonus 1, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and “435” corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the planned number of prize balls is displayed in the first half round. It is reported as an additional number.

  The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern that is generated when the medium addition bonus 2 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the winning pattern 4, the winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds, the winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 8R to 11R rounds, and the winning prize in the 12R round. It is defined that the opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C, and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 13th to 16th rounds. In the middle extra bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 4, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2400, but the number of scheduled prize balls is 2535 when over-winning is included. Therefore, in the medium addition bonus 2, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and “435” corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned number of prize balls is indicated in the first half round or It is reported as an additional number in the second half round.

  The winning pattern 5 is a winning pattern that is generated when a small bonus is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 5 is defined such that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in the 8R to 16R rounds. In the small extra bonus executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2400, and over-winning is not detected. That is, the planned number of winning balls is 2400. Therefore, in the small extra bonus, “2100” corresponding to the number of prize balls for 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and “300” corresponding to the difference between this initial value and the planned prize ball number is added in the first half round. It is reported as a number.

  The winning pattern 6 occurs in the small hit gaming state, and is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern E only once. That is, the winning pattern 6 is executed as a winning pattern in which the possibility of winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening 37 becomes extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, on the premise that game balls are being continuously fired, an interval during round is set in the open / close patterns B to D. You may prescribe | regulate the time of the interval during a round as a reference | standard. For example, as the interval time during the round, a time corresponding to a predetermined number of assumed maximum arrival times may be defined based on the first middle opening time or the launch operation start time. Also, when it is difficult for over-winning to occur, the time during the round interval corresponding to this is large for the number of winnings during the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and the interval during the round. It is preferable to set the time so that the total number of game balls assumed to be present on the winning opening shutter is equal to or less than the predetermined winning number, and in the case where an over winning is likely to occur, the corresponding interval during the round The total number of winning balls during the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and the number of game balls assumed to be on the big winning opening shutter in the interval during the round is the prescribed number of winnings. It is preferable to set the time to exceed. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation where over-winning is easy and a situation where it becomes difficult depending on the interval time during the round. For example, in this embodiment, 2.64 s, which is the maximum time of an interval during a round, is defined as a time that can achieve 12 winnings per round (2 winnings per win), but 13 per round. The time in which the above winnings are possible may be used. However, as the number of over-winnings increases, the interval time during the round tends to become unnaturally long. In addition, the hit pattern 1 may be assigned with the same opening / closing pattern for all of the rounds, or may be different only in some rounds. As the hit pattern, the interval between rounds may be different. The hit patterns 2 to 5 may have different opening / closing patterns in some or all rounds. Further, the hit patterns 2 to 5 may have some round intervals different from each other.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. This additional pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern selection table is a table for selecting an extra pattern as a hit effect pattern described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 5. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 5 and defines various additional patterns that are matters to be determined and the selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

  According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the hit pattern 2, the extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the extra bonus. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle add-on patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle add-on patterns 5 to 9 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating an additional pattern that is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. In the added pattern selection table, the number of added patterns may be the same, or all may be different.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This extra pattern table is a table that is referred to in the effect processing during the round (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described above. The extra pattern table is a table for defining the extra number for the effect and the round for performing the notification according to the extra pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines an additional pattern and round number as reference items and an additional number as a decision item. In this embodiment as well, the additional number is notified together with the appearance of an additional character described later.

  According to the extra pattern table (large extra bonus) corresponding to the extra extra bonus, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each extra extra pattern 1 to 4 as an extra pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, “100” is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, and “270” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number of additions is “570”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 1) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 1 to 4 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 1, “100” is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, and “135” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number added up is “435”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 2) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 5 to 9 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 5, “100” is notified as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R, “30” is notified as the addition number in each of the 8th to 10R, and the 11R “45” is reported as the additional number. The total number added up is “435”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus) corresponding to the small additional bonus, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, “100” is reported as the addition number in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R. The total number added is “300”.

  Note that the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 49, and the additional number (570, 435, 300) obtained from the difference between the expected number of winning balls and the initial value is appropriately distributed. do it. In addition, after a numerical value exceeding the total added number is notified as an additional number, a numerical value to be notified may be set so as to be subtracted, so that the predetermined total additional number may be finally obtained. .

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The added character lottery table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra character lottery table is a table for selecting, by lottery, an extra character that appears at the start of the extra bonus or informing the extra number according to the extra pattern. The added character lottery table defines various added patterns as reference items, added characters as determined items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an added character by lottery. As an additional character, “animal”, “female”, and “fireworker” are defined.

  For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, it is defined that the selection rate of the additional character “fireworks” is the highest. In the middle-upward addition patterns 1 to 9, it is defined that the selection rate of the added characters “female” and “fireworker” is generally high, and the selection rate of the added characters “animal” is generally low. In the small addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the “animal” addition character is high, the selection rate of the “female” addition character is high next, and the selection rate of the “fireworks” addition character is generally low. It is prescribed. According to the added character appearing based on such an added character lottery table, the type of bonus is suggested, and the degree of expectation for the prize ball is also increased from the added number that is notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  Note that the selection rate for allocating additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various added characters, additional patterns that cannot be selected may be defined. For example, the selection rate is defined so that the “animal” additional character cannot be selected only in the large additional pattern, and the “fireworker” additional character can be selected only in the middle additional pattern or the large additional pattern. May be.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the process similar to what is based on 1st Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted only by describing a figure number, a step number, etc. suitably.

  The processing of the main CPU 61 in the present embodiment includes main processing, timer interruption processing, switch input processing, special symbol related switch check processing, first start port switch check processing, second start port switch check processing, large winning port switch Check process, special symbol control process, special symbol memory check process, special symbol determination process, special symbol change time management process, special symbol display time management process, special symbol game end process are shown in FIGS. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, its description is omitted.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In this hit start interval management process, the processes of S350 to S360 are performed as the same processes as S200 to S210 shown in FIG. 27 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, in S360, the main CPU 61 sets data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time question management process before reopening the big winning opening performs the processes of S370 to S377 as the same processes as S220 to S227 shown in FIG. 28 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, in S377, the main CPU 61 sets data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. In this special winning opening opening process, the processes of S380 to S392 are performed as substantially the same processes as S230 to S242 shown in FIG. 29 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S381, S382, and S387 are as follows.

  In S381, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize winning prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, it moves the process to S384. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “10” or more, it moves the process to S382.

  In S382, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process corresponding to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of jackpot and the current round. According to this process, when the open / close patterns B to D are set, an in-round interval that is closed during the round occurs. Thereby, over-winning in which the actual number of winnings is larger than the prescribed number of winnings is realized by using the interval during the round. In S382, the big prize opening opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S387, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, the interval display time between rounds is always set to the time corresponding to the interval pattern a.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In this hit end interval management process, the processes of S400 to S406 are performed as substantially the same processes as S250 to S256 shown in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment. However, in S <b> 405, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “180” as the ST count to the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63.

  As processing of the sub CPU 71 in the present embodiment, main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, command analysis processing, and in-round effect processing are shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 and FIG. 37 according to the first embodiment. Since this is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. In the winning effect pattern determination process, the processes of S410 to S418 are performed as processes substantially similar to S320 to S328 shown in FIG. 36 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processing of S410, S411, S414, and S417 is as follows.

  In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “06H” to the winning effect pattern flag in accordance with the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received winning start display command. Regarding the winning effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to the normal bonus, “02H” to “05H” correspond to the extra bonus, the middle extra bonus 1, 2, and the minor extra bonus, and “06H” Corresponding to small hits. If this process ends, the process moves to S411.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S418.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the selected addition pattern in the addition pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 17 additional patterns are provided, and the additional pattern flags “01H” to “01H” are added to the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the middle and upper additional patterns 1 to 9, and the small additional patterns 1 to 4, respectively. “11H” corresponds. If this process ends, the process moves to S415.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “2100” in the prize ball number counter. This value of “2100” corresponds to the number of prize balls that will be paid out in accordance with 14R of the 16R round game, and is displayed as the initial value of the number of scheduled prize balls in the hit start interval. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. In this hit end effect process, the processes of S420 to S424 are performed as processes substantially similar to S340 to S344 shown in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S420 and S422 are as follows.

  In S420, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the bonus has been ended based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S421. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “05H”, the process proceeds to S422.

  In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the round game. At this time, as end effect data, data of different effect contents is set according to any of normal bonus, extra bonus, and small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S423.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, an operation example when an overwinning occurs at the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when an over winning is generated. 57 and 58 schematically show the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 as being different from FIG. 3 for the sake of convenience. The behavior from the interval between the rounds immediately before 7R in the bonus to the 7Rth is schematically shown, and after the 7Rth end, the behavior from the interval between rounds to the 8th R again is shown. The game balls are continuously fired and reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding big prize opening 37 in the open state) after a uniform 3.1 s. . Each game ball is given an order such as (1), (2),... Or (1 ′), (2 ′),... In order of launch. ') In order.

  First, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the big prize opening shutter 37A closes the big prize opening 37 in the interval between rounds immediately before the 7R-th start. The interval time between rounds is shorter than the time 0.66 s corresponding to the approximate firing interval in which the game ball first reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A after the big prize opening shutter 37A is closed (this time) In the embodiment, since it is 0.3 s), the game ball has not reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when the interval time between rounds elapses, the 7R-th starts, and the big prize opening shutter 37A opens the big prize opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. State. Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), for example, the game ball (1) launched in the interval between rounds is in the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). Roll up to.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the game ball (1) passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and the winning prize is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. . That is, a winning corresponding to the beginning of the prescribed winning number “10” is detected. Thereafter, the game balls (2) to (9) (not shown) pass through the big prize opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval and fall downward, and the winning prize is sequentially detected by the big prize opening count switch 370. The Rukoto.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the next game ball (10) also passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. Will be. Thus, when the winning corresponding to the end of the prescribed winning number “10” is detected, the seventh round ends, and the interval between rounds before the eighth round starts starts. At this time, approximately 9.8 s has elapsed since the start of the game ball (1) launch operation. The time of 9.8 s is the time 3.1 s for the first game ball (1) to reach the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, and the game ball (1) is the big prize mouth count switch 370. Is calculated from the sum of the firing interval of 0.66 s × 10 as the time required for launching the ten game balls (1) to (10). Therefore, in the 7Rth that is open for a maximum of 10 seconds, it is possible to sufficiently detect the winnings of the ten game balls (1) to (10).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), when the interval between rounds is started again, the special prize opening shutter 37A protrudes in the direction of the white arrow, thereby closing the special prize opening 37 again. To do. At this time, since the launch interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1 ') has reached the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 in the closed state.

  Then, when the time between the rounds of 0.3 s elapses, the 8th R starts, and as shown in FIG. 37 is opened. At this time, since the game ball (1 ′) has reached the portion corresponding to the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming ball (1 ′) passes through the opened big winning opening 37. Then, it falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), the game balls (2 ′) to (7 ′) and the game ball (8 ′) (not shown) pass through the big prize opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval. The player falls downward, and the winning prize count switch 370 sequentially detects the winnings. When the game ball (8 ′) is detected from the start time of the 8th R, the time when the first game ball (1 ′) is detected by the big prize count switch 370 is 0.26 s, By setting the time required for firing the game balls (2 ′) to (8 ′) to the firing interval of 0.66 s × 7, approximately 4.88 s have elapsed. In other words, in the 8th eye, winnings of approximately eight game balls (1 ') to (8') are detected within the time (5.21 s) when the first middle is released.

  At time 821, when the first middle opening time of 5.21 s elapses, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the big prize opening shutter 37A temporarily opens the big prize opening 37 due to an interval during the round. Closed. Then, when 0.66 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 58 (H), that is, when approximately 5.54 s has elapsed from the start of the 8th R, the next game ball (9 ′) is the big prize opening shutter. It reaches the right end portion of 37A.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the big prize opening shutter 37A closes the big prize opening 37 until 2.64 s, which is the time defined as the interval during the 8R round, elapses. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (9 ') to (12') pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (9 ′) to (12 ′) sequentially reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and further rotate at a speed of about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. It moves. As a result, the four game balls (9 ') to (12') are positioned with an interval of about one on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. In short, when counting from the state time of FIG. 58 (H), the state of FIG. 58 (J) is approximately 2.64 s elapsed, and approximately 7.52 s has elapsed from the 8R start time. In other words, in the interval during the 8R round, four game balls (9 ') to (12') can sufficiently exist on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A by the end of the interval.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (K), when the 8R round interval ends, the second middle release is performed, and the big prize opening shutter 37A is retracted in the direction of the white arrow to thereby win the big prize opening 37. Is opened again. At this time, the game balls (9 ') to (12') are still passing at a relatively low speed on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the four game balls (9 ′) to (12 ′) simultaneously pass through the open big prize opening 37 and drop downward, and are given by the big prize opening count switch 370. A winning is detected. That is, in the first middle release in one round game, eight winnings are detected, and then in the middle opening immediately after the mid-round interval in the same round game, four winnings are detected. As a result, over-winning that exceeds the prescribed number of winnings of 10 will occur. Similarly, if the interval time during the round is 1.98 s, for example, 12 + 1 over-winnings occur, and if it is 1.32 s, it can be easily understood that no over-winning occurs.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows the operation timing in the extra bonus according to FIGS. 57 and 58. “Launching state”, “Game state”, “Required time”, “Large winning mouth”, “Number of balls on shutter”, “Elapsed time after change of number of balls on shutter”, “State shown” are the figures described above. This is the same as the item shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when game balls are being continuously fired, the time for which the first game ball (1) is detected by the big prize count switch 370 from the start time is about 0. 26 s, the time required to fire the next nine game balls (2) to (10) is the firing interval 0.66 s × 9 = 5.94 s, and the last game ball (10) is set by the big prize count switch 370 Since the detected time is about 0.1 s, the open time is about 6.3 s, which is the sum of these.

  Thereafter, the interval between rounds after the end of the 7th round starts, and the special winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the big prize opening 37 is closed for 0.3 s, but the next game ball (1 ′) has not yet reached the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, and the big prize opening shutter 37A. There is no game ball on the top surface.

  Then, when the 8R-th starts and the first middle release is started, winnings of approximately eight game balls (1 ') to (8') are detected within the prescribed time of 5.21 s. This is because the time for which the first game ball (1 ′) is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 from the start of the 8th R is about 0.26 s, and the next seven game balls (2) to ( Since the time required for the firing in 8) is the firing interval of 0.66 s × 7 = 4.62 s, it is clear from the time that is the sum of these.

  Thereafter, the first middle release ends and the 8R round interval starts. In the interval during this round, the big prize opening 37 is temporarily closed for 2.64 seconds. At this time, it takes about 0.33 s for the next nine game balls (9 ′) to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A from the start of the interval during the round, and the next three games Since the time required for launching the spheres (10 ′) to (12 ′) is the firing interval 0.66 s × 3 = 2.31 s, four game balls (within the time of 2.64 s, which is the sum of these, 9 ′) to (12 ′) are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  Thereafter, when the interval during the 8R round is completed and the middle prize opening 37 is opened again by the second middle release, the four game balls (9 ′) to (9 ′) ˜ ( 12 ′) passes through the big winning opening 37, and four winnings are detected. When a winning of one game ball is detected, the big winning opening 37 is closed, and the 8R-th is finished and the next interval between rounds is started. That is, as the 8R opening / closing pattern, a maximum of 8 winnings can be detected by the first middle opening, and a maximum of 4 winnings can be detected by the second middle opening. The time is defined as 2.64 s, and as a result, 10 + 2 over-winnings are possible for the entire 8R. Similarly, by setting the interval time during the round to 1.98 s, 10 + 1 over winnings are possible, and by setting the interval time during the round to 1.32 s, no over winning is detected. Yes. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum two over-winnings are realized mainly by appropriately setting the interval time during the round, but three or more over-winnings may be possible. However, when three or more over winnings are possible, the longitudinal dimension of the big winning opening shutter 37A is set to a length that allows at least four game balls to pass simultaneously, or the time for first middle opening is set appropriately. It is preferable.

[Additional bonus screen display example]
FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a screen display example of an extra bonus. This figure shows a screen display example of an extra bonus corresponding to the extra extra pattern 1.

  First, as shown in FIG. 60A, when the extra bonus corresponding to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the extra bonus and the great extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A, for example, “Fireworks” selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+2100” of the scheduled number of winning balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the 1R eye is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of the added character is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the number of expected prize balls for each addition of the added number. Is displayed, and a display field 706 is displayed for displaying the period of the first half round as an “additional specialization zone” and displaying the second half round as a “prize ball increase zone”. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of the 16th round. For example, in the display field 704, “Fireworks” corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of the 16th round. On the other hand, in the display column 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the planned number of winning balls including the additional number is displayed in addition. In the large addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the addition number “100” is displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 49), after the addition character 702A is displayed in the center of the display area 4A, “ An additional number 703A of “+100” is displayed. The display field 706 basically displays an “additional special zone” from the 1st to the 7th R, and a “prize ball increase zone” from the 8th R. As a result, the “addition-specific zone” is displayed in the 1R display column 706.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60C, when the 2R-th is started, the expected number of winning balls “2200” including the addition number 703A of “+100” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 2R (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 2R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), when the 3Rth is started, it is specified that the additional number “100” is displayed in the 3R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703B of “+100” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), when the 4R-th is started, the display field 705 includes the expected number of winning balls “2300” including the additional number 703B of “+100” displayed in the previous round. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 4R (see FIG. 49), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 4R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), when the 5Rth is started, it is specified that the additional number “100” is displayed in the 5R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, followed by an additional number 703C of “+100”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), when the 6th R is started, the expected number of winning balls “2400” including the addition number 703C of “+100” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the added number is not displayed in the 6R (see FIG. 49), the added character 702A and the added number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 6R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), when the 7th R is started, it is specified that the additional number “270” is displayed in the 7R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, followed by an additional number 703D of “+270”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), when the 8th R is started, the expected number of winning balls “2670” including the addition number 703D of “+270” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 60I and 60J, “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 8R to 16R. Furthermore, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 8th to the 16th R (see FIG. 49), the extra character 702A and the extra number are added to the center of the screen in the 8th to 16th R. Not displayed, the display field 705 displays that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “2670”. Although a player cannot effectively generate an over-winning in the first half round by such a series of display of the number of extras and the number of scheduled prize balls, the second half round can be used as a guide for the number of scheduled prize balls displayed in addition. The game can be advanced while expecting an over-winning prize, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

[Effects of gaming machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a predetermined round game, a game ball with less than the prescribed number of winnings (10 pieces) is fired during the first middle opening time when the big winning opening 37 is in an open state. The time required for passing through the shutter 37A, specifically, the time required for detecting winnings with respect to eight game balls is controlled, and then the large winning opening 37 is temporarily closed. The time is controlled so as to be the time for three or four game balls that are over-winning based on the previous eight to flow into the suppression unit 430 (the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A). Yes.

  As a result, when the second middle release is performed next time in the round game, a maximum of 12 game balls, which are larger than the prescribed number of winnings, are combined from the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Therefore, it is possible to realize an over winning in a predetermined round game, and to enhance the interest in the big hit game state.

  Moreover, in a predetermined round game, the number of over winning prizes is appropriately adjusted by appropriately controlling the interval time during the round in which the grand prize opening 37 is opened and closed several times, and the closing time is temporarily closed. can do.

  In addition, as a round game in which an over-winning is possible, for example, an opening / closing pattern D having a relatively short time is included for the interval time during the round without changing the time when the middle winning opening shutter 37A is first opened to the middle. By providing a winning game state of winning pattern 5 and a winning game state of winning patterns 2 and 3 including opening / closing pattern B and opening / closing pattern C for a relatively long time, the number of over winnings can be increased according to the interval time during the round. The number of winning balls to be paid out can be made different, and the degree of advantage can be made different by simply setting the interval time during the round for a plurality of big hit gaming states.

  In addition, a prize is awarded to the grand prize opening 37 according to the number of prize balls given each time a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 37, the number of round games executed, and the middle opening time and the interval time during the round. Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number of over winnings, it is possible to pre-calculate the expected number of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state and report the scheduled number of winning balls as an additional number or initial value. It is possible to provide notification of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and diversity as to how many prize balls can be obtained in the state, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the specifications of the gaming machine of the third embodiment are almost the same as those of the first embodiment, but there is no small hit, the prescribed number of winnings is two, and the prescribed number of rounds is set to 3R Has been.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
First, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61, three types of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as the one round opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B of the present embodiment are the same as the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B of the first embodiment. The open / close pattern C of the present embodiment is similar to the open / close pattern C of the second embodiment, but first the open state is 0.6 s, then the closed state is 1.98 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s. It is an opening and closing pattern that finally becomes a closed state after becoming. This open / close pattern C is also defined as a round interval from the first open state to the final closed state. Such an open / close pattern C is a short opening first, and then a second opening occurs as a middle opening across an interval during the round. The total opening time of the open / close pattern C is 3.6 s. All of the above-described opening / closing patterns A to C correspond to the substantial round game in the big hit game state.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a description will be given of the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 4 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns). As an interval pattern between rounds, an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s and an interval pattern b having a closing time of 2.97 s are defined. The winning pattern 1 corresponds to the extra bonus A, and is a winning pattern with the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds of 3R. The hit pattern 1 is such that all rounds from the 1R to the 3R are the opening / closing pattern A, and the interval between rounds between the 1R and the 2R and between the 2R and the 3R is the interval pattern a. It is prescribed. In such a winning pattern 1 (additional bonus A), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected in the 1R to 3R. As a result, the bonus number A for the bonus pattern 1 is 90, and the planned number of winning balls is 90.

  The winning pattern 2 corresponds to the extra bonus B and is a winning pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 3R. The contact pattern 2 is defined such that the 1Rth is the opening / closing pattern A and the 2Rth and 3Rths are the opening / closing pattern B. Further, the interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R and between the 2R and 3R is defined to be an interval pattern b. In such a winning pattern 2 (addition bonus B), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected at the 1Rth, while the intervals between the rounds before the 2R start and before the 3R start are relatively long. Therefore, 2 + 2 over winnings are detected in the 2R and 3R eyes. As a result, in the bonus B for adding the winning pattern 2, the planned number of winning balls is 150.

  The winning pattern 3 corresponds to the extra bonus C, and is a winning pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The contact pattern 3 is defined so that the 1Rth is the opening / closing pattern A and the 2Rth and 3Rths are the opening / closing pattern C. Further, the interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R and between the 2R and 3R is defined to be an interval pattern a. In such a winning pattern 3 (addition bonus C), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected in the 1R round, while the rounds having a relatively long closing time (1.98) in the 2R and 3R rounds. Since a mid-interval is provided, one winning is detected in the first open state in each of the 2R and 3R, and then 1 + 2 over wins are detected in the second open state after the end of the round interval Is done. As a result, in the bonus C for adding the winning pattern 3, the planned number of winning balls is 150.

  The winning pattern 4 corresponds to the extra bonus D, and is a winning pattern in which the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined such that the 1R-th is the opening / closing pattern A, the 2R-th is the opening / closing pattern B, and the 3R-th is the opening / closing pattern C. The interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R is defined as an interval pattern b, and the interval between rounds between the 2R and 3R is defined as an interval pattern a. In such a winning pattern 4 (addition bonus D), two winnings equal to the prescribed winning number are detected in the 1Rth, while the interval pattern b having a relatively long interval between rounds before the start of the 2Rth 2 + 2 over winnings are detected in the 2R eye, and a relatively long closing time (1.98) interval is provided in the 3R, so in the first open state in the 3R eye After one winning is detected, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round. As a result, in the bonus bonus D for the winning pattern 3, the planned number of winning balls is 150.

  In the third embodiment, as in the winning pattern 4, the round that achieves 2 + 2 over winnings by the interval between rounds (2R) and the round that realizes 1 + 3 over winnings by the interval between rounds (3R) 1) is mixed, but at least one hit pattern having such contents may be specified, and the specified round numbers of all or some of the hit patterns may be different. Further, as the types of intervals between rounds and intervals during rounds, more types may be provided according to specifications.

[Additional bonus effect pattern selection table]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an extra bonus effect pattern selection table. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table is a table for collectively determining an additional pattern, an additional character, and an additional number corresponding to the type of the additional bonus as the contents of the effect during the round. The extra bonus effect pattern selection table is provided for each extra bonus A to D, and the number of rounds to be a reference item, the extra pattern to be decided, the extra character, the extra number, and various items to be decided by lottery. It defines the selection rate (%) for selection. It is assumed that an additional character appears and “60” is displayed as the initial value of the expected number of winning balls in the hit start interval before the 1R start of the additional bonus. Further, the extra bonus effect pattern selection table is referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (not shown), and in this hit effect pattern determination process, an additional pattern, an additional character, and an additional number are determined.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus A) associated with the additional bonus A, the additional characters A-1 to A-4, “female” and “animal” corresponding to the additional bonus A are added. , And the additional number notified for each round number is selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the “female” additional character is selected in the additional pattern A-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, and the additional number is not notified in the 2R and 3R. A numerical value “90” obtained by summing up the added number notified in this way and the initial value “60” becomes the planned winning number.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus B) associated with the additional bonus B, the additional patterns B-1 to B-4, “fireworks” and “female” corresponding to the additional bonus B are added. The number of characters and the number of additions notified for each round are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character “fireworker” is selected in the additional pattern B-1, the additional number “30” is notified in each of the first to third Rs. A numerical value “150” obtained by adding up the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value “60” is the planned winning number.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus C) associated with the additional bonus C, the additional patterns C-1 to C-6 corresponding to the additional bonus C, "fireworks", "female", " The additional character “animal” and the additional number notified for each round are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the additional character “fireworks” is selected in the additional pattern C-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, the additional number “10” is notified in the 2R, and the additional number is added in the 3R. The number “50” is notified. A numerical value “150” obtained by adding up the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value “60” is the planned winning number.

  According to the additional bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus D) associated with the additional bonus D, the additional patterns D-1 to D-6 corresponding to the additional bonus D, “fireworks”, “female”, “ The additional character “animal” and the additional number notified for each round are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when an additional character “Fireworks” is selected in the additional pattern D-1, the additional number “30” is notified in the 1R, the additional number “40” is notified in the 2R, and the additional number is added in the 3R. The number “20” is notified. A numerical value “150” obtained by adding up the number of additions notified in this way and the initial value “60” is the planned winning number.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating an additional pattern, the number of additions, and the like, which are determination items in the additional bonus effect pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. The additional bonus effect pattern selection table may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. For example, the additional number may be specified so as to be reported together on the 1R. The initial value of the planned number of winning balls is set to “60” as an example. However, by setting the initial value to “90”, for example, the added bonus A may not be notified.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the following effects can also be obtained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a round game with an opening / closing pattern C that can realize an over winning by controlling the interval time during a round, and an over winning a prize by controlling the interval time between rounds as an interval pattern b. Since it is possible to provide the big hit game state of the hit pattern 4 that includes both the realizable open / close pattern B round games, the interest in the big hit game state can be further enhanced. Also, for example, a winning game state in which an over winning can be achieved by a round game (for example, the third round) that is opened twice with an interval during the round, such as a winning pattern 3 or a winning pattern 4, and a winning pattern 2 There is a jackpot gaming state in which an over winning can be achieved even in a round game (1R and 2R) that is open only once. That is, in any of the big hit gaming states in which the winning patterns are 2 to 4, it is possible to realize an over win exceeding the prescribed number of winnings in one round game, and thus it is possible to further enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

<First Variation of Big Winner Shutter>
Next, a first modified example of the special winning opening shutter will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

[Specifications of the grand prize opening shutter according to the first modification]
First, the specifications of the special prize opening shutter 37B according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. Also in FIG. 64, the positional relationship between the big prize opening shutter 37B (big prize opening 37) and the big prize opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as different from FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, the special winning opening shutter 37B has a longitudinal dimension L1 of about d × 12 = 132 mm. As a result, a maximum of 12 game balls can be simultaneously passed through the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B in the closed state. However, also in this modified example, when one game ball is launched in response to the start of the launch operation, the firing interval until the next one game ball is launched, or one game ball is launched. In consideration of the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37B, a maximum of six game balls can be assumed to pass at the same time. Further, the longest time until the game ball reaching the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B is detected by the big prize opening count switch 370 is about 1.32 s. .32 s (may be 1.32 s or more). Thereby, it is possible to reliably detect a game ball won in the previous round game before the special winning opening 37 is opened again. Further, in the inter-round interpal, it is possible that a gaming ball exceeding the prescribed number of winnings cannot exist on the big winning opening shutter 37B. The time required for the special winning opening shutter 37B to move from one position to the other position among the position where the special winning opening 37 is closed and the position where the special winning opening 37 is opened is the same as that of the above-described embodiment. It is the same as that by.

  When applying such a large winning opening shutter 37B, the number of firings per minute is 90.90 per minute and the firing interval is 0.66 seconds as in the above-described embodiment. Assume that approximately 3.00 to 3.33 seconds are required as the time to reach the right end portion of the winning opening shutter 37B. The upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B is inclined so that the game ball advances 11 mm in 0.33 seconds, that is, advances 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. Other points are the same as in the above-described embodiment. As a result, a maximum of six game balls can be passed at the same time.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, an operation example when over winning occurs when the special winning opening shutter 37B is applied will be described.

  FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the big prize opening shutter 37B when an over winning is generated. 65 and 66 schematically show the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 as different from FIG. 3 for the sake of convenience. Although the behavior from the interval to the start of the 1R to 4R is schematically shown, the interval between rounds and the release time are different from those according to the above-described embodiment. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1),... In the firing order regardless of the round update. In addition, the prescribed number of winnings is “3” as an example.

  First, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the big prize opening shutter 37B closes the big prize opening 37 in the hit start interval.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), when the specified time of the hit start interval elapses, the 1R-th starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37B retracts in the direction of the white arrow to open the special winning opening 37. Leave open. Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the game ball (1) launched after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the 1Rth rolls to the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 which has been opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the game ball (1) passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. . At this time, since the number of winnings for the 1R has not yet reached the prescribed number of winnings “3”, the large winning opening 37 is kept open.

  Then, when approximately 1.32 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 65D, the third game ball (3) is placed at a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B, as shown in FIG. 65E. To reach. As a result, the winning of the game ball (3) is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370, and the big winning opening shutter 37B closes the big winning opening 37 accordingly, and the interval between rounds before the 2R start is started. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), when the big prize opening shutter 37B is in a state of completely closing the big prize opening 37 during the round interval before the 2R start, the game balls (4), ( 5) reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B. The state shown in FIG. 65 (F) is approximately 1.32 seconds after the start of the interval between rounds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), when the 2R-th starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, since the game balls (4) and (5) are in a passing state on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, the two game balls (4) and (5) are in an open state. After passing through the big prize opening 37 all at once, they fall downward, and the big prize opening count switch 370 detects two prizes. Further, the next game ball (6) has rolled to the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 that has been opened, and this game ball (6) will soon be detected as winning. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 again, and the interval between rounds before the start of the third round starts. The state shown in FIG. 65G is approximately 1.72 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and 0.4 s from the start of the second round.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), when the big prize opening shutter 37B is in a state of completely closing the big prize opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the start of the third round, the game balls (7) to (7) to (7) 12) reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (H) is approximately 3.76 s after the start of the interval between rounds, and 4.02 s after calculating from the state of FIG. 65 (G). Thus, in order to generate a state in which the six game balls (7) to (12) are present on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B, the time between the rounds before the start of the third round is approximately 3 with a margin. .96s or so.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), when the 3rd eye starts, the big prize opening shutter 37B opens the big prize opening 37. At this time, since the game balls (7) to (12) exist on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, these six game balls (7) to (12) are in an open state. Passing through the big prize opening 37 all at once and falling downward, the big prize opening count switch 370 detects six prizes. That is, immediately after the start of the third round when the interval between rounds ends, 3 + 3 over winnings are detected. The state shown in FIG. 66 (I) is approximately 3.97 seconds after the start of the interval between rounds, with the addition of a time 0.01 s required for the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening shutter 37B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), the big prize opening shutter 37B closes the big prize opening 37 again, and the interval between rounds before the 4R start is started. Thereafter, the game ball (13) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (J) is approximately 0.06 s after the start of the interval between rounds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), when the big prize opening shutter 37B is in a state of completely closing the big prize opening 37 during the round interval before the 4R start, the game balls (13) to (13) to (18) reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B and rolls from the right side to the left side along the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (K) is approximately 3.36 s after the start of the interval between rounds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), when the 4R-th starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37B, the game ball (13) does not fall to the big prize opening 37 by proceeding outward from the left end, while the following game balls (14) to (18) are not. Since there is a game ball (19) that is in the existing state and has just reached the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37B, these six game balls (14) to (19) are in the open prize state. Passing through all the mouths 37 and dropping downward, the winning prize count switch 370 detects six winnings. That is, immediately after the start of the 4th R when the interval between rounds ends, 3 + 3 over winnings are detected. Such a state of FIG. 66 (L) is after the time required for the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening shutter 37B from 0.01 s from the start of the 4R, and after approximately 3.97 s from the start of the interval between rounds. .

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first modification]
As described above, over-winning can also be realized by appropriately setting the prescribed number of winnings and the time of the interval between rounds using the large winning opening shutter 37B. It should be noted that, for example, the big winning opening 37 is opened until a certain period of time after which the game ball (6) can be won from the state of FIG. 66 (G), but from the state of FIG. 66 (G). It is immediately closed, specifically, it is closed in about 0.1 s from the start of the round, and then the big prize opening 37 is once closed for a predetermined time as an interval during the round, and then opened again. You may do it. At this time, for example, if the interval time during the round is about 1.32 s, two game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 2 over winnings are realized. Can do. If the interval time during the round is about 1.98 s, three game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 3 over winnings can be realized. If the interval time during the round is about 2.64 s, four game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 4 over winnings can be realized. Of course, over-winning may be realized by adjusting the time of the interval between rounds without providing the interval during the round.

<Second variation of game board and variable winning device>
Next, a second modification of the game board and the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

[Game board]
As shown in FIG. 67, the game board 1 includes a second first prize opening 37 that allows an over-winning in the same way as the first prize winning opening in the first embodiment described above, and a known first that is difficult to over-win. It has a big prize opening 36. The first big prize opening 36 is provided in the upper part of the game area 1p. The first big prize opening 36 is provided with a first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing it. The first big prize opening shutter 36A is configured to open and close the first big prize opening 36 by tilting in the front-rear direction. Such a first grand prize opening shutter 36A includes a first aspect in which the game ball is easily opened with respect to the passage area (first grand prize opening 36) and a second aspect in which it is difficult to close. Fluctuating members that can be varied are realized. Such a first big winning opening 36 is also opened in the big hit gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The second grand prize port 37, the second big prize port shutter 37A, the second big prize port count switch 370, and the second big prize port shutter solenoid 370A are assumed to have the same functions as those according to the above-described embodiment. Is provided. Although not particularly illustrated, a first grand prize port count switch and a first grand prize port shutter solenoid are also provided as those relating to the first grand prize port 36 having the same functions as these. That is, when a winning of a game ball with respect to the first big winning opening 36 is detected by the first big winning opening count switch, the payout device 83 pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls as the winning balls. Further, the first big prize opening shutter solenoid for driving the first big prize opening shutter 36A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 36 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. Is done. The opening driving of the first big prize opening 36 by the first big prize opening shutter 36A may be controlled exclusively with the opening driving of the second big prize opening 37 in the big hit gaming state. That is, for example, at the 1Rth, the second grand prize opening 37 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and during that time, the first big prize opening 36 is continuously closed, and at the next 2R, The first big prize opening 36 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the second big prize opening 37 can be controlled to be closed continuously during that time.

  The second guide rail 30 'is the same as that of the above-described embodiment, but has the following configuration. In other words, the second guide rail 30 ′ is not provided with a convex portion that can contact the game ball. Therefore, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30 ′ is released from the lower end 30 </ b> A ′ of the second guide rail 30 ′ without the traveling speed being reduced. The lower end 30 </ b> A ′ of the second guide rail 30 ′ is located in the vicinity of the upper right side of the second big prize opening 37, and is curved so as to release the game ball substantially in the left direction. As a result, the game ball released from the lower end 30A ′ of the second guide rail 30 ′ hits the right end portion of the second big prize opening shutter 37A when the second big prize opening shutter 37A described later is in a closed state. At the beginning of contact, it moves to the left while rolling along its upper surface.

  The second big prize opening shutter 37A is formed in the same size as that according to the first embodiment described above, but the upper surface thereof is an inclined surface having a relatively gentle downward-sloping tendency in the closed state. An upper surface 43a (not shown in FIG. 67) of the cover member 43 is connected to the left end of the closed second big prize opening shutter 37A, and has an inclined surface that tends to lower to the same extent as the second big prize opening shutter 37A. It has become. The upper surface 43a has an effect of decelerating a plurality of game balls that have moved along the upper surface of the second grand prize winning shutter 37A. That is, on the upper surface of the second big prize opening shutter 37A and the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43, the speed of the game ball moving to the left is effectively reduced by being inclined downward to the right, and these upper surfaces All of the game balls traveling along the direction initially move to the right in the middle of proceeding to the left, and are guided outward from the right end of the second big prize opening shutter 37A. An out port 41A is provided on the lower right side of the second big prize port shutter 37A. As a result, the game balls guided outward from the right end of the second grand prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A are collected through the out port 41. Although not particularly illustrated, the cover member 43 is provided with a front end guide portion 43b and a plurality of convex portions 43d, which also effectively reduce the traveling speed of the game ball. The upper surface 43 a of the cover member 43 and the second big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A form a suppressing portion 430. As for the second grand prize opening shutter and the cover member, a part of the game balls proceeding along these are guided outward from the right end of the big prize opening shutter, while the remaining games are played. The inclination angle of the upper surface may be set to an appropriate angle so that the sphere is guided outward from the left end of the upper surface of the cover member.

[Effects of gaming machine of second modification]
According to the gaming machine of the second modified example, when the second big prize opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, the game balls are likely to be congested on the upper surface thereof, and more game balls are drawn into the second big prize opening. Since it can be made to stay on the upper surface of the shutter 37A, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for over winning while making interest in the whereabouts of the game ball.

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the second modified example, the round game with the possibility of over winning and the round game without the possibility of over winning with the second big prize opening 37 or the first game in the open state. It can be easily recognized just by confirming the special winning opening 36. In short, for example, opening and closing only the first grand prize opening 36 in the first round of the 1R to 7R makes it difficult to over-win, while opening and closing only the second big prize opening 37 in the second half round of the 8R to 16R. Over winning can be made possible. In such a case, in the big hit gaming state, the time when the first big prize opening shutter 36A is in an open state and over-winning is difficult and the time when the second big prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state and over-winning is possible. For example, in the first half of the jackpot gaming state, you can concentrate on the bonus bonus display, but in the second half of the jackpot gaming state, you can make the game more interesting by generating over-winnings. Can be increased.

<Third Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a third modification of the variable prize device will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. In the following description, unless otherwise indicated, it means the form when the special winning opening is in a closed state. The variable winning device according to the third modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, the third modified example is different from the variable winning device 90 according to the embodiment and the modified example described above. The variable winning device 90 includes a cover member 91 and an opening / closing unit 92 as basic components. The opening / closing unit 92 includes a front base plate 920, a back base member 921, a main stage 922, an upper stage 923, an upper lid 924, a drive unit 925, and the like. On the front portion 922a of the main stage 922, a shutter surface 922b having a slightly downward-sloping tendency is formed as a portion corresponding to the big prize opening shutter. The front base plate 920, the front part 922a of the main stage 922, and the shutter surface 922b are located on the front side of the game board 1, while the back base member 921, the other part of the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the upper lid 924. And the drive unit 925 are arranged on the back side of the game board 1.

  The cover member 91 has a front end guide portion 91b and a plurality of convex portions 91d in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a right upper surface 91a and a left upper surface 91a 'on the right and left sides of the upper portion. Between the right upper surface 91a and the left upper surface 91a ', an opening 91c serving as a big prize opening 37 is formed. An introduction portion 920c, which will be described later, is positioned above the right upper surface 91a, so that the game ball B hardly comes into contact with the upper surface 91a.

  The front base plate 920 is provided in the penetrating portion 1 c provided so as to reach the back surface from the game area 1 p in the game board 1. The front base plate 920 has an opening 920a at the center, and the front portion 922a of the main stage 922 is exposed through the opening 920a and the through portion 1c. In addition, at the center of the right end of the opening 920a, a game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of the main stage 922, which will be described later, is placed on the shutter surface 922b in the closed state or the large winning opening 37 in the open state. A dischargeable portion 920b that can be discharged is provided. At the upper right end of the opening 920a, an introduction portion 920c for guiding the flowing game ball B to a guide path 924b of an upper lid 924 described later is provided. Such a front base plate 920 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the back base member 921 is for supporting the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the drive unit 925 on the back side of the game board 1. A main stage 922 is supported on the upper portion of the back base member 921 via a first shaft 921a extending in the left-right direction so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction. An upper stage 923 is supported via 921b so as to be tiltable in the front-rear direction. The shaft 921a is provided so as to be displaceable by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the main stage 922 is displaced so that the shutter surface 922b is displaced from the position where the big prize opening 37 is closed to the position where it is opened. When tilting, the shaft 921a is displaced from the high position to the low position accordingly. A drive unit 925 is disposed at the bottom of the back base member 921. Further, a recovery port 921c capable of recovering a game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of a main stage 922 described later is provided on the left side surface portion of the back base member 921 (see FIG. 75). ). Such a back base member 921 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

  The main stage 922 has a front portion 922a, a shutter surface 922b, and a staircase surface 922c. An upright front portion 922a is formed at the front end of the staircase surface 922c so as to face the cover member 91. A shutter surface 922b is formed at the front portion 922a, and a plurality of contactable with the game ball B is possible. Convex portions 922d are provided at predetermined intervals. The staircase surface 922c is formed in a plurality of steps so as to have a step which becomes lower as it advances from the rear to the front. The step surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface that tends to be slightly lowered downward, and is also an inclined surface that alternately descends to the left, descends to the left, and descends to the right as it progresses from the upper stage to the middle stage to the lower stage. According to such a staircase surface 922c, a passage is formed that guides the game ball B to the left and right while guiding it from the upper stage to the lower stage. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower stage of the staircase surface 922c is guided to the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b and is directly recovered through the recovery port 921c. A plurality of convex portions 922e that can come into contact with the game ball B are also provided at predetermined intervals on the step portion of the step surface 922c of each step. Such a main stage 922 can be tilted in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the main stage 922 is in a tilted posture with a forward drop, the staircase surface 922c is also in a relatively steep posture with a forward drop, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b are formed in the opening 920a. Move down. As a result, the gap between the upper end of the opening 920a and the front part 922a is enlarged, and the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are guided to the winning prize opening 37 all at once.

  The upper stage 923 has an upper surface 923 a adjacent to the upper part of the main stage 922 and having a step higher than the uppermost step surface 922 c in the main stage 922. The central portion of the upper surface 923a is an inclined portion that is lower than both ends and forwardly lowered, and the game ball B naturally moves to the staircase surface 922c through this portion. The game ball B is guided to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 through the introduction portion 920c and a guide path 924b of the upper lid 924 described later. When the shutter surface 922b is in a closed state, a plurality of convex portions 923e that can contact the game ball B are provided at a predetermined interval at the front end of the upper stage 923. Such an upper stage 923 can be tilted in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the main stage 922, as shown in FIGS. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the upper stage 923 is inclined forward and downward, the upper surface 923a is also inclined forward and relatively steep, and a plurality of game balls B on the upper surface 923a are simultaneously gathered. It will be guided to the staircase surface 922c. The main stage and the upper stage may be integrally formed. Further, the main stage and the upper stage may overlap each other in the opened state.

  The upper lid 924 covers the step surface 922c and the upper stage 923 of the main stage 922, and has a guide path 924b connected to the introduction portion 920c and an inner wall 924c extending in the left-right direction. The guide path 924b is formed so as to guide the game ball B from the introduction portion 920c to the upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923. The inner wall 924c is disposed so as to face each step surface with an interval through which the game ball B can pass between each step surface of the main stage 922. The inner wall 924c is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B at a predetermined interval. The inner wall 924c, the convex portion 924e, the staircase surface 922c, and the convex portion 922e serve as a passage that suppresses the progression of the game ball B while meandering the game ball B to the left and right along the staircase surface 922c of each step. A portion 930 is formed. Such an upper lid 924 also serves as an accessory part of the game board 1.

  The drive unit 925 tilts the main stage 922, and mainly includes a drive motor 925a, a drive gear 925b, a pair of intermediate gears 925c and 925d, a pair of driven gears 925e and 925f, two push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and Two rotational position sensors 925j and 925k are provided. The driving force of the driving motor 925a is transmitted to the driven gear 925e via the driving gear 925b and the intermediate gears 925c and 925d, and further transmitted to the driven gear 925f meshed with the driven gear 925e. The drive motor 925a and the rotational position sensors 925j, 925k are connected to the main CPU 61 via a control circuit (not shown), and are controlled by the main CPU 61 or supply predetermined signals.

  The driven gears 925e and 925f are formed with cylindrical peripheral walls, and inwardly protruding pieces 9250e that abut on semi-helical cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h formed on the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, respectively. , 9250f are provided. Also, two outward projecting pieces 9251e and 9252e are provided on the peripheral wall of one driven gear 925e so as to be detected by the rotational position sensors 925j and 925k at a predetermined rotational position. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are inserted into the driven gears 925e and 925f in a state where the push-up pipes 925g and 925h are always urged upward via the springs 925m and 925n. A cam cover 925p is provided above the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and this cam cover 925p is always in contact with the lower part of the main stage 922. As shown by a solid line in FIG. 78, at the rotational position where the projecting piece 9251e is detected by the rotational position sensor 925k, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f abut on the uppermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained at the low position against the urging force of the springs 925m and 925n. As a result, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture, and the special winning opening 37 is opened. On the other hand, when the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, the projecting piece 9252e comes to the rotational position detected by the rotational position sensor 925j as indicated by the phantom line in FIG. In this state, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f are in contact with the lowermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h, so that the push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained at a high position as shown in FIG. Thereby, the main stage 922 becomes a non-inclined posture, and the special winning opening 37 is closed. Further, when the special winning opening 37 is closed and then opened again, the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, so that the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f are The cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h are rotated while pressing down the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h while being in contact with the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. As a result, the state as shown in FIG. 77 is obtained again, and the special winning opening 37 is opened. That is, the main stage 922 is inclined and non-inclined every time the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated approximately 180 degrees in one direction, and the special winning opening 37 is opened and closed accordingly.

[Effects of gaming machine of third modification]
According to the gaming machine of the third modified example as described above, the game ball B is guided to the suppressing portion 930 and its traveling speed is effectively reduced without operating other members other than tilting the main stage 922. A plurality of game balls B suppressed by the suppression unit 930 as the shutter surface 922b is opened can be guided to the big prize opening 37 all at once. As a result, the number of passes of the game ball B with respect to the grand prize opening 37 can be adjusted without separately providing a storage device, etc., and the increase in the number of parts and cost increase can be suppressed, and the heat problem around the game board can be solved can do.

  In addition, the game ball B rolling in the game area 1p is caused to flow into the suppression portion 930 through the introduction portion 920c and the guide path 924b without directly colliding with the shutter surface 922b. Since the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the rear end portion to the front end portion on the lower stage side without any hindrance, damage to the shutter surface 922b can be prevented.

  Further, also on the staircase surface 922c in the suppressing portion 930, the traveling speed of the game ball B can be effectively decelerated and suppressed by the meandering passage and the convex portions 922e, 923e, and 924e, and the progress can be further delayed. it can.

  In addition, since the game ball B can be guided from the game area 1p on the front side of the game board 1 to the back side suppression unit 930, a sufficient distance for slowing and suppressing the traveling speed of the game ball B is ensured. be able to.

  Further, in the restraining portion 930, a plurality of convex portions 922e, 923e, and 924e can form a passage capable of effectively restraining the progress of the game ball B, and a plurality of games are caused by the staircase surface 922c that tends to move downward. The balls B can be guided to the big winning opening 37 all at once, and an over winning can be easily realized.

  In addition, not all of the game balls B whose progress is suppressed by the suppression unit 930 are guided to the winning prize opening 37, and a part thereof is led out of the gaming area 1p through the collection opening 920c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively with respect to 37.

<Fourth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, the 4th modification of a variable prize-winning apparatus is demonstrated using FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those of the third modification described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. The variable winning device according to the fourth modification mainly differs from the one according to the third modification in the main stage 922. The variable winning device according to the fourth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  In the main stage 922 of the fourth modified example, the shutter surface 922b is formed on the front portion 922a, but the convex portion is not provided. Of course, you may make it provide a convex part. Moreover, the convex part is not provided also in the level | step-difference part of the upper cover 924 and the staircase surface 922c which are not shown in figure as a whole. The staircase surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface with a slight downward tendency, and is formed so as to exhibit an uneven or wavy repetitive shape along the left-right direction. The upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wave shape like the step surface 922c. According to the staircase surface 922c and the upper surface 923a, the game ball B easily swings in the left-right direction when proceeding from the upper stage to the lower stage, so that the time until the lower stage is reached is prolonged. The traveling speed of the game ball B can be reduced more effectively.

  As shown by a solid line in FIG. 82, when the shutter surface 922b is in a closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower stage of the step surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through a discharge unit 920b (not shown). An inclined support surface 922f is provided on the bottom of the main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The slide plate 926 supports the bottom of the main stage 922. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as indicated by phantom lines in FIG. 82, when the slide plate 926 is retracted to a predetermined rear position while contacting the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined in a forward-downward direction. As a result, the staircase surface 922c also has a relatively steep attitude that is lowered forward, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below an opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are guided to the winning prize opening 37 all at once. As the mechanism for tilting the main stage, a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above may be applied.

[Effects of Game Machine of Fourth Modification]
According to the gaming machine of the fourth modified example as described above, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structure, and to effectively suppress the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost. it can.

<Another example of the fourth modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the fourth modification described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. 83 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ′, and FIG. 85 is a diagram for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . 83 and 84 show a form in which the component parts (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ′) of the variable winning device are provided in the through-hole 1c of the game board 1 without any gaps. Actually, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

  A main stage 922 shown in FIG. 83 is formed integrally with the upper stage. The main stage 922 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wavy shape along the left-right direction, and has a staircase surface 922c composed of an inclined surface that tends to slightly fall downward. A shutter surface 922b is formed integrally with the front end (front portion) 922a of the staircase surface 922c. The step surface 922c and the shutter surface 922b are formed to have the same dimension in the left-right direction. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 84 is similar to the above-described upper lid 924, but does not have a plate-like member that faces the entire surface of the stepped surface 922c in the closed state, and extends from the introduction portion 920c to the rear of the main stage 922. A guide path 924b is provided for guiding the game ball B to the upper stage of the staircase surface 922c. The rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b is disposed above the rear end of the main stage 922, and a communication space portion 924g leading to the rear end of the main stage 922 is opened further rearward of the rear end portion 924f. Yes. Thereby, the game ball B guided to the rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b falls to the rear end portion of the main stage 922 through the communication space portion 924g. Even when the main stage 922 is not only in the open state but also in the closed state between the front end 922a of the step surface 922c and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), a game is played from the step surface 922c through the front end 922a to the shutter surface 922b. A relatively large gap through which the sphere B can pass is provided. Thereby, even if the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the step surface 922c of the suppressing unit 930 to the shutter surface 922b without any trouble.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the game ball B in the suppressing unit 930 passes through the opening 920a (not shown) from the upper stage to the lower stage along the step surface 922c, and finally To the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. In addition, as a device for tilting the main stage, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid may be used.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the main stage 922 is in a tilted position with a forward drop, the staircase surface 922c also has a relatively steep tilt with a forward drop, and the shutter face 922b has an opening (not shown). Move down 920a. As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the staircase surface 922c are guided to the winning prize opening 37 all at once. Even with such a variable prize device including the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924 ′, the same effect as that of the fourth modified example described above can be obtained.

<Fifth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fifth modified example of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component which is the same as or similar to the thing by the 3rd modification mentioned above or a 4th modification, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. The variable winning device according to the fifth modification is also mainly different from that according to the third modification in the main stage 922. The variable winning device according to the fifth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 and the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  The main stage 922 of the fifth modified example is formed up to the portion of the upper stage, and has an inclined surface 922c 'that tends to be lowered downward. Nothing is provided on the inclined surface 922c '. The upper lid 924 has a plurality of partition walls 924c 'on the surface facing the inclined surface 922c'. When the main stage 922 is in a posture to close the grand prize opening 37, the cut wall 924c ′ is bent to the left and right to meander when the game ball B moves from the upper side to the lower side along the inclined surface 922c ′. The passage 930 ′ is formed. The partition wall 924c 'is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B at a predetermined interval. When the game ball B moves downward along the inclined surface 922c ′ by the passage 930 ′ having such a convex portion 924e, a suppressing portion for reducing and suppressing the traveling speed by meandering left and right Is formed. That is, the game ball B meanders to the left and right when the path 930 ′ is bent left and right, so that it takes a long time to reach the lower end of the inclined surface 922c ′. The traveling speed of B can be reduced more effectively.

  As shown by a solid line in FIG. 87, when the shutter surface 922b is in a closed state, the game ball B that has reached the lower end of the inclined surface 922c 'is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through a discharge unit 920b (not shown). The bottom of the main stage 922 is also provided with an inclined support surface 922f, and a slide plate 926 that can reciprocate in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The slide plate 926 supports the bottom of the main stage 922. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as indicated by phantom lines in FIG. 87, when the slide plate 926 is retracted to a predetermined position behind the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined in a forward-downward direction. Then, the front surface 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below an opening 920a (not shown) while the inclined surface 922c 'is in a steeper posture with the front lowering. At this time, the interval between the inclined surface 922 c ′ and the partition wall 924 c ′ increases beyond the diameter of the game ball B, and the partition wall 924 c ′ cannot prevent the progress of the game ball B. As a result, the bent passage 930 ′ is eliminated, and the plurality of game balls B on the inclined surface 922 c ′ are promptly guided to the special winning opening 37 without any trouble.

[Effects of Game Machine of Fifth Modification]
Even with the gaming machine of the fifth modified example, it is possible to configure a variable winning device capable of over-winning with simpler parts and structure, and to effectively suppress the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost. .

<Another example of the fifth modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fifth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the fifth modification described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. FIG. 88 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ′, and FIG. 85 is a diagram for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . 88 and 89 show a configuration in which the component parts (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ′) of the variable winning device are provided in the through-hole 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. Actually, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain gap.

  The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 88 is a member formed in a flat plate shape in substantially the same manner as in the fifth modification described above, and its upper surface is disposed as a forwardly inclined surface 922c ′, and the inclined surface 922c ′ The tip portion is used as the shutter surface 922b. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 89 also does not have a plate-like member facing the entire surface of the inclined surface 922c ′, wraps around the rear end of the main stage 922 from the introduction portion 920c, and is an appropriate upper end portion of the inclined surface 922c ′. A guide path 924b for guiding the game ball B to the right is provided. Further, the upper unit 924 ′ has a plurality of partition walls 924 c ′ at a portion facing the inclined surface 922 c ′. When the main stage 922 is in a closed state, the cut wall 924c ′ forms a passage 930 ′ that is bent left and right to meander when the game ball B moves along the inclined surface 922c ′ from above to below. ing. The partition wall 924c 'is provided with a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B at a predetermined interval. By such a passage 930 ′, a suppressing portion is formed that guides the game ball B in a meandering manner to the lower side along the inclined surface 922 c ′ while decelerating and suppressing the traveling speed. Between the outlet 930a ′ of the passage 930 ′ and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), the main stage 922 is guided not only to the open state but also to the front end side of the inclined surface 922c ′. A relatively large gap through which the game ball B can pass is provided. Accordingly, even when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B can be smoothly guided along the passage 930 'from the inclined surface 922c' to the shutter surface 922b without any trouble.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (A), when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the game ball B on the inclined surface 922c ′ moves so as to meander from the upper side to the lower side along the passage 930 ′. Specifically, the light passes through an opening 920a (not shown) and is guided onto the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to that of the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The main stage 922 is supported by a shaft 921a inserted into the vertically long hole 921d of the back base member 921 at the rear end thereof, and can be tilted by rotating around the shaft 921a. In addition, as a device for tilting the main stage, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid may be used.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 90B, when the central portion of the main stage 922 is lowered by the drive unit 925, the main stage 922 is relatively tilted around the shaft 921a that is displaced downward along the vertically long hole 921d. It becomes a steep posture with a steep forward decline. That is, the inclined surface 922 c ′ also has a posture that is steeper than in the state of FIG. 90A, and the shutter surface 922 b moves below an opening 920 a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of game balls B on the inclined surface 922c ′ are separated from the partition wall 924c ′, and the passage 930 ′ is eliminated, so that the plurality of game balls B are enlarged all at once along the inclined surface 922c ′. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Even with such a variable winning device including the main stage 922 and the upper unit 924 ', it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the fifth modified example.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Direction changer]
As shown in FIG. 91, in the game board 1, a direction changing device 110 capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball is provided between the lower end 30A ′ of the second guide rail 30 ′ and the special winning opening 37. ing. As shown in FIG. 92, the direction changing device 110 receives a plurality of game balls, changes their rolling direction (generally downward) to a direction that rotates in a substantially horizontal plane, and receives the plurality of game balls received. The Clune 111 can be discharged one by one, and the posture of the Clune 111 can be changed according to the number of game balls received, so that a plurality of game balls accepted by the Clune 111 can be released. And a seesaw mechanism 112. When the player strikes right, the game ball may be guided to the cruel 111 by a nail (not shown). If the game ball 111 is not guided to the cruel 111, the game ball falls downward, rolls on the big winning port shutter 37A, and is guided toward the out port 41.

  The croon 111 is provided on the bottom of the inner center of the main body portion 111A so that the main body portion 111A formed in a mortar shape by the inner wall of the concave curved surface and the game balls can be discharged one by one from the inside of the main body portion 111A to the outside. A discharge port 111B. When the posture of the crune 111 is changed by the seesaw mechanism 112, it becomes a posture in which a plurality of game balls can be discharged by spilling from the upper surface opening 111C toward the big prize opening 37.

  The seesaw mechanism 112 is supported by an intermediate portion via a support shaft 113 protruding from the game board 1 so that both ends can swing in a substantially vertical plane along the game board 1, and The arm 112A is disposed, and a balance weight 112B is provided on the other end side of the arm 112A opposite to the one end side where the clown 111 is disposed. The weight of the balance weight 112B is heavier than, for example, four game balls, but lighter than the prescribed number of five game balls. The seesaw mechanism 112 supports the clune 111 on one end side of the arm 112A while maintaining a horizontal posture in which the game ball can be received in a state where a predetermined number (for example, five) or more of the game balls are not received by the crew 111. . At this time, until a predetermined number or more of the game balls are received by the crune 111, the game balls received inside the crune 111 are guided toward the bottom while rotating along the inner peripheral wall of the crune 111. Thus, the air is discharged from the discharge port 111B to the lower side of the cruel 111. The game balls discharged from the outlet 111B are guided to the top prize opening 37 when the top face of the closed big prize opening shutter 37A or when the big prize opening shutter 37A is open.

  On the other hand, when the seesaw mechanism 112 is in a state where a predetermined number or more of the game balls are received by the cleon 111, the arm is configured to tilt the cleon 111 in balance with the balance weight 112B provided on the other end side of the arm 112A. 112A swings. Thereby, a large number of game balls are collectively discharged from the upper surface opening 111 </ b> C of the crune 111. A large number of game balls released in this manner are guided to the top prize opening 37 when the top face of the closed big prize opening shutter 37A or the big winning opening shutter 37A is open. As a modification of the present embodiment, the position of the croon may be arranged above another winning port or gate, not above the big winning port. A crune may be provided on both ends of the arm without particularly providing a balance weight. Two or more croons may be provided on one end side of the arm. You may arrange | position a direction change apparatus in any position in a game area | region. The croon may have a flat plate shape without providing a mortar-shaped recess. When the game ball is not contained, the position of the croon may be lower than the height position shown in FIG. 92 or the like, and any height position may be adopted as long as the posture is inclined when a specified number of game balls are received.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Starting unit]
As shown in FIG. 93, in the game board 1, a winning opening 40A and a passing gate 35 that are opened and closed by the blade member 34 are provided on the left side of the second large winning opening 37, and the winning opening 40A and the passing gate 35 are provided. The start port unit 200 is provided on the left side. The start port unit 200 has a plurality of start ports that provide a lottery opportunity on the condition that a game ball passes. This starting port unit 200 is basically arranged so that a game ball can enter when left-handed. In the case of left-handed, the fired game ball may pass through the conduction port 221 of the start-up unit 200, and in the case of right-handed, the fired game ball may be difficult or impossible to pass through the conduction port 221. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the start port unit 200 includes a base plate 210, a conduction port cover 220, a sorting crank 230, a croon 240, a crune ball passage member 250, a ball passage pressing member 260, a first start port switch 320, A second start port switch 330 and a loss port switch 380 are provided. The cruising device includes a cruising 240, a cruising ball passage member 250, a ball passage pressing member 260, a second start port switch 330, and a loss port switch 380. The base plate 210, the conduction port cover 220, and the croon 240 are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the player can visually recognize the behavior of the game ball that has entered the start port unit 200 from the front of the game board 1. It is configured to be able to.

  The base plate 210 is provided so as to close an opening (not shown) provided in the game board 1. The base plate 210 has a first start port 211 on the lower right side when viewed from the front, and an introduction port 212 for guiding the game ball to the crune 240 slightly above the center. A sorting crank 230 is disposed at a position on the front side of the base plate 210 at the upper left of the first start port 211 and to the right of the introduction port 212. A first start port switch 320 for detecting a winning (passing) of a game ball with respect to the first start port 211 is provided at a position corresponding to the first start port 211 on the back side of the base plate 210. Yes. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the first start port 211 is detected by the first start port switch 320.

  The conduction port cover 220 is fixed to the base plate 210 so as to cover the front surface of the base plate 210. The conduction port cover 220 has a conduction port 221 that can be passed through so as to guide the game ball to the inside, and part of the game balls flow out to the front of the game board 1 that is the outside in the vicinity of the first start port 211. There is an outlet 222 to be made. Although not particularly illustrated, a guide wall is provided inside the conduction port cover 220 so as to form a ball passage from the sorting crank 230 to the first start port 211 and the introduction port 212. Note that the game ball may be always led from the sorting crank to the first starting port without providing an outlet, and may be won.

  The distribution crank 230 is used for alternately distributing the game balls that have passed through the conduction port 221 to the ball passage following the first start port 211 and the introduction port 212. It is provided to move. The sorting crank 230 includes a cylindrical main body 231, a support shaft 232 that supports the main body 231 in a swingable manner with respect to the base plate 210, a sorting piece 233 that extends substantially upward from the outer periphery of the main body 231, and sorting. A right wing piece 234R and a left wing that extend from the outer periphery of the main body 231 with a predetermined interval on the right and left sides of the piece 233, and rotate the main body 231 and the sorting piece 233 to the right and left by a predetermined angle by contact and impact of a game ball. It has a piece 234L.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the sorting piece 233 is tilted to the right by a predetermined angle, the game ball that has passed through the conduction port 221 contacts the left wing piece 234L and is then guided to the introduction port 212. At this time, the left wing piece 234L is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle by the impact of the game ball, so that the sorting piece 233 is inclined to the left by a predetermined angle. Thereafter, when the sorting piece 233 is inclined to the left by a predetermined angle, the game ball that has passed through the conduction port 221 next contacts the right wing piece 234R, and then is guided to the ball path following the first start port 211. It is burned. At this time, the right wing piece 234R is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle by the impact of the game ball, so that the sorting piece 233 is inclined to the right by a predetermined angle. That is, each time the game ball passes through the conduction port 221, the sorting pieces 233 are alternately inclined to the right side and the left side, and the game balls are alternately distributed to the ball passage following the first start port 211 and the introduction port 212. It is done.

  The croon 240 receives the game ball that has moved from the introduction port 212 and discharges the game ball from any of the plurality of through holes, and is provided on the back side of the base plate 210. The croon 240 includes a bottomed cylindrical croon body 240A, an introduction passage 240B for introducing a game ball from the introduction port 212 to the croon body 240A, and a second start port as a through hole provided on the bottom surface of the croon body 240A. 241 and two losing ports 242. The game ball guided from the introduction passage 240 </ b> B to the crone main body 240 </ b> A is discharged downward through the second start port 241 or the lost port 242.

  The clown ball passage member 250 is for guiding the game balls discharged from the second start port 241 and the loser port 242 of the croon 240 to the second start port switch 330 and the loser port switch 380, respectively. , Disposed below the croon 240. The clown ball passage member 250 temporarily collects a plurality of game balls discharged from the winning passage 251 and the two loser ports 242 that guide the game balls of the second start port 241 to the second start port switch 330 one by one. It has a lost passage 252 that can be received and guides these game balls one by one to the lost mouth switch 380.

  The ball passage pressing member 260 is for fixing the crone ball passage member 250 to the lower part of the croon 240 and holding the second start port switch 330 and the loss port switch 380. Be placed. The ball path pressing member 260 holds the second start port switch 330 at a position corresponding to the winning path 251 of the clown ball path member 250 and holds a loss port switch 380 at a position corresponding to the lost path 252. The game ball guided from the winning path 251 is detected by the second start port switch 330, and the game ball guided from the lose path 252 is detected by the lose port switch 380. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second start port 241 is detected by the second start port switch 330, and the game ball that has passed through the lose port 242 is detected by the lose port switch 380. In addition, the number of losing ports in the croon may be one or less or three or more. You may arrange | position a 1st start opening, a general winning opening, a gate, etc. in a croon. All passing areas in the croon may be used as a loser opening, a starting opening, a general winning opening, a gate, or the like.

[Moving effect device]
As shown in FIG. 93, the movable effect member 42A included in the movable effect device 42 is usually located behind the stage 31 that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and is easily visible to the player when performing a specific effect. By moving to the position, it appears in the lower front part of the display area 4A of the visual liquid crystal display device 4, and is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, the movable effect member 42A is configured such that the movable effect member 42 swings vertically and horizontally and the blades protrude from the outer periphery. 42 A of movable production | presentation members have the light emitting lens 42B so that it may overlap with the whole of the below-mentioned 3 scale ball display area 600 displayed on the lower part of the display area 4A, and a part of 1st 3 scale ball reservation display area 610. FIG. The light emitting lens 42B can emit light in a plurality of colors. As a result, a later-described three-scale ball displayed as an image in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the first three-size ball holding display area 610 can be visually recognized when the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A emits light and overlaps. On the other hand, when the movable effect member 42A is retracted below the display area 4A, it can be viewed from the front. Note that an image in the display area may be visible through the light emitting lens even when the light emitting lens overlaps the display area.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 97, the sub-control circuit 70 is different from the one according to the above-described embodiment, and is connected to a lose mouth switch 380. When the lose mouth switch 380 detects the passage of a game ball at the lose mouth 242, the lose mouth switch 380 supplies a detection signal indicating that to the sub CPU 71. The first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330 are connected to the main control circuit 60 in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, and games at the first start port 211 and the second start port 241 are performed. When a winning (passing) of a ball is detected, a detection signal indicating that is supplied to the main CPU 61. The movable effect device 42 including the movable effect member 42A is connected to the sub CPU 71 via the movable effect device control circuit 79. The sub CPU 71 moves the movable effect member 42A, emits light from the light emitting lens 42B, and the like. To control.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
As shown in FIG. 98, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment are substantially the same as those according to the second embodiment described above, but differ in the following points. That is, the special symbol that is a small hit is only the first special symbol corresponding to the first start port. In addition, the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not the order in which the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol, but the game balls with respect to the first start port 211 and the second start port 241. Will be in the order of winning. Further, the probability variation performance (specific probability game state specification) is defined so that the probability variation game state continues up to 184 times.

  The specifications of the present embodiment may also have the following contents. For example, the special symbol for the small hit may be only the second special symbol corresponding to the second starting port, or both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For special symbols, the jackpot probability at low probability and high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win the jackpot when the probability is high than when the probability is low. About the digestion order of a special symbol, it is good also as a specification which preferentially digests any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the kind of jackpot symbol of a 1st special symbol. Further, an extra bonus may be executed even in the big hit gaming state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings) is set to “10”, but is not limited to this. For example, the number of winning prizes may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The short time performance may be greater than the ST count (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST count including, for example, 0. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls related to the big winning opening is set to a value different from the above, the estimated number of winning balls is calculated using the value and the estimated winning number, and the above-mentioned number of extra balls is notified. Can be. For normal symbols, the hit probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low, and may be won when the probability is low, for example. The number of symbols per normal symbol is not limited to the above, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The second start opening prize count may be a value other than the above.

[Transition of production mode]
As shown in FIG. 99, the presentation modes of the present embodiment include the normal modes (1) to (3), the small hit presentation mode, the special modes (1) to (3), the big hit presentation mode, and the ST mode. (1) to (3) are defined. The small hit effect mode is an effect mode controlled by the sub-control circuit 70 in conjunction with the start, execution, and end of the small hit gaming state. The jackpot effect mode is an effect mode controlled by the sub-control circuit 70 in conjunction with the start, execution, and end of the jackpot game state. The jackpot effect mode includes one corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol.

  The normal modes (1) to (3) are a kind of effect mode controlled by the sub-control circuit 70 in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time-short game state). In the present embodiment, the normal mode (2) is entered after the probability variation gaming state is ended, and different normal modes (1) to (3) can be shifted according to the determination result of the normal mode effect shift determination process described later. In the normal modes (1) to (3), when the big hit is won, the game shifts to the big hit effect mode, and when the big hit is won, the game shifts to the small hit effect mode.

  Special modes (1) to (3) are a kind of performance mode controlled by the sub-control circuit 70 in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time-short game state). This is executed until 5 games are consumed as the number of symbol fluctuations (games). In this embodiment, after the end of the small hit gaming state, the mode can be shifted to any one of the special modes (1) to (3) according to the determination result of the special mode shift destination determination process described later. When five games are digested in the special modes (1) to (3), the game shifts to the original normal modes (1) to (3) that existed before the start of the small hit gaming state. Even in the special modes (1) to (3), when the big hit is won, the mode shifts to the big win effect mode.

  The ST modes (1) to (3) are performance modes controlled by the sub control circuit 70 in the probability variation gaming state. In the present embodiment, the ST mode (1) is entered after the end of the big hit gaming state. For example, when 100 games are consumed in the ST mode (1), the ST mode (2) is entered and the ST mode (2) is entered. When the 74 games are digested, the ST mode (3) is entered. Further, when 10 games are consumed in the ST mode (3), the probability variation gaming state is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode (2). In the ST modes (1) to (3), when the big hit is won, the mode shifts to the big win effect mode.

  Note that the types and number of effect modes may be greater than or less than those shown in FIG. In addition, although each of the effect modes has a different background image, BGM, or the like, it is sufficient that at least some aspects such as a display image or sound as an effect are different. The period during which the special mode stays after the end of the small hit gaming state (number of games) is not limited to the above-mentioned five games, but can be set as appropriate to an appropriate number of games according to specifications. The period (number of games) in which each of the ST modes (1) to (3) stays in the probabilistic gaming state is not limited to the aforementioned 100 games, 74 games, and 10 games, and is appropriately set to an appropriate number of games according to the specifications. can do.

[Example display screen of gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 100, three decorative symbols 500 are displayed in a variable manner and stopped at the center of the display area 4A. The fluctuating display means a state in which any one of the three decorative symbols 500 is displayed so as to flow up and down without being completely stopped or sequentially enlarged. The stop display means a state in which all three decorative symbols 500 that have been variably displayed are stopped and a combination of these symbols is shown. In the following description, the stop display related to the decorative symbol 500 and the special symbol may be referred to as “determined display”. The variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol 500 are synchronized with the variable display and the fixed display of the special symbol except in the case of a so-called quasi-continuous described later. Below the display area 4A, the three-scale ball display area 600, the first three-size ball holding display area 610, the second three-size ball holding display area 620, the jewelry display area 700, and the jewelry holding display area 710 are displayed. The The three-scale ball display area 600, the first three-size ball holding display area 610, and the second three-size ball holding display area 620 are stored in the work RAM 73 according to the start-up storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. An image of the three shaku balls is displayed based on the held information. In the following description, the holding information related to the three shaku balls is simply referred to as “holding information” or “three shaku ball holding information”. Specifically, the hold information includes information such as “Random value for winning determination”, “Random value for determining winning symbol”, etc., but for convenience, the determination of the hit type based on the random number value is included. It is assumed that the result is included in the hold information. The “variation pattern determination random value” is not included in the hold information in the present embodiment, but the type of the change pattern may be included in the hold information based on the “variation pattern determination random value”. Also, “Random number value for winning determination”, “Random value for determining winning symbol”, “Random value for determining variation pattern” (various random values extracted according to winning at the starting port), etc. are stored in the start (start) Storage information), the main control circuit (main CPU) may perform various processes related to the pre-reading notice executed by the sub-control circuit (sub CPU) described later based on the start-up memory. . In this case, the hold information related to the three shaku balls is handled as the start memory. The image of the three shaku balls may be simply referred to as “three shaku balls”. In the jewel display area 700 and the jewel hold display area 710, an image of a jewel is displayed based on the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 in accordance with the passage of the game ball in the lose mouth 242. In the following description, the hold information related to the gem is referred to as “jewel hold information”. An image of a jewel may be simply referred to as a “jewel”. In the upper part of the display area 4A, for example, a maximum of four pyrotechnic character images 800 are displayed. The fireworks character image 800 may be simply referred to as “fireworks”.

  In the case of the quasi-ream, the decorative pattern 500 is displayed as if it has been stopped and displayed once or a plurality of times after the special symbol is variably displayed based on one start memory until it is displayed. May be in a temporary stop display state that cannot be said to be a complete stop display state due to vibration or the like. For example, in the case of the pseudo-ream 2, the decorative symbol 500 is in a temporary stop display state after the variable display, and is finally finally displayed through the variable display. In the case of the quasi-ream 3, the decorative symbol 500 is in a temporary stop display state next to the variable display, and after that, through the variable display, is again in the temporary stop display state. . In the case of the pseudo-ream 4, the decorative symbol 500 is in a temporary stop display state after the variable display, and then in the temporary stop display state again through the variable display, and then in the temporary stop display state again through the variable display. Then, after that, the final display is made through the variable display.

  The three-scale ball display area 600 displays the hold information corresponding to the start-up memory based on the three-dimensional ball image (hereinafter simply referred to as “three-dimensional ball image”) during the variable display of the decorative pattern 500 (in the first variable display in the case of a pseudo-ream). This is an area for displaying as “three shawls” and is located at the lower left end of the display area 4A. In the three-scale ball display area 600, the display of the three-scale ball may be erased along with the final display of the decorative symbol 500 (the first temporary stop display in the case of a pseudo-ream). In the case where the decorative symbol 500 is finally confirmed and displayed, if at least one three-scale ball is displayed in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, the first three-size ball holding display area 610 One three-scale ball is displayed so as to move to the three-scale ball display area 600. In the three-scale ball display area 600, the three-scale ball can be displayed by one of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  The first three-scale ball holding display area 610 is an area for individually displaying the hold information corresponding to the first to fourth start-up memories as a three-size ball image. Located on the right side. In the first three-scale ball hold display area 610, the first hold information stored most recently is displayed as the leftmost three-scale ball, and the second to fourth hold information is sequentially displayed on the right side of the left-most three-scale ball. It is displayed by a plurality of three shaku balls. In the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, every time the leftmost three-scale ball indicating the first holding information is erased, it is moved and displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, and the remaining two If there are three shawls indicating the fourth hold information, they are moved and displayed so as to shift to the left. In the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, an image of the three-scale ball can be displayed by one of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  The second three-scale ball hold display area 620 is an area for collectively displaying the hold information corresponding to the latest four hold balls as one three-size ball when there are five or more hold balls. It is located to the right of the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 and the jewelry holding display area 710. In the second three-scale ball holding display area 620, when the total number of holding information is five, the second to fifth four pieces of holding information are stored in a single order in the storage order in which the oldest is first. It is displayed as a ball. At this time, the storage information having the first storage order is displayed as a three-scale ball at the leftmost end of the first three-scale ball storage display area 610. Similarly, in the second three-scale ball holding display area 620, when the total number of holding information is 6 to 8, the holding order for 4 pieces such as 3rd to 6th, 4th to 7th, and 5th to 8th is stored. Information is displayed together as a single shakudama ball. At this time, the 1st, 3rd, and 1st to 4th hold information in the storage order is displayed as 3 scale balls arranged in order from the leftmost end of the first 3 scale ball hold display area 610. When the total number of the hold information is changed from 5 or more to 4, the 3 shaku balls displayed in the second 3 shaku ball hold display area 620 are erased, and the 1 st to 4 th hold information is held in the 1 st 3 shaku ball hold. Displayed as four three-scale balls arranged from the leftmost end to the rightmost end of the display area 610. In addition, since the upper limit number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 respectively, when three shaku balls are displayed in the second three shaku ball holding display area 620, five or more pieces of holding information Will contain at least hold information corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, a three-scale ball is not displayed in the second three-scale ball holding display area 620 only with the holding information corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  The jewel display area 700 displays, for example, jewel reservation information that is the basis when the decorative pattern 500 is variably displayed or demo-displayed by a part of the quasi-ream (such as “pseudo-series variation 1 quasi-ream 2”) It is an area for displaying with jewels, and is located above the three-scale ball display area 600. For example, in the jewel display area 700 in a part of the pseudo-ream, the display of the jewel is erased with the stop display of the decorative pattern 500 by the pseudo-ream. Note that the display of the jewel may be erased along with the temporary stop display of the decorative design. When the decorative symbol 500 is stopped or temporarily stopped and at least one jewel is displayed in the jewel hold display area 710, the jewel hold display area 710 displays the one in the jewel display area 700. The gem is displayed as it moves. In the jewel display area 700, a jewel image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  The jewel hold display area 710 is an area for displaying a maximum of 4 pieces of jewel hold information individually arranged by jewel images, and is located on the right side of the jewel display area 700. In the jewel hold display area 710, the first jewel hold information stored in the oldest is displayed as the leftmost jewel, and the second to fourth jewel hold information is sequentially arranged on the right side of the leftmost jewel. Is displayed. In the gem hold display area 710, every time the leftmost gem indicating the first gem hold information is erased, the gem hold display area 700 is moved and displayed in the gem display area 700, and the remaining second to fourth gem hold If there are gems indicating information, they are moved and displayed so as to shift to the left. In the jewel hold display area 710, a jewel image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  The character image 800 is used as a kind of pre-reading notice effect to make a pre-reading notice according to the number of remaining fireworkers, and is displayed as a fireworker above the decorative pattern 500 or in the background. The character image 800 is basically displayed so as to be reduced or maintained from the initially displayed number when the predetermined number of games is consumed, but it is displayed as if it is apparently reduced by the gaze pattern, but then returned. This may be internally maintained.

[Operation timing of gaming machines]
As shown in FIG. 101, in the normal mode, there are cases where a pseudo-ream occurs and does not occur. As shown as an example in the figure, in the first half portion where the gem hold information is stored, as the special symbol is variably displayed based on the loss variation pattern 2, as an effect based on the pseudo continuous variation 2, the decoration The symbol 500 is variably displayed at the first variation (pseudo 1), then temporarily stopped, and further variably displayed at the second variation (pseudo 2), and finally confirmed. At this time, from the first change of the decorative pattern 500 to the temporary stop display, the three-scale ball hold information is used as the target hold, and the image of the three-scale ball based on the three-size ball hold information is displayed in the first three-scale ball hold display. The display is moved from the area 610 to the three-scale ball display area 600 and displayed. Thereafter, from the second change of the decorative pattern 500 to the final display, gem hold information is used as the target hold, and an image of a gem based on this gem hold information moves from the gem hold display area 710 to the gem display area 700. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101 as an example, in the second half part, the special design 500 is displayed as an effect based on the normal variation 2 as the special symbol is variably displayed based on the loss variation pattern 2 as in the first half portion. The variable display is performed once, and then the display is confirmed (the confirmation display is not shown). At this time, from the change display of the decorative pattern 500 to the final display, the three-scale ball holding information is consistently used as the target hold, and the image of the three-size ball based on the three-size ball holding information is the first three-size ball. The display is moved from the hold display area 610 to the three-scale ball display area 600 and displayed. Further, for example, even if the gem hold information is stored at this time, the gem image based on the gem hold information is displayed in the gem hold display area 710 without being used.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined period (for example, a period of about 1 s) immediately before the decorative symbol 500 is temporarily stopped or confirmed is displayed, for example, at a relatively low speed even when the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display. Or temporarily enlarged. Moreover, in this embodiment, a pseudo | simulation series generate | occur | produces at the time of the variable display of the decoration symbol 500 only when the production pattern containing a pseudo | simulation series is determined in normal mode irrespective of the presence or absence of jewelry reservation information. However, a pseudo-ream may be generated in a mode other than the normal mode, on the condition that jewel hold information exists.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 102, demonstration displays (1) and (2) may be performed in the normal mode. As shown as an example in the figure, in the first half portion where the three-scale ball holding information is stored, the special symbol is variably displayed based on the loss variation pattern 2, and the three-dimensional ball holding information is used. As an effect based on the normal variation 2, the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed, and then confirmed. At this time, from the change display of the decorative pattern 500 to the final display, the three-scale ball holding information is consistently used as the target hold, and the image of the three-size ball based on the three-size ball holding information is the first three-size ball. The display is moved from the hold display area 610 to the three-scale ball display area 600 and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 102, in the latter half part where the three-scale ball holding information is lost and the jewelry holding information is present, the special symbol is not changed and is not changed. As an effect, a demonstration display (2) using jewel hold information is performed. In this demonstration display (2), every time an image of a jewel based on the jewel hold information is moved from the jewel hold display area 710 to the jewel display area 700 and displayed, for example, “latency?” "A high degree of expectation?" Or the like is displayed with a message that impresses the player in an advantageous state. Such a demonstration display (2) is repeatedly performed in a time of, for example, about 8 s per piece of jewelry holding information when there are a plurality of pieces of jewelry holding information.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 102, when both the three-scale ball holding information and the jewelry holding information are lost, the non-fluctuating state of the special symbol is continued, and the demonstration display (1) is displayed as an effect by the normal demonstration. Done. The demo display (1) is different from the demo display (2) in that an image for explaining a game or the like is displayed. Such a demo display (1) is different from the demo display (2) in the generation conditions, and is generated not only in the normal mode but also in other modes, and is decorated in the absence of the three-scale ball holding information and the jewelry holding information. This occurs when the non-fluctuating state of the symbol 500 has elapsed for a predetermined time.

  In this embodiment, in the normal mode, the demonstration display (1) is not necessarily performed via the demonstration display (2). If not, the demonstration display (1) is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 103, in the special mode, a special mode-specific effect may be performed as a demonstration display (3). Unlike the demo displays (1) and (2), the demo display (3) is configured such that the gem image is not displayed while the gem hold information is used. A message such as “X times” or “Large chance?” Is displayed so as to impress a player with an advantageous state.

  As shown in FIG. 103 as an example, in the first half portion in which the three-dimensional ball holding information is stored, the special symbol is variably displayed based on the loss variation pattern 7, and the three-dimensional ball holding information is used. As an effect based on the effect pattern (the first stage fireworks teacher cannot be found), the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed, and then confirmed. At this time, from the change display of the decorative pattern 500 to the final display, the three-scale ball holding information is consistently used as the target hold, and the image of the three-size ball based on the three-size ball holding information is the first three-size ball. The display is moved from the hold display area 610 to the three-scale ball display area 600 and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 103, when there is no shakudama ball holding information and there is gem holding information, the special symbol is not fluctuated and displayed in a non-fluctuating state. As an effect by the demonstration, a demonstration display (3) of the special mode exclusive effect using the jewelry hold information is performed. In this demonstration display (3), while the gem image is not displayed, a message impressing the remaining number of special modes and an advantageous state as described above is displayed. Such a demonstration display (3) is displayed so as to indicate a different message for each gem hold information unit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 103, when the three-scale ball holding information (starting memory) is established during the execution of the demonstration display (3), the special symbol is variably displayed based on, for example, the loss variation pattern 7, Accordingly, the decorative pattern 500 is variably displayed as an effect based on the effect pattern (second stage fireworks teacher cannot be found) using the three-scale ball holding information, and then confirmed and displayed (the confirmation display is not shown). Even at this time, from the variable display to the fixed display of the decorative symbol 500, the three-scale ball holding information is consistently used as the target hold from the beginning, and the image of the three-size ball based on the three-size ball holding information is the first thirteenth. The shakudama holding display area 610 is moved to the three-scaled ball display area 600 and displayed.

  In the special mode, when the three-scale ball holding information disappears, the demonstration display (3) may be performed regardless of the presence or absence of the jewelry holding information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, in the ST mode, an ST mode-specific effect may be performed as a demonstration display (4). The demo display (4) is different from the demo displays (1) to (3), in which the gem image is hidden while the gem hold information is used. , “A”, “B”, “C”... “E” are displayed in three rows. The demonstration display (4) may be an effect that informs or suggests the opening timing of the blade member 34.

  As shown as an example from the upper stage to the middle stage in FIG. 104, when the three-scale ball holding information (1), (2) is stored, first, the special symbol is variably displayed based on the reach loss variation pattern 7. At this time, as an effect based on the effect pattern (one-shot button reach middle button) using the three-scale ball holding information (1), an image prompting the user to press the push-down operation button 9A is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern 500 being displayed in a variable manner. Is done. When a predetermined time elapses regardless of the pressing of the pressing operation button 9A, the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed. At this time, from the variable display to the fixed display of the decorative symbol 500, the three-scale ball holding information (1) is used as the target reservation from start to finish, and the image of the three-scale ball based on the three-size ball holding information (1). Is moved from the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600 and displayed.

  Next, when a special symbol is variably displayed based on the reach loss variation pattern 8, the variably displayed as an effect based on the effect pattern (triple button reach middle button) using the triple shank hold information (2) An image that prompts the user to press the pressing operation button 9A three times continuously is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern 500. When a predetermined time elapses regardless of the pressing of the pressing operation button 9A, the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed. At this time, from the variable display to the fixed display of the decorative symbol 500, the three-scale ball holding information (2) is used as the target reservation from start to finish, and the image of the three-scale ball based on the three-size ball holding information (2). Is moved from the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600 and displayed. In addition, for example, when the shakudama ball holding information (1), (2) is stored and the jewelry holding information is also stored, the 3d ball holding information (1), (2) is digested. Regardless of whether or not it is done, the gem hold information is digested.

  On the other hand, as shown as an example in the lower part of FIG. 104, when there is no three-scale ball holding information and only a plurality of jewelry holding information exists, the special symbol is not changed and displayed in a non-changeable state, and the jewelry holding information is used. The demonstration display (4) of the ST mode dedicated performance is performed. In this demonstration display (4), while the gem image is not displayed, the change display and stop display of the effect design as described above are performed in place of the decoration design 500. Such a demonstration display (4) is performed so as to periodically show a series of behaviors from a change display to a stop display every time the jewel hold information is digested. Further, when the gem holding information is lost, the demonstration display (4) is not performed, and when the gem holding information is stored again without the three-scale ball holding information, the demonstration display (4) is performed based on the gem holding information. Will be done.

  105 and 106 mainly show the timing of suspension promotion in the normal mode. Each of FIGS. 105 (1) to 105 (3) shows a variation period of the decorative design 500 based on a different variation pattern and effect pattern, and although the time length is generally different, the variation start timing is mutually different. In addition, the fluctuation end timings are shown to coincide with each other. Each of FIGS. 106 (1) to 106 (4) shows the variation period (first variation period) of the decorative design 500 based on the same variation pattern and effect pattern, and the time length is the same. The number of pseudo-reams is shown as different.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (1), in the production pattern related to “normal fluctuation”, “pseudo-ream” without “reach”, and “normal reach”, one hold is made between the start of change of the decorative symbol 500 and the end of change. There is a promotion timing. Reservation promotion means an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by changing the display color of the three-scale ball related to the three-scale ball reservation information. However, the hold promotion timing only means a point in time when there is a possibility of changing the display color, and the display color may or may not be changed even at the hold promotion timing. The pending promotion timing is also simply referred to as “elevation timing”.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (2), in the effect pattern related to “long reach”, the period from the start of change to the end of change of the decorative design 500 is the first change period in the first half of the change and the second change in the second half of the change. It is divided into periods. In the first variation period, the decoration pattern 500 is displayed in a manner similar to the effect pattern related to “normal variation”, “pseudo-ream” without reach, and “normal reach”, and in the second variation period, The decorative pattern 500 is displayed in a variable manner in a specific manner related to “long reach”. The first variation period and the second variation period are defined such that the time ratio is, for example, 6: 4. Each of such first variation period and second variation period has one hold promotion timing. That is, when the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed based on “long reach”, there are two hold promotion timings, and the expectation of jackpot is higher than the case of FIG. 105 (1) together with the possibility of changing the display color. Can also be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (3), in the effect pattern related to “SP reach”, the period from the start of change to the end of change of the decorative symbol 500 is the first change period in the first half of the change and the second change stage in the change middle. It is divided into a fluctuation period and a third fluctuation period that is the latter half of the fluctuation. “SP reach” corresponds to an effect pattern related to reach other than “normal reach” and “long reach”. In the first variation period, the decoration pattern 500 is displayed in a manner similar to the effect pattern related to “normal variation”, “pseudo-ream” without reach, and “normal reach”, and in the second variation period, The decorative symbol 500 is displayed in the same manner as the effect pattern related to “Long Reach”, and the decorative symbol 500 is displayed in a unique manner related to “SP reach” in the third variable period. The first variation period, the second variation period, and the third variation period are defined such that the time ratio is, for example, 3: 1: 6. Each of the first variation period and the second variation period has one hold promotion timing, and the third change period has two hold promotion timings. That is, when the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed based on “SP reach”, there are four hold promotion timings, and the expectation of jackpot is higher than the case of FIG. 105 (2) together with the possibility of changing the display color. Can also be enhanced.

  The promotion timing is not limited to the number of times shown as an example in FIG. 105, but can be changed as appropriate according to the specification. In the present embodiment, all the production patterns correspond to any one of FIGS. 105 (1) to (3). For example, in the case of the effect pattern in which the variation time is specified as 10 s in the pattern shown in FIG. 105 (3), the first variation period, the second variation period, and the third variation period are exactly 3s, 1s, and 6s. When there is a surplus in the time of the fluctuation period (when it is not assigned at 3: 1: 6), the remaining time may be assigned to the third fluctuation period or another fluctuation period. Further, a fourth variation period or the like may be further provided after the third variation period, and the suspension promotion timing may be defined in the fourth variation period or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (1), in the production pattern having no “pseudo train”, there is one pending promotion timing in the first variation period. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 106 (2) to (4), in the production pattern in which the “pseudo-ream” with reach is defined as 2, 3, and 4 times, the first variation period is “pseudo-ream”. Divided into a plurality of sections divided by the number of times, a variable display and a temporary stop display by the corresponding “pseudo-continuous” are performed in each section. Each section corresponding to each “pseudo-ream” has one hold promotion timing. That is, when the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed on the basis of the “pseudo-ream” with reach, there is a reserved promotion timing corresponding to at least the number of pseudo-reams, and the display color is changed according to the number of pseudo-reams. The expectation of jackpot is raised with the possibility.

  Note that “pseudo-ream” with reach includes a plurality of promotion timings defined in a predetermined section in the first variable period, and there are cases where the number of pending promotion timings is greater than the number of pseudo-reams. In addition, there is also a pseudo-rendition effect using gem holding information as shown in FIG. 101 in which a plurality of promotion timings are defined. Further, for example, in the patterns shown in FIGS. 106 (2) to 106 (4), the first variation period is equally divided into a plurality of sections according to the number of “pseudo-continuous”, but there is a surplus in the time of each section. In this case, the remaining time may be allocated to the last section or another section.

  FIG. 107 shows a variation pattern of the decorative design 500 in the special mode and the ST mode. As shown in the figure, in the effect pattern with “reach” in the special mode and ST mode, the period from the start of change to the end of change of the decorative symbol 500 is the first change period and the latter half of the change. And the second variable period. During the first variation period, the variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed in the same manner as the effect pattern related to “normal variation”, and during the second variation period, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed in a specific manner related to “reach”. Fluctuation display is performed. The first variation period and the second variation period are defined to have a time ratio different from the time ratio in the normal mode. The suspension promotion timing may be defined or the pseudo-ream may be executed also in the first variation period and the second variation period in the special mode and the ST mode.

  Next, various tables and storage areas used in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
108 to 111 show special symbol variation pattern determination tables that are referred to by the main CPU 61. 108 and 109 show a first special symbol variation pattern determination table, and FIGS. 110 and 111 show a second special symbol variation pattern determination table. The first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponds to the case where the number of holdings (the number of start memories) is 1 to 4 in the non-probable non-temporal gaming state, and the number of holdings is 5 in the non-probable non-temporary gaming state. ~ 8 corresponding to the case, non-probability change non-short time game state after small hits corresponding to the case of 1-8 hold number, and the probability change short game state 1-8 hold number It is distributed to the one corresponding to the case. The second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponds to the case where the number of holdings (the number of starting memories) is 1 to 5 in the non-probable non-short-time gaming state, and the number of holdings is 6 in the non-probable non-time-short gaming state. ~ 8 corresponding to the case, non-probability change after small hits non-probable non-short game state corresponding to the case where the number of hold is 1-8, Corresponding to the case where the number of holds is 1 to 8 in the short game state at the time of probability change, 175 to 183 times corresponding to the case where the number of hold is 1 to 8 in the short game state at the time of probability change from 101 to 174 times The number corresponding to the case where the number of holdings is 1 to 8 in the short game state at the time of probability change, the case corresponding to the case where the number of holdings is 1 to 8 in the short game state at the time of the 184th change, and the specific number of fluctuations described later In the short game state at the time of probability change, it is assigned to the one corresponding to the case where the number of holds is 1 to 8 It is divided. These special symbol variation pattern determination tables are stored in the main ROM 62.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the hit type determination result (loss, small hit, big hit ( Probability variation 1)), variation time determination random numbers (0 to 99), various variation patterns, variation times, and variation pattern designation commands (h1 to h34) are defined. As shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol. 4)), random numbers for determining the variation time (0 to 99), various variation patterns, variation times, and variation pattern designation commands (h1 to h58).

  For example, in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 108 (non-probability variation non-temporal holding numbers 1 to 4), the hit type determination result is “lost”, and the variation time determination random numbers “90” to “94” ”Is extracted, the“ reach loss variation pattern 5 ”having a variation time of 20.5 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern designation command“ h11 ”indicating that is displayed. Generated. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 109 (after small hits, non-probability change non-short time holding numbers 1 to 8), the hit type determination result is “losing” and the variable time determination random number “0”. When any one of “99” is extracted, the “losing fluctuation pattern 7” whose fluctuation time is 15 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h29” indicating that fact is determined. Is generated. In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 109 (probability change time short hold counts 1 to 8), the hit type determination result is “big hit (probability change 1)”, and fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99”. ”Is extracted, the“ big hit variation pattern 12 ”having a variation time of 20 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern designation command“ h34 ”indicating that is generated. The The variation pattern designation commands “h1” to “h34” generated in this way are transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

  In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (non-probability variation non-temporary holding number 1 to 5) shown in FIG. 110, the hit type determination result is “lost”, and the variation time determination random numbers “90” to “94” ”Is extracted, the“ reach lose variation pattern 5 ”having a variation time of 20.5 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern designation command“ h11 ”indicating that is displayed. Generated. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (ST101 to 174 times probability change short hold number 1 to 8) shown in FIG. When any one of “25” to “49” is extracted, the “big hit variation pattern 19” having a variation time of 180 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and a variation pattern designation command indicating that fact “H51” is generated. Further, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 111 (specific variation number of times of probability variation, short hold number of 1 to 8), the hit type determination result is “losing” and variation time determination random numbers “0” to “ If any one of “89” is extracted, the “reach loss variation pattern 14” whose variation time is 180 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern designation command “h57” indicating that is generated Is done. The variation pattern designation commands “h1” to “h58” generated in this way are transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

  Note that the special symbol variation pattern determination table may be a single table that is not distributed according to the number of reservations (starting memory number). In addition, when the first special symbol variation pattern determination table and the second special symbol variation pattern determination table are assembled together to determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the variation pattern of the second special symbol. For this, one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to. In addition, a plurality of special symbol variation pattern determination tables corresponding to each of the number of holdings 1 to 8 may be provided for a part of the gaming state or all of the gaming states, and the table referred to may be different for each holding number. . The variation pattern determined according to the hit type determination result is not limited to the type and number shown as an example in FIGS. The fluctuation time can also be appropriately changed according to the specification. In ST mode (3), according to the number of games, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (ST175 to 183 times the probability variation time short hold number 1 to 8) is used, and the second special symbol variation pattern determination A table (ST184 times probability change time short hold number 1 to 8) may be used, but one table may be used without sorting according to the number of games. The second special symbol variation pattern determination table (specific variation number of times of probability variation time retention number 1-8) is determined according to the type of winning symbol that determines the big hit game state before shifting to the probability variation time short gaming state This is a table that may be used when the second special symbol is variably displayed in the number of changes. The number of specific fluctuations is determined to be “170” when the type of winning symbol is “first special symbol jackpot (probability variation 1)”, and is determined to be “130” when “second special symbol jackpot (probability variation 1)”. In the case of “second special symbol jackpot (probability variation 2)”, it is determined as “140”, and in the case of “second special symbol jackpot (probability variation 3)”, it is determined as “150”. (Probability 4) "is determined to be" 160 ". The first special symbol variation pattern determination table (after small hits non-probability non-short-time retention number 1-8) and the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (after small hits non-probability non-short time retention numbers 1-8) are small It is a table used until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 1 to 5 in the non-probability change timeless game state after winning.

[Direction pattern determination table]
112 to 123 show an effect pattern determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. 112 to 116 show a first effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIGS. 117 to 123 show a second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The first effect pattern determination table corresponds to the case where there is no jewelry holding information (not stored) in the normal modes (1) to (3), and the jewelry holding information in the normal modes (1) to (3). Corresponding to the case where there is (stored), one corresponding to each of the first to fifth variable display times in each of the special modes (1) to (3), and ST mode (1) to (3) (3) are assigned to the corresponding ones. The second effect pattern determination table corresponds to the case where there is no jewelry hold information (not stored) in the normal modes (1) to (3), and the gem hold information in the normal modes (1) to (3). Corresponding to the case where there is (stored), one corresponding to each of the first to fifth rotations in the special modes (1) to (3), the ST mode (1), Corresponding to (2), (3) -1, and (3) -2, corresponding to the time when the high expectation performance is not executed in the specific variation number of the probability variation short gaming state, and identification of the probability variation short gaming state The number of times of change is assigned to the one corresponding to the time when the high expectation effect has been executed. Here, the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (3) -1) corresponds to the case where the number of times of change display of the special symbol is 175 to 183 times in the short game state at the time of probability change (ST mode). The second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (3) -2) corresponds to the case where the number of times of change display of the special symbol in the short game state (ST mode) during probability change is 184th. These effect pattern determination tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 116, the first effect pattern determination table is used for performing the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol 500, other image displays, etc. in conjunction with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. Is a table for determining the production pattern of the pattern, and defines a variation pattern designation command (h1 to h34), various variation patterns, a random number for production determination (0 to 99), and various production patterns. . As shown in FIGS. 117 to 123, the second effect pattern determination table performs a variable display and stop display of the decorative design 500, other image displays, etc. in conjunction with the change display and stop display of the second special symbol. Is a table for determining the production pattern of the fluctuation pattern designating commands (h1 to h12, h19 to h29, h31 to h58), various fluctuation patterns, random numbers for production determination (0 to 99), It defines the production pattern.

  For example, in the first effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 112 (normal mode (1) to (3) no jewel hold), when “reach loss variation pattern 5” is designated by the variation pattern designation command “h11”, When any of the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” is extracted, “long reach” is determined as the effect pattern, and any of effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” is extracted. In this case, “long reach pseudo-ream 2” is determined as the production pattern.

  In addition, in the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (2)) shown in FIG. 122, when “reach loss change pattern 10” is specified by the change pattern specifying command “h47”, the effect determination random number “0” is set. If any one of “19” is extracted, “fireworks door breakthrough reach door red” is determined as an effect pattern, and if any of random numbers “20” to “99” for effect determination is extracted As a production pattern, “Fireworks Door Breakthrough Reach Door Blue” is determined. In addition to this “fireworks door breakthrough reach door red”, the production pattern of “female door breakthrough reach door red” is also a so-called intense heat production pattern (“specific production pattern”) that has a relatively high expectation of jackpot. It corresponds to). Intense heat production patterns such as “Fireworks Door Breakthrough Reach Door Red” and “Women Door Breakthrough Reach Door Red” are defined in the second production pattern determination table (ST mode (2)), as shown in FIG. It is also defined in the second effect pattern determination table shown (the number of specific fluctuations is short when the probability change is short and the high expectation effect is not executed).

  In the production pattern including “reach”, except for “full-reach reach big hit”, basically, only one of the three decorative symbols 500 is aligned, and only one of them is variably displayed. After that, the three decorative symbols 500 are fixedly displayed as lost symbols, small hit symbols, or big hit symbols. “Pseudo train 2”, “pseudo train 3”, and “pseudo train 4” are effects of a pseudo train including a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol 500. For example, in the case of “Pseudo-ream 2”, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed twice and the temporary stop display is performed once during the period from the start of the special symbol to the final display. Finally, the final display is performed. In the case of “Pseudo-ream 3”, the decorative pattern 500 is displayed three times, the temporary stop display is performed twice, and the final display is finally performed. In the case of “pseudo-continuous 4”, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed four times, the temporary stop display is performed three times, and finally the final display is performed. In the production pattern including the “large continuous notice pseudo-ream”, the variation display and the confirmation display of the decorative symbol 500 are performed in conjunction with the variation display and the confirmation display of the special symbol. During the variation display, for example, “ice”, A predetermined image such as “lightning bolt” or “flame” is displayed a plurality of times. For example, in the production pattern of “large continuous notice pseudo-continuous 3 times”, any one of “ice”, “lightning”, and “flame” is displayed three times. Depending on the appearance pattern of such a predetermined image, the expected degree of jackpot can be made different. For example, when the same predetermined image appears all the time, it can be suggested that the big hit is fixed. In the special mode, it is possible to execute an effect with a story from the first to the fifth rotation of the variable display based on the effect pattern defined in advance in association with each of the special modes (1) to (3). . “Full rotation reach” means that the player is able to visually recognize the changing decorative symbols, changes in a state where the three symbols are aligned in the same pattern, and the same three symbols are aligned as they are Means something that is fixedly displayed. Further, the small hit symbol means a symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach-losing manner and then re-variable to be confirmed and displayed with a symbol of “135”, for example.

  As for the degree of expectation of the big hit, in the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (1)), for example, in the “single button reach large button”, the probability of being lost based on the “reach loss variation pattern 7” is 10/100. Thus, the probability of winning a big hit based on the “big hit fluctuation pattern 15” is 50/100, and therefore, when the expected degree of jackpot is calculated as a relative ratio thereof, it is about 83%. Similarly, regarding the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (2)), for example, in the case of “firework door breakthrough reach door red”, the probability of losing based on the “reach loss variation pattern 10” is 20/100. Since the probability of winning a big hit based on the “big hit fluctuation pattern 19” is 80/100, the expected degree of jackpot is calculated as 80% as a relative ratio thereof. In this way, although there is a possibility of losing, the production pattern in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is approximately 60% or more corresponds to the above-described intense production pattern (specific production pattern) and is also referred to as “high expectation production”. The For example, in “fireworks door breakthrough reach door blue”, the probability of losing is 80/100 based on “Leach Loss Fluctuation Pattern 10”, and the probability of winning big hit based on “Big Hit Fluctuation Pattern 19” is 20/100. Therefore, when the expected degree of jackpot is calculated as a relative proportion of these, it is 20%. For this reason, “Fireworks Door Breakthrough Reach Door Blue” does not fall under “High Expectation Production” (specific production pattern). If such a high-expectation effect is not executed at all until the specific number of changes, the second effect pattern determination table (when the specific change number is short and the high expectation effect is not executed) is used at the specific change number. . On the other hand, if the high expectation degree effect has been executed at least once before reaching the specific number of changes, the second effect pattern determination table (when the specific change number is short and the high expectation effect has been executed) is executed at the specific change number. Used. As a result, the high expectation effect is always executed by the specific number of fluctuations in the ST mode. Note that the degree of expectation for jackpot is calculated by dividing the number of effect determination random numbers at the time of jackpot by the total number of effect determination random numbers at the time of jackpot and loss.

  In addition, the number of effect patterns prescribed | regulated with respect to one fluctuation pattern is not restricted to the number shown as an example in FIGS. 112-123, It can change suitably according to a specification. In addition, when the first effect pattern determination table and the second effect pattern determination table are built together and the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern are determined, one effect pattern determination table is used. May be referred to.

[Hold information storage area]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining a holding information storage area related to the three-scale ball holding information of the work RAM 73, and FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining a jewelry holding information storage area of the work RAM 73. The hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 corresponds to the special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 in which the start memory is stored in the main control circuit 60, while the jewelry hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 is the sub-control circuit 70. Is provided independently.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the reserved information storage area of the work RAM 73 is configured by 8 bits, and the upper 3 bits (5th to 7th bits) and the lower 4 bits (0th to 3rd bits) indicate different attributes. Used as a thing. In this embodiment, the fourth bit is unused, but all bits can be used according to the specification. In the lower 4 bits, as the parameters included in the three-scale ball holding information, the types of special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol), “lost”, “small hit”, “big hit” types (probability 1) ~ 4) is stored. In the upper three bits, color information (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) indicating the display color of the three-scale ball is stored as a parameter included in the three-size ball holding information. The display color of the three shaku balls suggests the degree of expectation of big hits, and when arranged in descending order of the degree of expectation, the order is white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. Three-scale ball holding information is stored in the holding information storage areas 1 to 8 in order from the oldest to the newest. In the hold information storage areas 1 to 8 shown as an example in FIG. 124, hold information in which the display color is white and the first special symbol is lost is stored in the hold information storage area 1, and the display color is displayed in the hold information storage area 2. The hold information that the first special symbol is lost is stored in blue, and the hold information that the display color is yellow and the second special symbol is a big hit (probability variation 2) is stored in the hold information storage area 3, and the other hold Information storage areas 4 to 8 are not stored.

  When the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed using the hold information in the hold information storage area 1, the hold information in the hold information storage area 1 is transferred to the hold information storage area (not shown) and the hold information is displayed. The hold information in the storage areas 2 to 8 is shifted to the hold information storage areas 1 to 7. The new hold information is stored in order from the area with the smallest storage address in the unstored state among the hold information storage areas 1 to 8. As a result, the hold information in the hold information storage area is used as a resource for displaying the three-scale ball in the three-scale ball display area 600. In addition, when the hold information is stored in the hold information storage areas 1 to 4, these hold information is used to display the first 3 shaku balls on the first 3 shaku ball hold display area 610. Used as a resource. When the hold information is stored in the hold information storage areas 5 to 8 in addition to the hold information storage areas 1 to 4, that is, when five or more pieces of hold information are stored, four pieces counting from the latest The hold information is used as a resource for displaying the three shaku balls in the second three shaku ball hold display area 620, and the remaining hold information is displayed in the first three shaku ball hold display area 610. It is used as a resource for In short, the three-dimensional ball holding display mode by the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 and the second three-size ball holding display area 620 is switched between the case where the number of holding information is four or less and the case where the number is five or more. However, the storage address of the hold information serving as a resource is not rewritten according to the change of the hold display mode, and the hold information is efficiently read and written by the so-called FIFO method.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the jewel hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 is configured by 8 bits, and stores the jewel hold information as one block every 2 bits. As a result, a maximum of four pieces of gem hold information are stored in the gem hold information storage area. In each block of the jewel hold information storage area, color information (light blue, purple, gold) indicating the display color of the jewel is stored as the jewel hold information. The display color of gemstones suggests the degree of expectation of jackpots, and when arranged in descending order of the degree of expectation, the colors are light blue, purple, and gold. The jewel hold information is stored in blocks 1 to 4 of the jewel hold information storage area in order from the oldest to the newest. In blocks 1 to 4 of the holding information storage area shown as an example in FIG. 125, gem holding information whose display color is light blue is stored in block 1, and gem holding information whose display color is gold is stored in block 2, The block 3 stores gem holding information whose display color is purple, and the block 4 is not stored.

  When the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed by the pseudo ream using the jewel hold information in the jewel hold information storage area, the jewel hold information in the block 1 is transferred to the jewel hold information storage area (not shown). The jewel hold information of blocks 2-4 is shifted to blocks 1-3. New jewel hold information is stored in order from the block having the smallest storage address in the unstored state among the blocks 1 to 4. Thereby, the jewel hold information in the jewel hold information storage area is used as a resource for displaying the jewel in the jewel display area 700. The gem hold information of blocks 1 to 4 is used as a resource for displaying the first to fourth gems in the gem hold display area 710. Note that the display is similarly shifted in the demonstration display using the jewel hold information.

[Gem hold display pattern determination table]
FIG. 126 shows a jewelry hold display pattern determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The gem holding display pattern determination table is divided into a table corresponding to the case where the gem holding number is 1 to 3 and a table corresponding to the case where the gem holding number is four. These jewel hold display pattern determination tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the jewel hold display pattern determination table is a table for determining the display color of the jewel as the jewel hold display pattern, and the symbols and winning determination results included in the three-scale ball hold information; The display colors of jewels (light blue, purple, gold) and the random number for determining effects (65536) related to these display colors are defined. Note that the determination result is acquired from the tripod ball hold information in the hold information storage area 1 in which the storage order is the first. Further, when there is no three-scale ball holding information in the holding information storage area 1 (not stored), the determination result is regarded as the first / second special symbol loss.

  For example, in the gem hold display pattern determination table (gem hold number 1 to 3) shown in FIG. 126, when the number of pieces of gem hold information in the gem hold information storage area is 1 to 3 due to the ball entering the lost mouth 242. In addition, if the determination result included in the three shawl ball hold information in the hold information storage area 1 is “first / second special symbol loss”, the gem hold is based on the gem hold information according to the ball entering the lost mouth 242. The display color of the gemstone newly displayed in the display area 710 is determined to be light blue with a probability of 61440/65536, determined to purple with a probability of 4096/65536, and determined to gold with a probability of 0/65536. Further, in the gem hold display pattern determination table (gem hold number 4), when the number of pieces of gem hold information in the gem hold information storage area is four by entering the loser mouth 242, the hold information storage area 1 When the determination result included in the three-scale ball holding information is “second special symbol jackpot (probability 2 to 4)”, the gem holding display area 710 is newly added based on the jewelry holding information according to the ball entering the lost mouth 242. The display color of the jewel displayed on is determined to be light blue with a probability of 49152/65536, determined to purple with a probability of 14336/65536, and determined to gold with a probability of 2048/65536. Thereby, the pre-reading notice effect using the display color of the jewel is performed, and the player can increase the degree of expectation for the big hit according to the display color of the jewel.

  Note that the jewelry holding display pattern determination table may be a single table that is not distributed according to the number of jewelry holdings. The range of the effect determination random number related to the display color may be defined for each symbol and hit type as the determination result. The jewelry hold display pattern is not limited to the illustrated one, and can be set as appropriate according to the specification. For example, five or more pieces of gem hold information may be stored, and in that case, a gem hold display pattern determination table corresponding to the number of pieces of five or more pieces of gem hold may be selectable. Further, in the present embodiment, the jewelry holding display pattern is determined based only on the determination result of the holding information storage area 1, but any of the holding information storage areas in which the holding information is stored is selected by lottery. It may be determined whether or not, and the jewelry hold display pattern may be determined based on the determination result shown in the determined hold information storage area. Moreover, you may make it determine a jewelry holding | maintenance display pattern based on the determination result shown in the holding information storage area where the last number of the jewelry holding information storage area becomes the same.

[Pending information display pattern provisional decision table]
FIG. 127 shows a hold information display pattern provisional determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The temporary information display pattern temporary determination table is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the hold information display pattern provisional determination table is a table for temporarily determining the display color of the three shaku balls as the hold information display pattern related to the three shaku balls, and is included in the three shaku ball holding information. The display colors of the three shaku balls (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) and the random number for effect determination (65536) related to these display colors are defined. .

  For example, in the on-hold information display pattern provisional determination table shown in FIG. 127, when a game ball winning (passing) is detected at the first start port 211 or the second start port 241, a three-scale ball generated accordingly. If the determination result is acquired from the hold information and the determination result is “first / second special symbol loss”, the determination result is displayed in the first three-scale ball hold display area 610 corresponding to the three-size ball hold information. The display color of the three shaku balls is provisionally determined to be white with a probability of 61440/65536, is provisionally determined to be blue with a probability of 2048/65536, is provisionally determined to be yellow with a probability of 1664/65536, and has a probability of 256/65536. Temporarily determined to be green, temporarily determined to red with a probability of 128/65536, and temporarily determined to be a rainbow with a probability of 0/65536. In addition, in the table for temporary determination of the hold information display pattern, if the determination result included in the three-scale ball hold information is “second special symbol jackpot (probability 2-4)”, the three-size ball hold information The display color of the three-scale ball displayed in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 is provisionally determined to be white with a probability of 4096/65536, is provisionally determined to be blue with a probability of 14336/65536, and the probability of 14336/65536 Is temporarily determined to be yellow with a probability of 14336/65536, temporarily determined to be red with a probability of 14336/65536, and temporarily determined to be a rainbow with a probability of 4096/65536. Thereby, the pre-reading notice effect using the display color of the three shaku balls is performed, and the player can increase the degree of expectation for the big hit according to the display color of the three shaku balls.

  In the present embodiment, the hold information display pattern provisional determination table is used at the time of hold information number change pre-reading notice, which will be described later, and the hold information display pattern determined using this table is immediately reflected as the display color of the three scale balls. It is not something. That is, when the hold information display pattern is provisionally determined using the hold information display pattern temporary determination table, the corresponding three shaku balls are changed from the first three shaku ball hold display area 610 to the second three shaku ball hold display area. While not displayed as a display color according to the hold information display pattern before shifting to 620, when shifting to the second three-scale ball holding display area 620 and then shifting to the first three-size ball holding display area 610 again Will be displayed as a display color corresponding to the hold information display pattern. In the present embodiment, when the corresponding three-scale ball is displayed in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 in the normal mode other than the ST mode, or the corresponding three-scale ball is the second regardless of the production mode. When displayed in the three-scale ball hold display area 620, the hold information display pattern is not immediately reflected as the display color, but as long as the three-scale balls that are subject to the pre-reading notice are displayed regardless of the production mode and display area. In addition, the display color may be displayed immediately according to the hold information display pattern. Further, the hold information display pattern relating to the three shaku balls may be determined by the main CPU of the main control circuit.

[Pre-reading notice execution judgment table]
FIG. 128 shows a prefetch notice execution determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The pre-reading notice execution determination table corresponds to the case where the number of hold information related to the three shawls is 2, the case corresponding to 3-4, and the case corresponding to 5-8 It is distributed to what to do. The pre-reading notice execution determination table is stored in the program ROM 72, and is used in the normal mode in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the look-ahead notice execution determination table is a table for determining whether or not various kinds of look-ahead notice effects are performed in the normal mode. The result, a random number lottery result (non-winning / winning) for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect, and an effect determining random number (65536) related to non-winning / winning are defined. In addition, a determination result is acquired from the newest three-scale ball holding information memorize | stored most recently.

  For example, in the prefetch notice execution determination table shown in FIG. 128 (the number of hold information is 2), the determination result is acquired from the three-scale ball hold information, and the determination result is “first special symbol jackpot (probability change 1)”. The pre-reading notice effect is determined as non-winning (execution disapproval) with a probability of 45876/65536, and determined as winning (execution permission) with a probability of 19660/65536. In addition, in the pre-reading notice execution determination table (3-4 pieces of hold information), a determination result is acquired from the three-scale ball hold information, and the determination result is “first special symbol jackpot (probability change 1)”. The pre-reading notice effect is determined as non-winning (execution disapproval) with a probability of 42599/65536 and determined as win (execution permission) with a probability of 22937/65536. Furthermore, in the pre-reading notice execution determination table (number of hold information 5 to 8), the determination result is acquired from the three-scale ball hold information, and the determination result is “first special symbol jackpot (probability change 1)”. The pre-reading notice effect is determined as non-winning (execution disapproval) with a probability of 39322/65536 and determined as win (execution permission) with a probability of 26214/65536. As a result, as the hold information relating to the three shaku balls increases, “fireworker prefetching advance notice (winning hold information target)”, “fireworks prefetching advance notice (existing hold information target)”, “holding information display” shown in FIG. The possibility of being executed with respect to any of the “pre-reading notice of bonuses” and “pre-fetching notice of change in the number of reserved information” increases, and the player can increase the expectation for the big hit as well as the expectation for the prefetch notice effect.

  Note that the pre-reading notice execution determination table may be provided for each number of three-scale ball holding information. In this embodiment, there is a possibility that the pre-reading notice effect may be executed when the number of three-length ball holding information is two or more in the normal mode. For example, the number of three-length ball holding information is one. Even if it is above, there is a possibility that it can be executed, or if it is four or more, it may be executed. Further, for example, when the number of the three-scale ball holding information is 6, the prefetching notice effect may not be executed when the specific number is reached, for example, the prefetching notice effect is not executed. The prefetch notice execution determination table may be referred to in the special mode or the ST mode. Further, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed for a lost symbol or a specific winning symbol (for example, a small winning symbol).

[Prefetching notice type determination table]
FIG. 129 shows a prefetch notice type determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The pre-reading notice type determination table corresponds to the case where the number of hold information related to the three-scale ball is two, the case corresponding to the case of 3 to 4, and the case of 5 to 8 It is distributed to what to do. The prefetch notice type determination table is stored in the program ROM 72, and is used in the normal mode in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the prefetching notice type determination table is a table for determining the type of prefetching notice effect in the normal mode, and the symbols and winning judgment results included in the three-scale ball holding information, and the prefetching notice. Type of production ("fireworks pre-reading advance notice (targeted hold information)", "fireworks pre-reading notice (existing hold information target)", "hold information display character pre-reading notice", "hold information number change pre-reading notice") For each of these types, a random number for effect determination (65536) is defined. Here, “fireworks pre-reading notice (winning hold information target)” means an effect of changing the display color of the hold information according to the final display number of fireworks that will be described later according to the hold information at the time of winning. “Pyrotechnician pre-reading notice (existing hold information target)” means an effect of changing the display color of the hold information according to the final display number of pyrotechnicians described later using the existing hold information that has already been stored. The “holding information display character pre-reading notice” is an effect using the movable effect member 42A as a character and is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the first three-size ball holding display area 610 as a target of the pre-reading notice. This means an effect of causing the movable effect member 42A to appear so as to overlap the three shackle balls and changing the emission color of the movable effect member 42A together with the display color of the three shawl balls. The “hold information count change pre-reading notice” indicates that after the three-scale ball has shifted from the first three-scale ball reservation display area 610 to the second three-size ball reservation display area 620, the first three-size ball reservation display area 610 is displayed again. Means an effect that will appear in a predetermined display color. The specific contents of these prefetch notice effects will be described later.

  For example, in the prefetching notice type determination table shown in FIG. 129 (the number of holding information is 2), the determination result is acquired from the three-scale ball holding information, and the determination result is “first special symbol jackpot (probability variation 1)”. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is to be executed, the type of the pre-reading notice effect is determined with a probability of 32768/65536, and “fireworks pre-reading notice (targeted prize-holding information target)” is determined, and the probability of 0/65536 “Fireworks master pre-reading notice (existing hold information target)” is determined, “hold information display character pre-reading notice” is determined with a probability of 40000/65536, and “hold information change pre-reading notice” with a probability of 0/65536 Is determined. Further, in the prefetching notice type determination table (holding information number 3 to 4), the determination result is acquired from the three-scale ball holding information, and the determination result is “first special symbol jackpot (probability change 1)” and prefetching. If it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed, the type of the look-ahead notice effect is determined as “fireworks pre-read notice (subject to winning hold information)” with a probability of 25536/65536, and with the probability of 20000/65536, “ "Fireworks pre-reading notice (existing pending information target)" is decided, "holding information display character pre-fetching notice" is decided with a probability of 20000/65536, and "holding information number change prefetching notice" is decided with a probability of 0/65536 Is done. Further, in the prefetching notice type determination table (the number of holding information 5 to 8), the determination result is acquired from the three-scale ball holding information, and the determination result is “first special symbol jackpot (probability change 1)” When it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed, the type of the prefetch notice effect is determined as “fireworks prefetch notice (target for prize-holding information)” with a probability of 20480/65536, and with the probability of 20480/65536, “ "Fireworks pre-reading notice (existing hold information target)" is determined, "hold information display character pre-reading notice" is determined with a probability of 0/65536, and "hold information change pre-reading notice" is determined with a probability of 24576/65536 Is done. Thereby, the player can raise the expectation degree for a big hit also by the kind of prefetch notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, there are types of pre-reading notice effects that are not selected depending on the number of reserved information (number of three-size ball holding information). It may be determined. Further, only a specific type of pre-reading notice effect may be determined according to the number of hold information. Furthermore, in the prefetching notice type determination table of the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the winning rates for each type of prefetching notice effect differ depending on the determination result, but the winning rates for each type may be the same.

[Holding information determination table for prefetch notice]
FIG. 130 shows a prefetch notice target hold information determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The pre-reading notice target hold information determination table is a table that is used when fireworks pre-reading notice (existing hold information target) is selected as the prefetch notice effect, and only the hold information of the lost is stored as the three-scale ball hold information. Are classified into those corresponding to the case where the hold information is stored and those corresponding to the case where the winning hold information is stored. The pre-read notice target hold information determination table is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the pre-reading notice target hold information determination table is a table for determining the three-scale ball holding information that is the target of the fireworker pre-reading notice (existing hold information target) in the normal mode. At the time when the shakudama holding information is stored, the number of holdings (1 to 7) related to the other existing 3dama ball holding information and the ranking (1 to 7) of the 3dama ball holding information determined as the target of the pre-reading notice ) And a random number for determining the effect (65536) for each of these ranks. The order of the three shakudama ball holding information is assigned to 1, 2, 3,... From the oldest to the newest.

  For example, in the pre-reading notice hold information determination table (stored only when the hold is lost), when the existing number of holds is 3, the three-dimensional ball hold information of rank “1” with the probability of 21845/65536 is the target of the prefetch notice. The three-scale ball holding information of rank “2” is determined as a target of the pre-reading notice with a probability of 21845/65536, and the three-scale ball holding information of rank “3” is set as the target of the pre-reading notice with a probability of 21845/65536. It is determined. In addition, in the pre-reading notice target hold information determination table (stores the hit hold), the target of the pre-read notice is determined based on the hold information indicating the win as the determination result. For example, when the number of hold holds is 1, If the information rank is third, the rank of the prefetch notice is determined with reference to the row corresponding to the per-hold number “1”. Further, when the number of per-holding is two and the ranking of the holding information is the third and fourth, the order of the pre-reading notice is determined with reference to the row corresponding to the per-holding number “2”. In such a pre-read notice target hold information determination table (stored per hold), the target hold is determined by applying the random number range indicated in the column from the lower number column of “target hold” according to the number of hits per hold. Is done. For example, if there is 3rd, 4th, 6th hold information indicating the big win, and the number of held holds is 3, the random number range of “Target Hold 1” is assigned to the third, and “Target Hold 2” By assigning the random number range to the fourth and assigning the random number range of “target hold 3” to the sixth, the order in which the hold information is to be set as the target hold is drawn. Thereby, when the fireworks pre-reading notice (existing pending information target) is determined, there is a possibility that the existing three-scale ball holding information is used as the target of the pre-reading notice.

[Holding information display character final display color pattern determination table]
FIG. 131 shows a table for determining a hold information display combination final display color pattern which is referred to by the sub CPU 71. The hold information display combination final display color pattern determination table is used when the hold information display combination pre-reading notice is selected as the pre-reading notice effect, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the hold information display combination final display color pattern determination table shows the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A when the movable effect member 42A appears so as to overlap the three-scale ball display area 600. Is a table for determining the light emission color (also referred to as “display color”) by the symbol, the symbol included in the three-scale ball holding information subject to the pre-reading notice and the determination result of the hit, and the final display color pattern of the light emitting lens 42B (White, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) and random numbers for effect determination (65536) are defined for each final display color pattern. Note that when the movable effect member 42A appears, it is difficult to visually recognize the three balls in the back, but the three balls in this case are also displayed as the same display color as the light emitting lens 42B. At this time, since the light emitting lens 42B can visually recognize the back, the display color of the three-scale ball displayed on the back can be visually recognized through the light emitting lens 42B by not causing the light emitting lens 42B to emit light. Also good.

  For example, in the table for final display color pattern determination of the hold information display accessory, when the determination result is the first special symbol loss, the final display color pattern of the light emitting lens 42B overlapping the three-scale ball display area 600 is 26624/65536. The probability is determined to be “white”, the probability of 16384/65536 is determined to be “blue”, the probability of 16384/65536 is determined to be “yellow”, the probability of 4096/65536 is determined to be “green”, and 2048 / It is determined to be “red” with a probability of 65536 and “rainbow” with a probability of 0/65536. Thus, when the hold information display combination reading notice is determined, the movable effect member 42A appears so as to overlap the three-scale ball display area 600, and the light emitting lens 42B is displayed in a color corresponding to the final display color pattern. Emits light. Thereafter, when the movable effect member 42A is in the retracted state, the display color (the same color as the emission color) of the three-scale balls corresponding to the final display color pattern is visually recognized. With the behavior of the movable effect member 42A, the expectation of big hit is increased from the color emitted by the light emitting lens 42B and the display color of the three-scale ball displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600. Further, since the light emission color of the light emitting lens 42B and the display color of the three-scale ball are always the same color, even if the movable effect member 42A does not appear due to a failure or the like, the pre-reading notice is performed only with the display color of the three-scale ball. Can do.

  It should be noted that the final display color pattern determined using the hold information display accessory final display color pattern determination table is the display color of the three-scale balls that can be finally displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 or the light emitting lens 42B. The display color in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 is determined using a holding display change pattern determination table to be described later. When the light-emitting lens 42B overlaps the three-lens ball display area 600, light is emitted in the same color as the display color of the three-lens ball that can be finally displayed based on the final display color pattern. The light emitting color may be different from the display color of the three-lens balls, or the movable effect member 42A may appear so that the three-lens balls can be simply seen through without causing the light-emitting lens to emit light. Further, the final display color pattern that is finally displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 may be determined using the table for determining the final display color pattern for the holding information display combination.

[Pending display change pattern determination table]
132 to 134 show hold display change pattern determination tables that are referred to by the sub CPU 71. The holding display change pattern determination table corresponds to the case where the three-scale balls subject to pre-reading notice are displayed in the second to fourth pieces of the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 (see FIG. 132), This corresponds to the case where the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 is displayed as the first three-dimensional ball subject to the pre-reading notice (see FIG. 133), and the third is pre-read in the three-scale ball display area 600 as the zeroth. They are divided into those corresponding to the case where the three-scale balls to be notified are displayed (see FIG. 134). These hold display change pattern determination tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  The hold display change pattern determination table is based on the final display color pattern determined using the hold information display accessory final display color pattern determination table, and the first three-scale ball display area 610 and the three-scale ball display area. 6 is a table for determining a three-dimensional ball displayed as an object of a pre-reading notice in 600 and an on-hold display change pattern of the emission color of the light-emitting lens 42B when overlapping with the three-scale ball. The hold display change pattern determination table includes the determined final display color pattern and the current color pattern (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) indicating the current display color of the three-scale ball or the light emitting lens 42B. And a display color change pattern (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) indicating the display color that changes next from the present time, and a random number for determining the effect (65536) for each of these display color change patterns doing. It should be noted that the pre-reading target three-scale ball that overlaps the light-emitting lens 42B in the first three-size ball holding display area 610 is also displayed as the same display color as the light-emitting lens 42B.

  For example, in the hold display change pattern determination table (2nd to 4th) in FIG. 132, the final display color pattern is “yellow”, and the position is set to the 4th in the first 3 scale ball hold display area 610. When the display color (current color pattern) before the change in the three-scale ball and the light-emitting lens 42B is “white”, the emission color (display color change pattern) of the three-size ball and the light-emitting lens 42B after the change at the position is , 40960/65536 with a probability of “white”, 16384/65536 with a probability of “blue” and 8192/65536 with a probability of “yellow”. Further, in the hold display change pattern determination table (first) in FIG. 133, the final display color pattern is “yellow” and the first three-scale ball hold display area 610 is located at the first. When the display color (current color pattern) before the change in the shackle and the light emitting lens 42B is “blue”, the light emission color (display color change pattern) of the three shawl and the light emitting lens 42B after the change at the position is 49152. It is determined to be “blue” with a probability of / 65536 and “yellow” with a probability of 16384/65536. Further, in the hold display change pattern determination table (0th) in FIG. 134, when the final display color pattern is “yellow”, the three-scale balls and the light emitting lens 42B located in the three-scale ball display area 600 are displayed. When the display color (current color pattern) before the change in “yellow” is “yellow”, the emission color (display color change pattern) of the three-scale ball and the light-emitting lens 42B after the change at that position is “65536/65536”. “Yellow”. Thereby, the display color of the three-scale balls and the light-emitting lens 42B changes each time the movable effect member 42A (the light-emitting lens 42B) moves from the first three-size ball holding display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600. Therefore, the expectation level for jackpots can be raised from the expectation of what display color will eventually change. In this embodiment, the display color is maintained in the case of the same color before and after the change. However, the display color may be maintained by changing the display color once and then returning to the original color.

  The hold display change pattern determination table determines a display color change pattern when hold information to be prefetched is stored in the hold information storage areas 1 to 4 of the work RAM 73 or the hold information storage area. It can also be said that it is used for. Further, in the present embodiment, as a premise of the display color change pattern, the display color when the three scale balls and the light emitting lens 42B are first displayed is defined to be “white”. Thereby, for example, even if the three-scale balls and the light-emitting lens 42B are first displayed at any of the first to fourth display positions in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, the first display color is “white”. In this position, the color is first changed from “white” to another color or maintained. Thereafter, the display color is changed or maintained each time the display position moves. In order to ensure that the final display color pattern is obtained, the determination process may be repeatedly performed until the final display color pattern is obtained, and the display color may be changed a plurality of times in the three-scale ball holding area. For example, when the final display color pattern is “red” and the current display color pattern is “blue”, the display color change pattern determination process is performed using the hold display change pattern determination table, and the display color change When it is determined that the pattern is to be changed to “yellow”, the display color change pattern determination process is performed using the hold display change pattern determination table again while temporarily setting the current display color pattern to “yellow”. . In addition, when it is determined that the display color change pattern changes to “green”, the display color change pattern determination process is performed using the pending display change pattern determination table again with the current display color pattern set to “green”. The determination process can be performed until it is finally determined that the display color change pattern changes to “red”. In this case, in the three-scale ball display area, for example, the display colors of the three-scale ball and the light emitting lens 42B change three times in the order of “blue” → “yellow” → “green” → “red”. The display color change pattern is not limited to the illustrated one, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications.

[Holding information display character movable pattern determination table]
FIG. 135 shows a table for determining the hold information display combination movable pattern that is referred to by the sub CPU 71. The hold information display combination movable pattern determination table corresponds to the case where the pre-reading notice three-scale balls are displayed in the first to fourth balls of the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, and the zero-th table. The three-scale ball display area 600 is sorted into the one corresponding to the case where the three-scale ball subject to the pre-reading notice is displayed. These hold information display combination movable pattern determination tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the table for holding information display accessory movable pattern determination changes the display colors of the three balls and the light emitting lens 42B in the first three balls holding display area 610 or the three balls displaying area 600. In this case, it is a table for determining a movable pattern to be operated after arranging the movable effect member 42A so as to overlap with the three-scale balls, and the determined display color change pattern (no change, one step change, 2 Change in stages), a movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A (no movement, up-and-down swing, left-right swing, and blade appearance), and a random number for determining the effect (65536) for each of these movable patterns. . “No change” in the display color change pattern means that the display color determined as the display color change pattern is the same color as the display color of the current color pattern. The “one step change” of the display color change pattern means that the display color determined as the display color change pattern is one color higher than the display color (eg “white”) of the current color pattern (eg “blue”). It means to change. The “change in two or more steps” of the display color change pattern means that the display color determined as the display color change pattern is two or more colors higher than the display color (eg, “white”) of the current color pattern (eg, “yellow”). , “Green”, “red”, “rainbow”). In addition, “no movement” of the movable pattern means that the movable effect member 42A does not appear or does not particularly swing even if it appears, and “vertical swing” means that the movable effect member 42A moves in the vertical direction. “Moving left and right” means that the movable effect member 42A is finely moved in the left and right direction, and “appearance of the blade” means that the blades of the movable effect member 42A appear radially. To do.

  For example, in the hold information display combination movable pattern determination table (1st to 4th), the display color change patterns corresponding to the first three balls and the light emitting lens 42B of the first three balls holding display area 610 are displayed. In the case of “change of two or more steps”, the movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A that can appear so as to overlap with the three balls is determined as “no movable” with a probability of 0/65536, and is 32768/65536. “Vertical swing” is determined by the probability, and “horizontal swing” is determined by the probability of 32768/65536. Further, in the table for determining the hold information display accessory movable pattern (0th), the display color change pattern corresponding to the three-scale balls and the light emitting lens 42B of the three-scale ball display area 600 corresponds to “change in two or more stages”. In this case, as the movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A that can appear so as to overlap with the three shank balls, “no movement” is determined with a probability of 0/65536, and “vertical swing” is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. It is determined and “blade appearance” is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. In the present embodiment, when the movable effect member 42A is operated based on the movable pattern, only the display color change of the three-scale ball is changed by changing the display color of the three-dimensional ball and the emission color of the light emitting lens 42B. In addition, the degree of expectation of the big hit can be increased by the operation of the movable effect member 42A and the light emission color of the light emitting lens 42B.

  Note that the hold information display combination movable pattern determination table may be a single table. The movable pattern and the display color change pattern are not limited to those shown in the drawings, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications.

[Fireworks master final display number determination table]
FIG. 136 shows a pyrotechnician final display number determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The pyrotechnician final display number determination table is a table used when fireworks prefetching notice is selected as a prefetching notice effect, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the fireworker final display number determination table is a table for determining the final remaining number of fireworks as the execution subject in the above-described promotion of holding promotion, and is subject to the pre-reading notice. The design and winning judgment results included in the three-scale ball holding information, the final number of fireworks (0-4), and a random number for determining the production (65536) for each final number of fireworks . The final number of fireworkers may be referred to as the final display number.

  For example, in the pyrotechnician final display number determination table, when the determination result included in the three-scale ball holding information subject to the pre-reading notice is “second special symbol jackpot (probability 1)”, the final number of pyrotechnicians is 0 / It is determined to be “0” with a probability of 65536, “1” with a probability of 8192/65536, “2” with a probability of 8192/65536, and “3” with a probability of 16384/65536, It is determined to be “4” with a probability of 32768/65536. On the basis of the final number of pyrotechnicians determined in this way, the number of reserved promotions basically corresponds to the final number of persons. Specifically, in the reserved promotion, an effect is produced in which the display color is changed by igniting the three-scale balls displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 one by one from the final number of fireworkers. However, even with the pending promotion, the display color of the three-scale ball does not necessarily change to a higher color with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot. In addition, in the hold promotion, there may be an effect in which all the final number of pyrotechnicians ignite the three-scale balls in the three-scale ball display area 600 to change the display color. The final number of fireworkers may not be determined to be “0”.

  It should be noted that the pyrotechnician final display number determination table shows that the determination result of the “second special symbol jackpot (probability change 1)” that is most advantageous to the player is relatively higher than the other determination results. It is preferable to define that the final number is determined to be large.

[Table for determining the number of fireworks initial display]
FIG. 137 shows a pyrotechnician initial display number determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The fireworker initial display number determination table is a table for determining the first number of fireworkers in advance of the fireworker pre-reading notice, and is distributed to each determined final number of fireworks (1 to 4) and stored in the program ROM 72. It is remembered.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the pyrotechnician initial display number determination table includes the symbols and winning judgment results included in the three-scale ball holding information to be prefetched, and the pyrotechnic initial number (1-4). A random number for determining the effect (65536) is defined for each of the initial number of pyrotechnicians.

  For example, in the pyrotechnician initial display number determination table (final number 1), when the determination result included in the three-scale ball holding information subject to the pre-reading notice is “second special symbol jackpot (probability 1)”, the pyrotechnician initial The number of people is determined to be “1” with a probability of 8192/65536, “2” with a probability of 8192/65536, “3” with a probability of 16384/65536, and “4” with a probability of 32768/65536. Determined. The number of pyrotechnicians is changed at a predetermined timing from the initial number of pyrotechnicians determined in this way to the final number of pyrotechnicians. That is, when the three-scale ball subject to the pre-reading notice is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, the pyrotechnician is displayed with the final number of pyrotechnicians reduced or maintained from the initial number of pyrotechnicians, and finally displayed. The higher the remaining number of fireworks, the higher the expectation of jackpot.

[Table for determining fireworks color scheme]
FIG. 138 shows a pyrotechnic color scheme determining table that is referred to by the sub CPU 71. The pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern determination table is a table for determining the color arrangement of all the pyrotechnicians displayed from the initial number of people to the final number of people, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the pyrotechnics coloration pattern determination table determines the symbols and winning judgment results included in the three-scale ball holding information to be prefetched, and the final number of fireworkers (1 to 4). The fireworker color schemes (white, red, rainbow) and the random number for determining the production (65536) are defined for each pyrotechnic color scheme. The pyrotechnic color scheme suggests the degree of expectation of jackpots. If the order is generally from low to high, the order is white, red, and rainbow. In addition, as the final number of fireworkers increases, it is easier to select “red” or “rainbow” as the fireworker color scheme.

  For example, in the pyrotechnic color scheme determining table, the determination result included in the pre-reading notice three-scale ball holding information is “second special symbol jackpot (probability 1)”, and the final number of pyrotechnicians is “4”. , The pyrotechnic color scheme is determined to be “white” with a probability of 32768/65536, “red” with a probability of 16384/65536, and “rainbow” with a probability of 16384/65536 . The pyrotechnic color scheme is displayed according to the pyrotechnic color scheme determined in this manner. As a result, when the displayed fireworker's color scheme is “red” rather than “white” and “rainbow” rather than “red”, the degree of expectation of the big hit is increased.

  Note that the number of colors of the pyrotechnic color scheme can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications. Further, the color scheme when the fireworker is initially displayed may be determined separately from the color scheme finally displayed. In addition, a color scheme other than “white” is selected only for the fireworkers corresponding to the final number of fireworkers, or for the fireworks corresponding to the final number of fireworkers, “red” or “rainbow” The probability that the color scheme “” is selected may be made relatively high.

[Table for determining fireworks reduction pattern]
FIG. 139 shows a pyrotechnician reduction pattern determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The fireworker reduction pattern determination table is a table for determining the reduction pattern of fireworks from the initial number of fireworks to the final number of fireworks. Corresponding to the case stored in the hold information storage areas 5 to 8 of the RAM 73, corresponding to the case stored in the hold information storage areas 2 to 4, and corresponding to the case stored in the hold information storage area 1 And is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the pyrotechnician decrease pattern determination table includes the final number of fireworks (0-4) and the current number of people (1-4) determined from the above-mentioned final table for determining the number of fireworks displayers. The determined number of fireworkers to be reduced (-4 to 0) and the random number for production determination (65536) for each number of reductions in pyrotechnicians. Here, the “current number of people” means the number of fireworkers before being reduced when determining the number of reductions.

  For example, in the pyrotechnics reduction pattern determination table (target hold 5 to 8), when the hold information to be prefetched is stored in the hold information storage area 6, the final number is “3”. When the current number of people is “4”, the number of fireworker decrease is determined to be “0” with a probability of 60000/65536 and is determined to be “−1” with a probability of 5536/65536. At this time, when “−1” is determined as the number of fireworkers to be reduced, the final number of fireworks is “3” when the hold information to be prefetched is stored in the hold information storage area 5. ”And the current number of people becomes“ 3 ”, so“ 0 ”is determined with a probability of 65536/65536. In this way, the number of reductions in pyrotechnicians is sequentially determined each time the storage address of the hold information is shifted until the current number matches the final number. There is a possibility that the number of fireworkers may be reduced every time the three shank balls subject to the pre-reading notice are moved and displayed in accordance with the number of fireworker reductions determined in this way.

  Note that the method of allocating the pyrotechnic reduction pattern determination table can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications. For example, a table may be provided for each number of reserved information that is subject to a prefetch notice, or a table having the same contents may be used without dividing each number of reserved information.

[Table for determining pyrotechnic decrease gaze pattern]
FIG. 140 shows a table for determining a fireworker reduction gash pattern that is referred to by the sub CPU 71. The pyrotechnician reduction gaze pattern determination table is a table for determining a gasse pattern related to an effect of making it appear to return as if the number of pyrotechnicians is decreasing, and is stored in the program ROM 72. Such a pyrotechnician reduction gase pattern determination table is referred to only when the number of reductions in pyrotechnicians is determined to be “0” based on the pyrotechnician reduction pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the pyrotechnician reduction gasse pattern determination table includes the symbols and winning judgment results included in the three-scale ball holding information subject to the pre-reading notice, the winning and non-winning of the gasse pattern, and these A random number for production determination (65536) is defined for each winning and non-winning.

  For example, in the pyrotechnician reduction gasset pattern determination table, when the symbol and hit determination result included in the three-scale ball holding information subject to the pre-reading notice is “second special symbol big hit (probability variation 1)”, fireworks The gaze pattern that makes it appear as if the teacher is decreasing is determined as a winning with a probability of 32768/65536. According to such a gaze pattern, it is possible to produce an effect that looks like an increase in the number of pyrotechnicians.

  In the present embodiment, an effect is made such that only one fireworker is reduced by the gas pattern, and then an effect is made to return, but an effect is made to return after reducing a plurality of people at once. May be.

[Promotion timing number determination table]
FIG. 141 shows the promotion timing number determination table. The promotion timing number determination table is a table for determining the promotion timing number of the pending promotion (hereinafter also referred to as “fireworker promotion”) using the final display number of fireworks teachers, and is stored in the program ROM 72. .

  As shown in FIG. 141, in the promotion timing number determination table, in the case of the production pattern including “normal fluctuation”, “normal reach” without pseudo-continuous, and “large continuous notice”, the number of promotion timings is 2 each. If the production pattern includes “pseudo train 2”, “pseudo train 3”, and “pseudo train 4”, the number of promotion timings is incremented by +1, +2, and +3, respectively. It is stipulated in. Based on the number of such promotion timings, the timing at which the pending promotion is specifically executed is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 as described above. In other words, the number of promotion timings is only the number of times that a pending promotion effect is likely to be executed (1 to 7 times in the present embodiment), and the number of promotion timings is determined as the number of promotion timings. Is not executed. By the way, the number of executions of hold promotion is 1 to 4 times corresponding to the final number of fireworks teachers, or once when all of the final numbers perform hold promotion simultaneously. The number of promotion timings may be uniquely determined according to the production pattern without using a table.

[Promotion execution decision table]
FIG. 142 shows a promotion execution propriety determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The promotion execution feasibility determination table is a table for determining whether or not execution of the pyrotechnic promotion (holding promotion) can be performed according to the final display number of fireworks masters, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 142, in the promotion execution determination table, when the final display number of the pyrotechnicians is “4”, for example, it is determined with a probability of 32768/65536 that the performance of the promotion of fireworks is executable. The fact that execution is impossible is determined with a probability of 32768/65536. Such a table for determining whether or not promotion is possible is used when the number of promotion timings described above is greater than the final display number of fireworks. For example, when the final display number is “4” and the number of promotion timings is “7”, the promotion execution determination table is used until winning (executable) for 4 times out of 7 promotion timings is obtained.

  That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a determination process as to whether or not to execute the effect of promotion of fireworks from the first promotion timing based on the promotion execution availability determination table. At this time, for example, when each of the first to fourth promotion timings is won (executable) for the effect of promotion of fireworks, the remaining five to seventh promotion timings are used for determining whether or not promotion can be executed. The promotion of fireworks promotion is impossible without using a table. On the other hand, for example, when the first and second promotion timings are won (executable) for the promotion of fireworks promotion, and the third to fifth times are not selected (executable), the other promotion timings are 6 For the first and seventh times, the fireworks promotion promotion effect is forcibly executed without using the promotion execution determination table.

  The promotion execution availability determination table is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and can be set as appropriate according to the specification.For example, regardless of the final display number, the winning probability regarding whether or not the fireworks promotion promotion can be performed is uniquely determined. It may be specified. Further, it may be defined that the winning probability increases as the final display number decreases.

[Promotion pattern determination table]
FIG. 143 and FIG. 144 show promotion pattern determination tables referred to by the sub CPU 71. The promotion pattern determination table is a table for determining the hold display pattern that is the content of the effect of the hold promotion. When roughly classified, the table corresponding to the pseudo continuous time shown in FIG. 143 and the non-pseudo continuous time shown in FIG. They are assigned to the corresponding ones and stored in the program ROM 72. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, the promotion pattern determination table corresponds to “Lost pseudo continuous time”, “Short hit pseudo continuous time”, and “Big hit pseudo continuous time” The one corresponding to “Lose / Small Hit / Big Hit / Irregular Time” is provided, as shown in FIG. Those corresponding to "hour", those corresponding to "big hit non-pseudo continuous time", and those corresponding to "lack, small hit, big hit non-pseudo continuous time" are provided. “Irregular time” means when the number of fireworkers finally displayed is greater than the number of promotion timings.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the promotion pattern determination table shows the current display color of the three-scale ball (white, blue, yellow, green, red) recognized in the determination process, and the pyrotechnician at that time. Remaining number (1-4) and the display color of the three-scale ball that can be determined as the hold display pattern (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow, white (NEXT), blue (NEXT), yellow (NEXT) , Green (NEXT), red (NEXT)), and a random number for effect determination (65536) for each of these reserved display patterns. Note that “NEXT” means that a character image “NEXT” is displayed as a special pseudo-continuous pattern together with a part of the decorative pattern 500 or the three-scale ball in the three-scale ball display area 600 during the pseudo-continuous execution. This means that the character image disappears when the re-variable display is made later, and the display color of the three-scale ball becomes the corresponding color. Yes. In the case of “NEXT”, the original color may be restored.

  For example, the promotion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 143 (big hit quasi-recurring) displays the three-dimensional balls in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 when the decorative symbol 500 that is the big hit symbol is variably displayed as a pseudo-ream. Used to determine a hold display pattern for changing the color by hold promotion. Further, for example, the promotion pattern determination table (big hit non-pseudo continuous time) shown in FIG. 144 is displayed when the decorative symbol 500 that is a big hit symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when it corresponds to a predetermined promotion timing. It is used to determine a holding display pattern for changing the display color of the three shaku balls in the shaku ball display area 600 by holding promotion. Further, the promotion pattern determination table corresponding to the irregular time shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. 144 displays the display color of the three-scale balls in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 when digesting the final display number of fireworks. Used to determine a holding display pattern to be changed by holding promotion. In short, when determining the promotion pattern at the hold promotion timing shown in (2), (3), and (4) of FIG. 106, the table of FIG. When determining the promotion pattern at the promotion timing, the table of FIG. 144 corresponding to “non-pseudo-continuous” is referred to.

  For example, according to the promotion pattern determination table (big hit quasi-simultaneous), for example, when the current color is “white” and the remaining number of fireworks is “4”, the display color of the three-scale ball as the reserved display pattern Is changed to “blue” with a probability of 4280/65536. This next hold display pattern uses the promotion pattern determination table (big hit pseudo-simultaneous) or the promotion pattern determination table (big hit non-simultaneous simultaneous), the current color is “blue” and the remaining number of fireworks Is determined to correspond to the case of “3”, and thereafter, the same display is repeated until the remaining number becomes “0”, whereby the hold display patterns for the final display number of persons are determined.

  Also, according to the promotion pattern determination table (big hit quasi-simultaneous), as an example, when the current color is “white” and the remaining number of fireworks is “4”, the display of the three shank balls as the hold display pattern It is determined with a probability of 60244/65536 that the color or the like will be “white”, and it is determined with a probability of 756/65536 that it will be changed to “blue”, and it will be changed to “yellow”. It is determined with a probability of 256/65536. This next hold display pattern also uses the promotion pattern determination table (big hit pseudo-simultaneous) or the promotion pattern determination table (big hit non-simultaneous simultaneous), the current color is “white” and the remaining number of fireworks Is determined to correspond to the case of “3”, and thereafter, the same display is repeated until the remaining number becomes “0”, whereby the hold display patterns for the final display number of persons are determined.

  Furthermore, according to the promotion pattern determination table corresponding to the irregular time shown in FIG. 144 (losing, small hit, big hit non-pseudo irregular time irregular), the current color is “white” as an example, and the fireworker's final When the displayed number of persons (remaining number) is “4”, the display color of the three-scale ball is maintained to be “white” as a hold display pattern when hold promotion is performed using all of the final display persons. 65536 is determined with a probability of 16384/65536 to change the display color of the three-scale ball to “blue”, and it is determined with a probability of 16384/65536 to change to “yellow”. Is changed with a probability of 8192/65536, determined to be changed to “red” with a probability of 8192/65536, and not changed with a probability of “rainbow”. In this case, if the number of promotion timings is less than the final display number of people, that is, the hold display pattern corresponding to the case where the final display number of people is put together and the hold promotion is performed, the hold display pattern is determined at the first promotion timing. Based on this, the display color of the triple shawl is changed or maintained.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. Note that the processing executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment is substantially the same as that according to the other embodiments described above, and therefore description of the same or similar processing is omitted.

[First start switch check processing]
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61 of this embodiment. The first start port switch check process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 19, but a series of processes are executed when a winning (passing) of a game ball at the first start port 211 is detected. In the winning effect determination process of S505, the main CPU 61 determines that the winning effect is to be performed with a probability of 100%. Thus, the execution related to the pre-reading notice can be executed by the sub CPU 71 according to the start winning command without the main CPU 61 restricting the execution of the effect related to the pre-reading notice. In the winning effect determining process included in the first start opening switch check process, it is determined whether or not the effect related to the pre-reading notice is executed as the winning effect, and the sub result is obtained when the determination result is obtained. The CPU may further determine whether or not to execute a prefetch notice. Further, in the winning effect determination process of the main CPU, a process for determining the type of the prefetch notice is performed together with whether or not the effect related to the prefetch notice is executed, and the sub CPU is caused to execute the prefetch notice based on the determination result or the determination result. It may be. Alternatively, when the main CPU obtains a determination result indicating that the prefetching notice is to be executed, the sub CPU determines the type of the prefetching notice and causes the sub CPU to execute the prefetching notice based on the determination result. Good.

[Second start-up switch check process]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61 of this embodiment. The second start port switch check process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 20, but a series of processes are executed when a winning (passing) of a game ball at the second start port 241 is detected. In the winning effect determination process in S515, the main CPU 61 determines that the winning effect is to be performed with a probability of 100%. Thus, the execution related to the pre-reading notice can be executed by the sub CPU 71 according to the start winning command without the main CPU 61 restricting the execution of the effect related to the pre-reading notice. In the winning effect determination process included in the second start port switch check process, it is determined whether or not the effect related to the pre-reading notice is executed as the winning effect, and if the determination result indicating that the effect is to be executed is obtained, The CPU may further determine whether or not to execute a prefetch notice. Further, in the winning effect determination process of the main CPU, a process for determining the type of the prefetch notice is performed together with whether or not the effect related to the prefetch notice is executed, and the sub CPU is caused to execute the prefetch notice based on the determination result or the determination result. It may be. Alternatively, when the main CPU obtains a determination result indicating that the prefetching notice is to be executed, the sub CPU determines the type of the prefetching notice and causes the sub CPU to execute the prefetching notice based on the determination result. Good.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61 of this embodiment. This special symbol memory check process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 23, but the demo display process in S522, the determination process in S523, and the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S531 are different.

  In the demonstration display process of S522, the main CPU 61 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, but when there is no special symbol game start memory even after a predetermined time of, for example, 30 s has elapsed since this transmission, Send the demo display command again. That is, the demonstration display command is periodically and repeatedly transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 until the starting memory number related to the first and second special symbols becomes 1 or more. The demonstration display command includes data indicating the type of gaming state at the present time, together with a command to permit execution of the demonstration display.

  In S523, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the next variation display corresponds to the second special symbol. That is, the main CPU 61 monitors the storage order of the start memory corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and whether this storage order corresponds to the second special symbol for the oldest start memory. Determine whether. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the next variation display corresponds to the second special symbol (S523: YES), the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S524, while the next variation display corresponds to the second special symbol. If it is determined that it does not correspond to the first special symbol (S523: NO), the process proceeds to S525.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination processing in S531 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation pattern determination processing executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment. This special symbol variation pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in S560, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the variable display number counter, and moves the process to S561. The fluctuation display number counter is an addition counter for counting the number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) mainly in the short game state at the time of probability change, and is reset every time the big hit gaming state ends.

  In S561, the main CPU 61 refers to a table (not shown) for selecting a special symbol variation pattern determination table, and displays the type of special symbol to be varied, the game state, the number of starting memories (holding number), and the variation display. A special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 108 to 111) corresponding to the value of the number counter and the winning symbol flag is selected. The winning symbol flag is set in accordance with the end of the big hit or the end of the small hit in the non-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The winning symbol flag in the present embodiment is “01H” in the case of “first special symbol big hit (probability variation 1)”, “02H” in the case of “second special symbol big hit (probability variation 1)”, and “second special symbol”. “03H” in the case of “big hit (probability variation 2)”, “04H” in the case of “second special symbol big hit (probability variation 3)”, “05H” in the case of “second special symbol big hit (probability variation 4)”, non- “06H” is set in the case of “first special symbol small hit” in the probability variation non-short game state. Different specific fluctuation counts are associated with the winning symbol flags “01H” to “05H”. The specific fluctuation count is “170” for “01H” and the specific fluctuation count is “130” for “02H”. The number of specific fluctuations is “140” for “03H”, the number of specific fluctuations is “150” for “04H”, and the number of specific fluctuations is “160” for “05H”. The winning symbol flag “06H” is associated with “1-5” as the number of special fluctuations related to the special mode.

  For example, if the special symbol to be changed in the short game state during probability change is the second special symbol, the winning symbol flag is “02H”, and the value of the variable display number counter is “130”, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table ( When the number of specific fluctuations is short and the number of holds is 1 to 8), the winning symbol flag is “02H” and the value of the fluctuation display counter is “150”, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (ST101 to 174 times) Probability time short Hold number 1-8) is selected. In addition, when the special symbol to be changed in the non-probability changing non-short game state is the first special symbol, the winning symbol flag is “06H”, and the value of the variable display number counter is “5” or less, the first special symbol variation pattern is determined. Table is selected (the number of non-probable non-short-time holdings after the small hit is 1 to 8).

  In S562, the main CPU 61 refers to the selected special symbol variation pattern determination table and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol. Thereafter, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S563.

  In S563, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting data corresponding to the determined variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Based on the data corresponding to this variation pattern, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped. Thereafter, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S564.

  In S564, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the process of S562 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Thereafter, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination processing routine. The variation pattern designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61 of this embodiment. This hit end interval management process is similar to that shown in FIG. 30 or 54, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in S571, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process (S571: YES), the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S572. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process (S571: NO), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  In S572, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S572: YES), the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S573. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (S572: NO), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

  In S573, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When the process is finished, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S574.

  In S574, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the type of the winning game state that has been completed is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit (S574: YES), it moves the process to S575. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the type of the hit game state is not a big hit, that is, a small hit (S574: NO), the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S578.

  In S575, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the winning symbol flag. At this time, as the predetermined value, any one of “01H” to “05H” corresponding to the winning symbol of the ended big hit gaming state is set. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S576.

  In S576, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” indicating the short game state at the time of probability change in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S577.

  In S577, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “184” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S580.

  In S578, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the game state flag of the main RAM 63 is “00H” indicating the non-probability non-short-time game state. If the main CPU 61 determines that the gaming state flag is “00H” (S578: YES), it moves the process to S579. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the gaming state flag is not “00H” (S578: NO), it moves the process to S581.

  In S579, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the winning symbol flag. At this time, “06H” corresponding to the winning symbol of the completed small hit gaming state is set as the predetermined value. As a result, the winning symbol flag “06H” may be set in the non-probability changing non-short game state, but not set in the non-probability changing time-short gaming state. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S580.

  In S580, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “0” in the variable display number counter. As a result, the number of times of change display is counted after the end of the big hit or after the end of the small hit in the non-probability variable non-short game state. When this process is finished, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S581.

  In S581, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. This gaming state command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 receives various commands from the main CPU 61 and performs various processes.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 32, but the movable effect device control process of S596 is partially different.

  In step S <b> 596, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 moves the movable effect member 42A from the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600, or swings the movable effect member 42A up and down or left and right. A control process for causing the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A to emit light or causing the blades to protrude from the outer periphery of the movable effect member 42A is executed. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S591, and thereafter repeats the processes of S591 to S596.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. Since this command reception interrupt process is the same as that shown in FIG. 33, its description is omitted.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 34, but the timer update process in S611 is different and the losing port switch check process in S613 is added. The timer update process in S611 will be described later with reference to FIG. 153, and the lose mouth switch check process in S613 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer update process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S620A, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is “winning” from the reception of the winning start display command to the reception of the gaming state command. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that “winning” (S620A: YES), the process proceeds to S629. On the other hand, when determining that it is not “winning” (S620A: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S620.

  In S620, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any one of “06H” to “08H”. The effect mode flag indicates the type of effect mode (normal mode (1) to (3), special mode (1) to (3), ST mode (1) to (3)). ) Is “00H”, normal mode (2) is “01H”, normal mode (3) is “02H”, special mode (1) is “03H”, special mode (2) is “04H”, special mode (3 ) Is “05H”, ST mode (1) is “06H”, ST mode (2) is “07H”, and ST mode (3) is “08H”. When the production mode flag corresponds to any one of “06H” to “08H” (S620: YES), that is, in the ST mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S622. On the other hand, if the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of “06H” to “08H” (S620: NO), the sub CPU 71 moves to S622 after recognizing the effect mode other than the ST mode.

  In S <b> 621, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hold information related to the three-scale ball is stored. When the hold information related to the three shaku balls is stored (S621: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S629. On the other hand, when the hold information regarding the three shaku balls is not stored at all (S621: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S622.

  In S622, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the demonstration display timer is “0”. The demo display timer is for measuring the execution time of the demo display, and a predetermined time is set according to the gaming state, and is subtracted every time the timer update process is performed. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display timer is “0” (S622: YES), it moves the process to S625. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display timer is not “0” (S622: NO), it moves the process to S623.

  In S623, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S624.

  In S624, the sub CPU 71 again determines whether or not the demonstration display timer is “0”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display timer is “0” (S624: YES), it moves the process to S625. On the other hand, when determining that the demonstration display timer is not “0” (S624: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S629.

  In S625, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the jewelry holding information is stored in the blocks 1 to 4 of the jewelry holding information storage area. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the jewelry hold information is stored (S625: YES), the process proceeds to S626. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the jewelry hold information is not stored (S625: NO), the process proceeds to S629.

  In S626, the sub CPU 71 performs jewelry hold information update processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 transfers the jewel hold information stored in the block 1 of the jewel hold information storage area to the jewel hold information storage area (not shown), and the block 2 of the other jewel hold information storage area. Shift the gem hold information stored in -4 to blocks 1-3. As a result, the gem display area 700 displays the gem based on the gem hold information stored in the gem hold information storage area. Incidentally, the jewel hold information stored in the jewel hold information storage area is erased in response to the end of the demonstration display or the confirmation display of the decorative symbol 500 in the pseudo-ream using the jewel. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S627.

  In S627, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the type of the effect mode in the demonstration display flag and setting effect data corresponding to the demonstration display flag in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. The demonstration display flag indicates the type of demonstration display executed based on the demonstration display command or the like, and “01H” corresponding to the demonstration display (1) when there is no jewel hold information regardless of the type of effect mode. “02H” corresponding to the demo display (2) in the normal mode with gem hold information, “03H” corresponding to the demo display (3) in the special mode with gem hold information, and the gem hold information In the ST mode, it is set as “04H” corresponding to the demo display (4). Incidentally, in the non-demo display state other than the demo displays (1) to (4), the demo display flag is “00H”. Thereby, the effect image according to demonstration display (1)-(4) is displayed based on a demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S628.

  In S628, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value corresponding to the demo display flag in the demo display timer. For example, when the demonstration display flag is “01H”, a value corresponding to 20 s is set in the demonstration display timer as the time for performing the demonstration display (1) related to the normal demonstration. When the demonstration display flag is “02H”, a value corresponding to 8 s is set in the demonstration display timer as the time for performing the demonstration display (2) using the gemstone in the normal mode. When the demonstration display flag is “03H”, a value corresponding to 10 s is set in the demonstration display timer as a time for performing the demonstration display (3) in the special mode. When the demonstration display flag is “04H”, a value corresponding to 3 s is set in the demonstration display timer as a time for performing the demonstration display (4) in the ST mode. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S629. The value set in the demonstration display timer can be changed as appropriate according to the specification.

  In S629, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process for other timers, and ends the timer update process routine.

[Loose mouth switch check process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a loss-of-mouth switch check process executed by the sub CPU 71. The lose mouth switch check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S630, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a game ball has entered the lose mouth 242 based on a detection signal from the lose mouth switch 380. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a ball entering the losing port 242 based on the detection signal from the losing port switch 380 (S630: YES), the process proceeds to S631, and the sub CPU 71 enters the losing port 242. If it is determined that there is no ball (S630: NO), the lose mouth switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S <b> 631, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of gems retained (the number of gems retained information) is 4 or more. In this process, the sub CPU 71 ends the lose mouth switch check processing routine when the number of jewels held is 4 or more (S631: YES). If the number of jewels held is not 4 or more (S631: NO), the process proceeds to S632. Move.

  In step S632, the sub CPU 71 performs a jewelry hold display pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting a gem hold display pattern determination table (see FIG. 126) according to the updated gem hold number. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S633.

  In S633, the sub CPU 71 performs a jewel hold display pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 uses the selected jewel reservation display pattern determination table to newly display a jewel display in the jewel reservation display area 710 based on the symbols included in the three-scale ball reservation information and the hit determination result. Determine the gem hold display pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S634.

  In S634, the sub CPU 71 performs a jewelry hold information update process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 stores the latest jewel hold information in an empty block in the jewel hold information storage area based on the decided jewel hold display pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the lose mouth switch check process routine.

[Command analysis processing]
155 and 156 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is similar to the command analysis process of FIG. 35, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in S640, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a received command. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a received command (S640: YES), it moves the process to S641. On the other hand, when determining that there is no received command (S640: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

  In S641, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the received command data is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S642.

  In S642, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a demo display command has been received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a demonstration display command has been received (S642: YES), it moves the process to S643. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the demonstration display command (S642: NO), it moves the process to S644.

  In S643, the sub CPU 71 executes a demonstration display control process. The demonstration display control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S644, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a start winning command is received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has been received (S644: YES), it moves the process to S645. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the start winning command (S644: NO), it moves the process to S646.

  In S645, the sub CPU 71 executes a first hold information update process. The first hold information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S646, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the variation pattern designation command (S646: YES), it moves the process to S647. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S646: NO), it moves the process to S649.

  In S647, the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S648.

  In S648, the sub CPU 71 executes a second hold information update process. The second hold information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S649, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command is received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the symbol designation command (S649: YES), it moves the process to S650. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the symbol designation command (S649: NO), it moves the process to S651.

  In S650, the sub CPU 71 executes a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S651, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command is received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol stop command has been received (S651: YES), it moves the process to S652. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the symbol stop command (S651: NO), it moves the process to S653.

  In S652, the sub CPU 71 executes a decoration symbol stop process. This decoration symbol stop process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S653, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command has been received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received (S653: YES), it moves the process to S654. On the other hand, when determining that the hit start display command has not been received (S653: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S655.

  In S654, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. The winning effect pattern determination process is substantially the same as that in the above-described embodiment, but further performs a process of setting “0” in the demonstration display timer and a process of setting “00H” in the demonstration display flag. . When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S655, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening open display command is received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command during the opening of the special winning opening (S655: YES), it moves the process to S656. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the special winning opening open display command (S655: NO), it moves the process to S657.

  In S656, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the round. This in-round effect process is the same as that according to the above-described embodiment. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S657, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received (S657: YES), it moves the process to S658. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has not been received (S657: NO), it moves the process to S659 in FIG.

  In S658, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. This hit end effect process is the same as that according to the above-described embodiment. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  As shown in FIG. 156, in S659, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command is received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has been received (S659: YES), it moves the process to S660. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received a gaming state command (S659: NO), it moves the process to S661.

  In S660, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode transition process. The effect mode transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S661, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a probability change end command has been received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a probability variation end command has been received (S661: YES), it moves the process to S662. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command has not been received (S661: NO), it moves the process to S663.

  In S662, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode transition process. This effect mode transition process is also the same as S660, and will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In step S663, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

[Demo display control processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a demo display control process executed by the sub CPU 71. The demonstration display control process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S670A, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is “winning” from the reception of the winning start display command to the reception of the gaming state command. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the “winning” state is reached (S670A: YES), the demonstration display control process routine is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that it is not “winning” (S670A: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S670.

  In S670, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the demo display flag is “00H” indicating the non-demo display state. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display flag is “00H” (S670: YES), it moves the process to S671. On the other hand, when determining that the demonstration display flag is not “00H” (S670: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the demonstration display control processing routine.

  In S671, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” in the demonstration display flag based on the demonstration display command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S672.

  In S672, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the demo display flag in the demo display timer. Thus, a value corresponding to 20 s corresponding to the demo display (1) is set in the demo display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the demonstration display control process routine.

[First pending information update process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the first hold information update process executed by the sub CPU 71. The first hold information update process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S680, the sub CPU 71 executes a hold information display mode provisional determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 tentatively determines the display color of the three-scale ball as the reservation information display pattern using the reservation information display pattern temporary determination table (see FIG. 127). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S681.

  In S681, the sub CPU 71 executes a hold information storage area update process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 generates the latest three-scale ball holding information including color information indicating the display color of the three-size ball temporarily determined together with the data included in the start winning command. The information is stored in the vacant information storage areas 1 to 8 in the RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S682.

  In S682, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the prefetch notice flag is “00H”. The prefetch notice flag indicates the type of the prefetch notice in addition to the execution / non-execution of the prefetch notice, and is set as “00H” when the prefetch notice is not executed, and executes the fireworks prefetch notice (the winning hold information target). Is set as “01H”, is set as “02H” when executing the fireworks pre-reading notice (existing hold information target), and is set as “03H” when executing the holding information display character pre-reading notice, This is set as “04H” when the pre-reading notice for changing the number of reserved information is executed. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch notice flag is “00H” (S682: YES), it moves the process to S683. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch notice flag is not “00H” (S682: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the first hold information update processing routine.

  In S683, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag is “00H”. The pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag indicates execution / non-execution of the pending information number change prefetching notice, and is set as “01H” when executed and set as “00H” when not executed. ing. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag is “00H” (S683: YES), it moves the process to S684. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag is not “00H” but “01H” (S683: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the first pending information update processing routine.

  In S684, the sub CPU 71 executes a prefetch notice process. This prefetch notice process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the first hold information update process routine.

[Pre-reading notice processing]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice process executed by the sub CPU 71. The prefetch notice process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S690, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any of “00H” to “02H”. When the production mode flag corresponds to any one of “00H” to “02H” (S690: YES), that is, in the normal mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S691. On the other hand, when the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of “00H” to “02H” (S690: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetch notice processing routine by recognizing the effect mode other than the normal mode.

  In step S691, the sub CPU 71 performs a prefetch notice execution determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects any one of the pre-reading notice execution determination tables (see FIG. 128) according to the number of three-scale ball holding information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S692.

  In step S692, the sub CPU 71 performs a prefetch notice execution determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected prefetch notice execution determination table, and determines whether or not the prefetch notice can be executed by random lottery based on the latest hold information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S693.

  In S693, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the prefetch notice based on the determination result of S692. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice is to be executed (S693: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S694. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the prefetching advance notice (S693: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetching advance notice processing routine.

  In step S694, the sub CPU 71 performs a prefetch notice type determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects one of the prefetch notice type determination tables (see FIG. 129) in accordance with the number of three-scale ball holding information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S695.

  In step S695, the sub CPU 71 performs a prefetch notice type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected prefetching notice type determination table and determines the prefetching notice type by random lottery based on the latest hold information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S696.

  In step S696, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the determination result in step S695 in the prefetch notice flag. At this time, the prefetching advance notice flag is set as “01H” when the decision result to execute the fireworker prefetching notice (winning hold information target) is obtained, and the fireworker prefetching notice (existing hold information target) is executed. Is set as “02H” when the decision result is obtained, and is set as “03H” when the decision result is given to execute the holding information display character prefetching notice, and the holding information number change prefetching is set. This is set as “04H” when a determination result for executing the advance notice is obtained. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S697.

  In step S <b> 697, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the prefetch notice flag is “02H” indicating the fireworks prefetch notice (existing hold information target). If it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is “02H” (S697: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S698. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is not “02H” (S697: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S700.

  In S698, the sub CPU 71 performs a prefetch notice target hold information determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines which pre-reading notice depends on whether the existing holding information includes holding information including a winning symbol (big winning symbol and small winning symbol) or only holding information including a lost symbol. A target hold information determination table (see FIG. 130) is selected. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S699.

  In step S <b> 699, the sub CPU 71 performs prefetching notice target hold information determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected prefetch notice target hold information determination table, and determines the hold information in the order of the prefetch notice target by random lottery based on the number of holds. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S700.

  In S700, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value indicating the order of the hold information to be subjected to the prefetching notice in the prefetching notice execution number determination counter based on the determination result of S699. The pre-reading notice execution number determination counter is a subtraction counter for determining the number of times the pre-reading notice is executed for the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice. For example, in the case of the first hold information, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice execution number determination counter, and in the case of the third holding information, “3” is set in the pre-reading notice execution number determination counter. When the prefetch notice flag is “04H”, if the number of hold information becomes 4 or less before the value of the prefetch notice execution count determination counter becomes zero, the first three-scale ball hold display area is subject to the prefetch notice. The display color of the three-scale ball displayed at 610 is changed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S701.

  In step S701, the sub CPU 71 executes a prefetch notice pattern determination process. This prefetch notice pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetch notice process routine.

[Prefetching pattern determination process]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a prefetch notice pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The prefetch notice pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In step S <b> 710, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the prefetch notice flag is “03H” indicating the hold information display accessory prefetch notice. If it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is “03H” (S710: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S711. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is not “03H” (S710: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S712.

  In step S711, the sub CPU 71 executes a hold information display combination prefetch notice pattern determination process. The hold information display combination prefetch notice pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetching notice pattern determination process routine.

  In S712, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the prefetch notice flag is “04H” indicating the pending information number change prefetch notice. When it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is “04H” (S712: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetch notice pattern determination processing routine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetching advance notice flag is not “04H” (S712: NO), the sub CPU 71 recognizes as a fireworks prefetching advance notice (winning hold information target) or a fireworks prefetching advance notice (existing hold information target), and S713. Move processing to.

  In S713, the sub CPU 71 executes a fireworks prefetch notice pattern determination process. This fireworks master prefetch notice pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetching notice pattern determination process routine.

[Holding information display character prefetch notice pattern determination process]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a hold information display combination prefetch notice pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hold information display combination prefetch notice pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S720, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display accessory final display color pattern determination table selection process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 selects and reads the hold information display accessory final display color pattern determination table (see FIG. 131). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S721.

  In S721, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display combination final display color pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected hold information display accessory final display color pattern determination table, and based on the determination result related to the hold information that is the target of the prefetch notice, the sub CPU 71 performs the final in the hold information display accessory prefetch notice. The display color pattern is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S722.

  In S722, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value obtained by adding 1 to the current order of the hold information to be prefetched as a predetermined value in the accessory pattern determination counter. The counter for determining an accessory pattern is a subtraction counter for counting the number of executions of the prefetch notice using the movable effect member 42A. When a predetermined value is set in this counter, the pre-reading using the movable effect member 42A is performed until the three-scale ball is moved from the first three-size ball holding display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600 and displayed. A notice is given. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S723.

  In step S723, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for subtracting 1 from the value of the accessory pattern determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S724.

  In S724, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold display change pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the hold display change pattern in accordance with the order indicating the number of items to be displayed in the three-size ball hold display area 600 and the first three-size ball hold display area 610. A determination table (see FIGS. 132 to 134) is selected. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S725.

  In step S725, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display accessory display color change pattern determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected hold display change pattern determination table, and based on the final display color pattern and the current color pattern, the display to be displayed next is the target three-scale ball or the light emitting lens 42B. The color change pattern is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S726.

  In step S <b> 726, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display combination movable pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 displays the target three-scale balls and the movable effect member 42A in the three-size ball holding display area 600 (0th) and the first three-size ball holding display area 610 (1st to 4th). Depending on which of them is to be displayed, the hold information display accessory movable pattern determination table (see FIG. 135) is selected. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S727.

  In S727, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display combination movable pattern determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected hold information display accessory movable pattern determination table, and determines the movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A by random lottery based on the display color change pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S728.

  In S728, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the display color change pattern and the movable pattern determined in S725 and S727 in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S729.

  In step S729, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the accessory pattern determination counter is 1. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not all of the display color change pattern and the movable pattern when displaying the target three-scale balls in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 have been determined. If the value of the accessory pattern determination counter is 1 (S729: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S730. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory pattern determination counter is not 1 (S729: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines the remaining display color change pattern and movable pattern in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 in S723. Move processing to.

  In S730, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold display change pattern determination table selection process in the same manner as in S724. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 selects a hold display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 134) according to the display of the 3 measure balls to be displayed in the 3 measure ball hold display area 600. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S731.

  In step S731, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display accessory display color change pattern determination process in the same manner as in step S725. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected hold display change pattern determination table, and displays the target 3 scale ball and the light emitting lens 42B based on the final display color pattern and the current color pattern. A display color change pattern to be displayed in the region 600 is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S732.

  In S732, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display combination movable pattern determination table selection process, similarly to S726. In this process, the sub CPU 71 displays a holding information display accessory movable pattern determination table (0th) (in accordance with the case where the target three shaving balls and the light-emitting lens 42B are displayed in the three shading ball holding display area 600. (See FIG. 135). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S733.

  In S733, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information display combination movable pattern determination process in the same manner as in S727. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected hold information display accessory movable pattern determination table (0th), and uses the three scales targeted in the three scale ball hold display area 600 based on the display color change pattern. The movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A when displaying the ball is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S734.

  In S734, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the display color change pattern and the movable pattern determined in S731 and S733 in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the hold information display combination prefetch notice pattern determination process routine. According to such a hold information display combination prefetch notice pattern determination process, a prefetch notice using the movable effect member 42A is performed. In the pre-reading notice using the movable effect member 42A, the movable effect member 42A appears so as to overlap with the three-scale ball that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and until the variable display of the decorative design 500 based on the hold information that is the object ends. The movable effect member 42A continues to overlap with the three shaku balls. For this reason, once the movable effect member 42A overlaps the target three-scale ball, the movable effect member 42A moves as the three-scale ball is moved and displayed thereafter. Note that after the movement display of the three-scale ball and the movement of the movable effect member are synchronized and the movable effect member appears on the display area, it may be difficult or impossible to visually recognize the three-size ball. In addition, there may be a period in which the three-scale balls can be visually recognized by moving the movable effect member after the reserved image moves.

[Fireworks master look-ahead pattern determination process]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the fireworker prefetch notice pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The pyrotechnic prefetch notice pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S740, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnician final display number determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a final number of fireworkers to display when the target three-scale balls are displayed in the three-size ball holding display area 600 (see FIG. 136). ) Is selected. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S741.

  In step S741, the sub CPU 71 performs a fireworker final display number determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the final number of fireworks displayers, and based on the determination result included in the pre-reading notice target hold information, the corresponding three shaku balls are displayed on the three shank balls hold display. The final number of pyrotechnicians based on the preliminary announcement of the pyrotechnicians when displayed in the area 600 is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S742.

  In S742, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value determined in S741 to the final display number counter. The final display number counter is a subtraction counter for counting the number of executions of hold promotion corresponding to the final display number of fireworks. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S743.

  In S743, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnician initial display number determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a pyrotechnician initial display number determination table (see FIG. 137) for determining the initial number of fireworks based on the pre-reading notice of the fireworks according to the final number determined in S741. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S744.

  In S744, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnician initial display number determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected pyrotechnician initial display number determination table and, based on the determination result included in the hold information subject to the prefetching advance notice, randomly selects the initial number of fireworkers by the firework prefetch notice. Determined by In the present embodiment, the number of fireworkers is basically reduced or maintained in the fireworker look-ahead notice, so that the initial display number is determined as a number equal to or greater than the final display number. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S745.

  In step S745, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the determined value in the initial display number counter. The initial display number counter is a counter for designating a number corresponding to the initial display number of fireworkers. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S746.

  In step S746, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnic color scheme determining table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern determination table (see FIG. 138) for determining the color arrangement pattern of the pyrotechnician in the advance notice of the pyrotechnician. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S747.

  In S747, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnic color scheme determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected pyrotechnics coloration pattern determination table, and based on the determination result included in the hold information subject to the prefetching advance notice and the final display number of fireworkers, the fireworker in the fireworker prefetching advance notice Is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S748.

  In step S748, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the order of the target hold information as a predetermined value in the fireworker pattern determination counter. The fireworker pattern determination counter is a counter that is used to determine a prefetch notice effect pattern for each order of the target hold information. For example, “4” is set as the predetermined value when determining the effect pattern when the order of the target hold information is fourth. When the process is finished, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S749.

  In step S749, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the fireworker pattern determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S750.

  In S750, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnician reduction pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a pyrotechnician reduction pattern determination table (see FIG. 139) for determining the pyrotechnician reduction pattern in the fireworks prefetching notice according to the order of the target hold information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S751.

  In S751, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnician reduction pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected pyrotechnician reduction pattern determination table, and determines the number of fireworkers to be reduced by random lottery according to the final display number of fireworks and the current number before the current reduction. . The current number of people is shown as the value of the initial display number of people counter and is obtained from this counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S752.

  In S752, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of fireworkers will be reduced from the current number. If it is determined that the number of fireworkers is to be reduced from the current number (S752: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S753. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pyrotechnicians is to be maintained without decreasing from the current number (S752: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S754.

  In step S753, the sub CPU 71 performs initial display number counter subtraction processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the decrease from the initial display number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S756.

  In step S754, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnician decrease gash pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a pyrotechnician reduction gash pattern determining table (see FIG. 140) for making it appear as if the fireworks teacher has been reduced. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S755.

  In S755, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnician reduction gash pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected pyrotechnician decrease gasset pattern determination table, and determines whether or not to execute the pyrotechnician decrease gasset pattern based on the determination result included in the target hold information. Determined by When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S756.

  In step S <b> 756, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the fireworks prefetch notice pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. With this process, the display pattern of the pyrotechnician when the three-scale ball that is the target of the prefetch notice is displayed in the hold display area corresponding to the value of the fireworker pattern determination counter + 1 is determined. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S757.

  In S757, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the fireworker pattern determination counter is zero. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the order of the target hold information is 0 and the effect pattern related to the pre-reading notice until the corresponding three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 is determined. . When the value of the fireworker pattern determination counter is 0 (S757: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the fireworker prefetch notice pattern determination processing routine. On the other hand, if the value of the fireworker pattern determination counter is not 0 (S757: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S749 in order to determine the fireworks display pattern according to the remaining order.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S760, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the mode stay number counter. The mode stay number counter is a counter that may be used when selecting the first and second effect pattern determination tables, and is used to count the number of games when the same effect mode is continuously executed. Is. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S761.

  In S761, the sub CPU 71 extracts a random number for effect determination. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S762.

  In S762, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any of “00H” to “02H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode is the normal mode. When the production mode flag corresponds to any one of “00H” to “02H” (S762: YES), that is, in the normal mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S763. On the other hand, when the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of “00H” to “02H” (S690: NO), the sub CPU 71 moves the process to S764 by recognizing the effect mode other than the normal mode.

  In S763, the sub CPU 71 performs a normal mode effect pattern determination process. The normal mode effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process routine.

  In S764, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any of “03H” to “05H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode is the special mode. When the production mode flag corresponds to any of “03H” to “05H” (S764: YES), that is, in the special mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S765. On the other hand, when the production mode flag does not correspond to any of “03H” to “05H” (S764: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S766 by recognizing the ST mode.

  In S765, the sub CPU 71 performs special mode effect pattern determination processing. The special mode effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process routine.

  In S766, the sub CPU 71 performs ST mode effect pattern determination processing. The ST mode effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process routine.

[Normal mode effect pattern determination processing]
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a normal mode effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The normal mode effect pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S770, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S771.

  In S771, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting 0 to the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S772.

  In step S772, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects an effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 112, 113, 117, and 118) for determining an effect pattern in the normal mode. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S773.

  In S773, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the effect pattern determination table corresponding to the selected normal mode, and based on the effect determination random number extracted in S761 the effect pattern to be executed in the normal mode based on the variation pattern designation command. To decide. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S774.

  In S774, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting data for executing the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. The data set here is data for ending the demonstration display. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S775.

  In S775, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the prefetch notice flag is “01H” or “02H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a fireworks prefetching advance notice. If the pre-reading advance notice flag is “01H” or “02H” and it is determined that the fireworks pre-fetching advance notice is made (S775: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S776. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is neither “01H” nor “02H” (S775: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the normal mode effect pattern determination processing routine.

  In S776, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnic promotion pattern determination process. This fireworker promotion pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the normal mode effect pattern determination process routine.

[Fireworks promotion pattern determination process]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a pyrotechnic promotion pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The pyrotechnic promotion pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In step S780, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the promotion timing determination number counter. The promotion timing determination number counter is for counting the number of pending promotion timings (the number of promotion timings), and the predetermined value corresponds to the effect pattern using the promotion timing number determination table (see FIG. 141). The number of timings (1-7) is set. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S781.

  In S781, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the final display number counter is larger than the value of the promotion timing determination number counter. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of executions of pending promotion corresponding to the final display number is greater than the number of promotion timings. When the value of the final display number counter is larger than the value of the promotion timing determination number counter (S781: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S782. On the other hand, when the value of the final display number counter is equal to or smaller than the value of the promotion timing determination number counter (S781: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S786.

  In step S <b> 782, the sub CPU 71 performs promotion pattern determination table selection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a promotion pattern determination table (see FIGS. 143 and 144) for determining a promotion pattern (holding display pattern) related to the three shaku balls according to the effect pattern. At this time, since the number of executions of pending promotion becomes irregular more than the number of promotion timings, a table corresponding to the irregular time is selected as the promotion pattern determination table. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S <b> 783.

  In S783, the sub CPU 71 performs a promotion pattern determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected promotion pattern determination table and, based on the current color of the target three-scale ball and the remaining number of fireworks, the promotion pattern (the next display color) (Hold display pattern) is determined by random lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S784.

  In step S <b> 784, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined promotion pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. At this time, the data set here corresponds to the promotion pattern at the time of irregularity, and according to the data corresponding to this promotion pattern, all the final display numbers of the pyrotechnicians are the first time of the promotion timing. At the same time, the three-scale balls in the three-scale ball display area 600 are turned on while disappearing, and the display color of the three-scale balls is changed to the color defined by the promotion pattern (holding display pattern). It will be. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S785.

  In S785, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” in the final display number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the fireworker promotion pattern determination process routine.

  In step S786, the sub CPU 71 performs promotion execution availability determination table selection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes the pending promotion for the number of times the final display number of fireworks, but the promotion timing number may be larger than the number of executions. The promotion execution availability determination table (see FIG. 142) is selected for determining whether or not it is. The promotion execution availability determination table is used as an exception when the remaining number of promotion timings that remain pending regarding the execution of pending promotion is the same as the final number of fireworks displayers (the number of pending promotion executions). Not. In this case, all the remaining numbers of the promotion timing are determined without performing lottery as executing the promotion for holding. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S787.

  In step S787, the sub CPU 71 performs promotion execution availability determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected promotion execution availability determination table, except for the above-described exception, and determines whether or not to execute the pending promotion for each promotion timing based on the final display number of fireworks. Is determined by random number drawing. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S788.

  In S788, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the final display number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S789.

  In step S789, the sub CPU 71 performs promotion pattern determination table selection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a promotion pattern determination table (see FIGS. 143 and 144) for determining a promotion pattern (holding display pattern) related to the three shaku balls according to the effect pattern. That is, the promotion pattern determination table is selected in order to determine a promotion pattern at one promotion timing at which it is determined to execute the pending promotion. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S790.

  In S790, the sub CPU 71 performs a promotion pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected promotion pattern determination table, and based on the current color of the target three-scale ball and the remaining number of fireworks (the value of the final display number counter). The promotion pattern (holding display pattern) indicating the display color is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S791.

  In step S <b> 791, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined promotion pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. At this time, the data set here corresponds to the promotion pattern of the pending promotion executed at one promotion timing. According to the data corresponding to this promotion pattern, one of the pyrotechnicians At the time of the predetermined number of times, the three-scale ball in the three-scale ball display area 600 disappears while firing, and the display color of the three-scale ball changes to a color determined by the promotion pattern (holding display pattern). Production will be performed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S792.

  In step S <b> 792, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the final display number counter is zero. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the promotion patterns for the final display number of persons (for the number of executions of pending promotion) have been determined. If the value of the final display number counter is 0 (S792: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the fireworker promotion pattern determination processing routine. On the other hand, when the value of the final display number counter is not 0 (S792: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S788.

[Special mode effect pattern decision processing]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing special mode effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The special mode effect pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S800, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S801.

  In step S <b> 801, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” in the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S801.

  In step S802, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects an effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 114 to 116 and FIGS. 119 to 121) for determining an effect pattern in the special mode. At this time, the sub CPU 71 selects a different production pattern determination table according to the value of the mode stay number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S803.

  In step S803, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the effect pattern determination table corresponding to the selected special mode, and based on the effect determination random number extracted in S761 the effect pattern to be executed in the special mode based on the variation pattern designation command. To decide. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S804.

  In step S <b> 804, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the special mode effect pattern determination process routine.

[ST mode effect pattern determination processing]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an ST mode effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The ST mode effect pattern determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S810A, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the demonstration display flag is “04H” indicating the demonstration display (4). If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display flag is “04H” (S810A: YES), it moves the process to S810. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display flag is not “04H” (S810A: NO), it moves the process to S810B.

  In S810B, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S810C.

  In S810C, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” in the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S810.

  In S810, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects an effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 116 and 122 to 123) for determining an effect pattern in the ST mode. At this time, the sub CPU 71 selects a different production pattern determination table according to the value of the mode stay number counter. When the value of the mode stay counter matches the specific variation count, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect corresponding to when the high expectation effect has not been executed or when the high expectation effect has been executed according to the value of the specific effect pattern flag described later. Select the pattern determination table. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S811.

  In S811, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the effect pattern determination table corresponding to the selected ST mode, and based on the effect determination random number extracted in S761 the effect pattern to be executed in the ST mode based on the variation pattern designation command. To decide. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S812.

  In S812, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the specific effect pattern flag is “00H”. The specific production pattern flag is a specific production pattern that corresponds to a high expectation production up to the specific number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, “Fireworks Door Break Reach Door Red”, “Women Door Break Reach Door Red”, “Blow Button reach large button "," triple button reach large button ") is executed, and is" 00H "if the specific effect pattern is not executed, and" 01H "if it is executed. " When the specific effect pattern flag is “00H” (S812: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S813. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern flag is “01H” (S812: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S815.

  In S813, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a specific effect pattern has been determined in the process of S811. If it is determined that the specific effect pattern has been determined (S813: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S814. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect pattern has not yet been determined (S813: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S815.

  In S814, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the specific effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S815.

  In S <b> 815, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the ST mode effect pattern determination process routine.

[Second pending information update process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the second hold information update process executed by the sub CPU 71. The second hold information update process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S820, the sub CPU 71 performs a hold information storage area update process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transfers the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 to the hold information storage area based on the change pattern designation command, and holds the hold information in the hold information storage areas 1 to 8. Shift one by one. As a result, a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 based on the hold information in the hold information storage area. When the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed, the hold information in the hold information storage area is deleted, and the three-scale balls displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 are also deleted. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S821.

  In S821, it is determined whether or not the prefetch notice flag is “00H”. If it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is “00H” (S821: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S822. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetch notice flag is not “00H” (S821: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S823.

  In step S822, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pending information count change prefetching notice execution flag is “00H”. When it is determined that the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag is “00H” (S822: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the second pending information update processing routine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending information number change pre-reading notice execution flag is not “00H” but “01H” (S822: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S823.

  In step S823, the sub CPU 71 executes a prefetch notice end process. This prefetch notice end process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the second hold information update process routine.

[Pre-reading notice end processing]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a prefetch notice end process executed by the sub CPU 71. The prefetch notice end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S830, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag is “01H”. If it is determined that the pending information number change pre-reading notice execution flag is “01H” (S830: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S831. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending information number change pre-reading notice execution flag is not “01H” but “00H” (S830: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S834.

  In step S831, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the pending information number change prefetch notice execution counter. The pending information number change prefetching notice execution counter is a subtraction counter for counting the number of executions of the pending information number change prefetching notice. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S832.

  In S832, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the pending information number change pre-reading notice execution counter is “0”. When the value of the pending information number change prefetching notice execution counter is “0” (S832: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S833. On the other hand, when the value of the pending information number change prefetching notice execution counter is not “0” (S832: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetching notice end processing routine.

  In S833, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetch notice end process routine.

  In step S834, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the pre-reading notice execution number determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S835.

  In S835, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the prefetch notice flag is “04H”, that is, whether or not it is a pending information number change prefetch notice. When the value of the prefetch notice flag is “04H” (S835: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S836. On the other hand, when the value of the prefetch notice flag is not “04H” (S835: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S842.

  In step S836, the sub CPU 71 moves and displays the three-scale balls from the second three-length ball holding display area 620 to the first three-length ball holding display area 610, whether or not the storage number of the hold information is “4”. The process which determines whether it is a case is performed. If the storage number of the hold information is “4” (S836: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S837. On the other hand, when the number of stored hold information is not “4” (S836: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S842.

  In S837, the sub CPU 71 uses the work RAM 73 as data for changing the hold information display pattern so as to move and display the three shaku balls from the second three shaku ball holding display area 620 to the first three shaku ball holding display area 610. The process of setting the predetermined area is performed. That is, according to this data, the first three shank balls to be prefetched in advance according to the hold information display pattern temporarily determined using the hold information display pattern temporary determination table (see FIG. 127). It will be displayed in the ball hold display area 610. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S838.

  In step S <b> 838, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the pre-reading notice execution number determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S839.

  In step S839, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “00H” to the prefetch notice flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S840.

  In S840, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “4” in the pending information number change prefetching notice executing counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S841.

  In S <b> 841, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “01H” to the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S843.

  In S842, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pre-reading notice execution number determination counter is “0”. When the value of the pre-reading notice execution count determination counter is “0” (S842: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S843. On the other hand, when the value of the pre-reading notice execution number determination counter is not “0” (S842: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the reading notice end processing routine.

  In S843, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the prefetch notice flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the reading notice end process routine.

[Decoration stop processing]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol stop process executed by the sub CPU 71. The decorative symbol stop process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In step S850, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol confirmation display control process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for confirming and displaying the decorative symbol 500 that is being variably displayed according to the symbol stop command. When this process ends, the process moves to S851.

  In S851, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any of “00H” to “02H”. When the production mode flag corresponds to any of “00H” to “02H” (S851: YES), that is, in the normal mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S852. On the other hand, when the production mode flag does not correspond to any of “00H” to “02H” (S851: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S855.

  In S852, the sub CPU 71 performs a normal mode effect transition determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 uses a predetermined random number updated in the random number update process of S591 in the main process, and, for example, when winning the transition lottery with a probability of 1/128, enters the normal mode of a different type from the current time. Each of them is determined to be transferred with a probability of 1/2. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S853.

  In step S853, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not to shift to a different type of normal mode. When shifting to a different type of normal mode (S853: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S854. On the other hand, when the mode is not shifted to a different type of normal mode (S853: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing routine.

  In S854, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the normal mode of the transfer destination in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process routine.

  In S855, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any one of “03H” to “05H”. When the production mode flag corresponds to any of “03H” to “05H” (S855: YES), that is, in the special mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S856. On the other hand, when the production mode flag does not correspond to any of “03H” to “05H” (S855: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S858.

  In step S856, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the mode stay number counter is “5”. When the value of the mode stay number counter is “5” (S856: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines that the special mode is finished and moves the process to S857. On the other hand, when the value of the mode stay number counter is not “5” (S856: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines that the special mode is being executed and ends the decorative symbol stop processing routine.

  In S857, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process routine.

  In S858, the sub CPU 71 performs ST mode effect transition determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift to the ST mode different from the staying ST mode as the effect mode based on the value of the effect mode flag and the value of the mode stay counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S859.

  In step S859, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not to shift to an ST mode different from the ST mode during stay. When shifting to a different ST mode (S859: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S860. On the other hand, when not changing to different ST mode (S859: NO), sub CPU71 complete | finishes a decoration design stop process routine.

  In S860, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the ST mode of the transition destination in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process routine.

[Direction mode transition processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an effect mode transition process executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect mode transition process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S900, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a gaming state command has been received. If it is determined that the gaming state command has been received (S900: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S901. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state command has not been received (S900: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S912.

  In step S <b> 901, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “00H” to the prefetch notice flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S902.

  In step S <b> 902, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the pre-reading notice execution number determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S903.

  In step S <b> 903, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “00H” to the pending information number change prefetching notice execution flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S904.

  In step S <b> 904, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” in the pending information number change prefetching notice execution counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S905.

  In S905, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the big hit gaming state is ended based on the received gaming state command. When it is determined that the big hit gaming state has ended (S905: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game state is not ended but the small hit game state is ended (S905: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S906.

  In step S <b> 906, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” in the mode stay number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S907.

  In step S907, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “06H” in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect mode transition process routine.

  In S908, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag corresponds to any one of “06H” to “08H”. When the production mode flag corresponds to one of “06H” to “08H” (S908: YES), that is, in the ST mode, the sub CPU 71 does not make the transition to the special mode during the ST mode. Exit the routine. On the other hand, when the production mode flag does not correspond to any of “06H” to “08H” (S908: NO), that is, in the normal mode or the special mode, the sub CPU 71 determines the transition destination to the special mode. The process moves to S909.

  In step S909, the sub CPU 71 performs special mode transition destination determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a determination process as to which of the special modes (1) to (3) to shift to. In this embodiment, for example, the probability of shifting for each of the special modes (1) to (3) is 1/3, and the transfer destination is set using a predetermined random number that is updated in the random number update process of S591 in the main process. A special mode is determined. In addition, it is determined whether to shift to any special mode in the process before this, and suggesting which special mode to shift to, such as during the decorative display of decorative symbols before winning a small hit Good. Further, a special mode to be shifted may be determined according to the determination result of the prefetch notice. For example, when the hold information digested after the end of the small hit gaming state includes hold information indicating a big win, the special mode (3) may be more easily shifted to the special mode (1). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S910.

  In S910, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the determination result in S909 in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S911.

  In S911, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” in the mode stay number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect mode transition process routine.

  In S912, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the specific effect pattern flag. It should be noted that this process may be executed every time the big hit gaming state ends, and the specific effect pattern may be executed once during the ST mode. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S913.

  In S913, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” in the effect mode flag. This process is executed only when a game state command indicating the end of the probability change short game state is received, and “01H” corresponding to the normal mode (2) is set as the effect mode flag. In this process, when the value of the effect mode flag is set, a value corresponding to any of the normal modes (1) to (3) may be set by lottery.

  Next, examples of various effects will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Demo display (2)]
FIG. 172 is a view for explaining a demonstration display (2) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172 (A), in the normal mode, when a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, it is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. When the three-scale ball holding information becomes zero, the first three-size ball holding display area 610 does not display the three-size ball. At this time, if there is one or more pieces of gem hold information, one or more pieces of gems are displayed in the gem hold display area 710.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed as a lost symbol, the three-scale ball display area 600 also has three scales unless the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored. The ball disappears.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), in the jewel hold display area 710, the jewel is displayed so as to shift by one in the left direction, and accordingly, one jewel moves in the jewel display area 700. It is displayed as if it had been. Then, in the center of the display area 4A, a message image 510A, for example, “latency?” Is displayed instead of displaying the decorative symbol 500. “Latent” refers to a probabilistic non-short-time gaming state. Such a display of the message image 510A is executed as a demonstration display (2) using the jewel hold information, and is continued until, for example, about 8 s elapses in this embodiment. When the demonstration display (2) is finished, the display of the message image 510A is deleted and the display of the jewel in the jewel display area 700 is also deleted. Note that during such a message display, the stopped decorative pattern may be displayed at the corner of the display area (for example, the upper left corner).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D), when the three-scale ball holding information is not newly stored, it is displayed and displayed as if one jewel in the jewel holding display area 710 has moved to the jewel display area 700. In the central part of the area 4A, a message image 510B that is different from the previous message image 510A, such as “Close to big hit?” Is displayed. The display of such a message image 510B is also executed as a demonstration display (2) using jewelry hold information. When the three-scale ball holding information is not newly stored and there is no gem holding information, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 s in the present embodiment) elapses from the end of the demonstration display (2), the demonstration display (1 ) Will be executed. In addition, when the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored during the execution of the demonstration displays (1) and (2), the demonstration displays (1) and (2) are forcibly terminated, and the three-scale ball holding information is stored. Based on the above, the variable display of the decorative design 500 is started. Even when such a message is being displayed, the decorative symbol that has been stopped may be displayed at the corner of the display area (for example, the upper left corner).

[Demo display (3)]
FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining a demonstration display (3) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173 (A), in the normal mode, when a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, it is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. When the three-scale ball holding information becomes zero, the first three-size ball holding display area 610 does not display the three-size ball. At this time, if there is one or more pieces of gem hold information, one or more pieces of gems are displayed in the gem hold display area 710.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed as “135” for the specific event indicating the small hit symbol, the mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode, which is not particularly illustrated. An effect image corresponding to the small hit gaming state is displayed. At this time, in the display area 4 </ b> A, unless the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored, the three-scale ball is not displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), in the display area 4A in the special mode, the jewel is not displayed in the jewel display area 700 and the jewel hold display area 710. As described above, even when the jewelry holding information is stored or when the demonstration display using the jewelry holding information is executed, the jewelry is not displayed. At this time, in the jewel hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the jewel hold information is shifted by one, and one jewel hold information is stored in the jewel hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. Then, in the central portion of the display area 4A, a message such as “remaining 5 times?” Indicating the number of remaining games in the special mode, for example, instead of displaying the decorative symbol 500 based on the jewelry holding information in the jewelry holding information storage area. Image 520A is displayed. Such a display of the message image 520A is executed as a demonstration display (3) using the jewel hold information, and is continued until, for example, about 10 seconds elapses in this embodiment. When the demonstration display (3) ends, the display of the message image 520A is deleted. Note that such a message image 520A is based on the jewel hold information if there is jewel hold information in the state where there is no three-scale ball hold information even if the remaining number of games in the special mode is 1 to 4 times. Will be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), in the special mode, the jewel display area 700 and the jewel hold display area 710 remain in a state where no jewel is displayed. Then, the jewelry holding information in the next order is stored in the jewelry holding information storage area of the work RAM 73. As a result, a message image 520B such as “Large chance?” Different from the previous message image 520A is displayed at the center of the display area 4A based on the second gem hold information. Such display of the message image 520B is also executed as a demonstration display (3) using the jewelry hold information.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), when the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored in the special mode, the three-sized ball is displayed in the first three-size ball holding display area 610, In the jewel display area 700 and the jewel hold display area 710, the state where the jewel is not displayed is continued, and the decorative symbol 500 is fixedly displayed as a lost symbol, for example. In addition, when the three-scale ball holding information is not newly stored and there is no jewelry holding information, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 s in this embodiment) elapses from the end of the demonstration display (3), the demonstration display is performed as a normal demonstration. (1) will be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (F), in the display area 4A, the three-scale balls are moved and displayed from the first three-size ball holding display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600, and this three-size ball is supported. The decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed again based on the hold information. That is, in this example, the first special mode is executed. Note that after the demonstration display (3) ends, the special mode may be executed for the second to fifth times of the special mode or again. In addition, when the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored during the execution of the demonstration display (3), the demonstration display (3) is forcibly terminated and the decoration pattern 500 changes based on the three-size ball holding information. Display will start.

[Demo display (4)]
FIG. 174 is a view for explaining a demonstration display (4) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 174 (A), in the ST mode, when a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, it is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. When the three-scale ball holding information becomes zero, the first three-size ball holding display area 610 does not display the three-size ball. Also, in the display area 4A in the ST mode, jewelry is not displayed as in the special mode. In the ST mode, an effect design 530 made up of alphabets is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 4A so as to be capable of variable display and stop display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed as a losing symbol, the three-scale ball display area 600 also has three scales unless the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored. The ball disappears.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (C), the display area 4A in the ST mode is displayed in the upper right corner based on the jewel hold information in the jewel hold information storage area as being different from the decorative pattern 500. The variation display of the effect design 530 is started. At this time, in the jewel hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the jewel hold information is shifted by one, and one jewel hold information is stored in the jewel hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. Such a variation display of the effect symbol 530 is executed as a demonstration display (4) using the jewelry holding information, and is continued until, for example, about 3 s elapses in the present embodiment.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (D), in the display area 4A in the ST mode, when the time specified as the demo display (4) has elapsed, the variation display of the effect symbol 530 in the upper right corner is finished. Stopped display. At this time, an image indicating the number of remaining games in the ST mode may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (E), in the display area 4A, when the effect symbol 530 in the upper right corner is erased and the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored, the first three-size ball holding display area A three-scale ball is displayed at 610. In addition, when the three-scale ball holding information is not newly stored and there is no gem holding information, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 s in this embodiment) elapses from the end of the demonstration display (4), the demonstration display is performed as a normal demonstration. (1) will be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (F), in the display area 4A, a three-scale ball is moved and displayed from the first three-size ball holding display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600. The decorative design 500 is displayed in a variable manner again based on the corresponding hold information. In addition, when the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored during the execution of the demonstration display (4) using the effect symbol 530, the demonstration symbol (4) is forcibly terminated to display the effect symbol 530. Is deleted, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the three-scale ball holding information.

[Pseudo-ream]
FIG. 175 is a diagram for describing a pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream executed based on jewel hold information) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 175 (A), in the display area 4A, when a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 is displayed. Assume that the stored three-scale ball holding information is two as an example, and two three-sized balls are displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 accordingly. Further, it is assumed that there are two pieces of gem hold information as an example, and two gems are displayed in the gem hold display area 710. Further, it is assumed that “pseudo continuous variation 1 pseudo continuous 2” is determined as the production pattern. In the present embodiment, as the effect pattern in which the effect related to the pseudo ream is executed based on the jewel hold information, “pseudo continuous variation 1 pseudo ream 2”, “pseudo continuous variation 2 pseudo ream 2”, “pseudo ream” Fluctuation 1 Pseudo train 2 small hits, “Pseudo train variation 2 Pseudo train 2 small hits”, “Pseudo train variation 1 Pseudo train 2 big hits”, “Pseudo train fluctuation 2 Pseudo train 2 big hits”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed as a lost symbol, the display of the three ball in the three ball display area 600 is erased.

  Thereafter, in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three shackle ball hold information is shifted one by one, and one three shackle ball hold information is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. At this time, it is assumed that an effect pattern including “pseudo-continuous 2” is determined based on the symbols included in the three-scale ball holding information and the winning determination result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), in the display area 4A, the three-scale balls are displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, and the first decoration pattern 500 is displayed based on the determined effect pattern. The change display of is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), when a predetermined time has elapsed, the first variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is finished, and the decorative symbol 500 is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the variation time based on the variation pattern has not yet been reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (E), since the effect pattern including “pseudo ream 2” is executed, the gem hold display area 710 is displayed so that the gem is shifted by one in the left direction. Accordingly, the jewel display area 700 is displayed as if one jewel has moved. At this time, the three-scale balls in the three-scale ball display area 600 are erased. Then, in the display area 4A, the second variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the effect pattern. At this time, the jewel displayed so as to move from the jewel hold display area 710 to the jewel display area 700 is determined using the jewel hold display pattern determination table (see FIG. 126) when passing through the lost mouth 242. Presents a display color. The display color of the jewel indicates the degree of expectation according to the hold information digested next when the jewel hold information is established.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), when the variation time based on the variation pattern has elapsed, the display of the three-scale ball in the three-scale ball display region 600 is erased, and the display of the gem in the gem display region 700 Is deleted, and the decorative pattern 500 is finalized when the second variation display of the decorative pattern 500 is completed. That is, the effect display of the pseudo ream 2 ends. As described above, in the effect pattern including “pseudo-continuation 2”, the variation display and the stop display of the decorative design 500 are performed pseudo two times while digesting one jewel. In addition, in this embodiment, the effect which concerns on the pseudo | simulation ream which does not use jewelry reservation information is also provided. For example, an effect pattern (“Fireworks Reach Pseudo Ren 2”, etc.) defined by the name “... Leach Pseudo Ren…” corresponds to a pseudo-rendation that does not use gem holding information. When this effect is executed, the central symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a special “pseudo-continuous symbol” (for example, a character image “NEXT”) when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

[Fireworks master look-ahead notice]
FIG. 176 and FIG. 177 are diagrams for explaining the fireworks prefetching notice by the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 176 (A), in the display area 4A, when a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 is displayed. Assume that the stored three-scale ball holding information is two as an example, and two three-sized balls are displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 accordingly.

  At this time, when the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored according to the start winning prize, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), the third position from the left of the first three-size ball holding display area 610 (holding order). Is a third position), and a three-scale ball corresponding to the three-size ball holding information is additionally displayed. In this example, when determining the production pattern based on the start prize, it is determined that the fireworker pre-reading notice (the prize-holding information target) is executed as the production corresponding to the three-scale ball holding information. . In the following explanation, as the contents of the fireworks pre-reading notice (targeted for winning hold information), the final display number of fireworks (2 in this example), the initial display (4 in this example), the shakudama hold It is assumed that a fireworker reduction pattern corresponding to the order (in this example, a reduction pattern of “−1” → “−1” → “0”) is determined. For this reason, when the latest three-scale ball holding information is established, four fireworks 800 as the initial display number are displayed. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute the pyrotechnic decrease gaze pattern, the color scheme of the pyrotechnician, and the promotion pattern. In addition, when it is decided that fireworks master pre-reading notice (existing hold information target) will be executed, the existing three shakudama hold information stored prior to being stored according to the current start winning prize is the target The contents of the production are determined in the same manner as described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (C), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is fixedly displayed, and the display of the three-scale balls in the three-scale ball display area 600 is erased. By the time the display of such a three-scale ball is erased, the initial display number of four pyrotechnicians 800 is displayed as if one has decreased according to the pyrotechnician reduction pattern.

  Next, in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three shank ball hold information is shifted one by one, and one three shank ball hold information stored in the hold information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 is the hold information. Stored in the storage area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), in the display area 4A, the three-scale balls are displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, and the decorative design is based on the corresponding three-scale ball holding information. 500 variable displays are started. Further, in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, unless the three-size ball holding information is newly stored, the three-sized ball is displayed as if it has been moved to the left and decreased. At this time, the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is positioned second in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 as the holding order.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), the decoration symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed in the display area 4A, and the display of the three-scale balls in the three-scale ball display area 600 is erased. By the time the display of such a three-scale ball is erased, the number of three fireworkers 800 is further reduced by one based on the fireworker reduction pattern, so that two people are displayed. Even if the number of pyrotechnicians 800 is reduced in this way, there is a possibility that it is displayed as if it is apparently reduced according to the pyrotechnic decrease gaze pattern. In such a case, the decorative pattern 500 from the next time onward is displayed. When the change is displayed, a display is made so that fireworks for the number of people who have decreased are restored.

  Next, in the holding information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three shackle ball holding information is shifted by one, and one three shaku ball holding information stored in the holding information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 is stored in the holding information storage area. Stored in the area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (F), in the display area 4A, the three-scale balls are displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, and the decorative design is based on the corresponding three-scale ball holding information. 500 variable displays are started. Further, in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, unless the three-size ball holding information is newly stored, the three-size ball is displayed as if it has been moved to the left and decreased. At this time, the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is positioned first in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 as the holding order.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (G), the decoration symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed in the display area 4A, and the display of the three-scale balls in the three-scale ball display area 600 is erased. At this time, since the fireworker 800, which was two last time, does not decrease based on the decrease pattern, two people who are the final display number are displayed as they are.

  Next, the three-scale ball holding information remaining in the holding information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 as a target of the pre-reading notice is transferred to the holding information storage area. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 176 (H), in the display area 4A, the three shaku balls in the first three shaku ball holding display area 610 disappear and the three shaku balls are displayed in the three shaku ball display area 600. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the corresponding three-scale ball holding information. Further, in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, the three-sized ball is not additionally displayed unless the new three-size ball holding information is stored. At this time, the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is located in the three-scale ball display area 60. Then, the pyrotechnician 800 on which two persons who will be the final display number are displayed is watched as the subject of the production related to the reserved promotion.

  In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the three-scale ball holding information that is the target of the pre-reading notice, the holding promotion consisting of the final display number of the fireworkers 800 is executed. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 177 (I) and (J), in the display area 4A, the first one of the fireworkers finally displayed fires the three shaku balls in the three shaku ball display area 600. An effect is produced in which the display color is changed. FIG. 177 (J) shows a state in which the display color of the three-scale ball is changed from white to green as an example based on the promotion pattern determined using the promotion pattern determination table.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 177 (K) and (L), the display area 4A is finally displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 based on the three-scale ball holding information to be prefetched. There is an effect in which one person who remains at the end of the fireworker further ignites the three-scale ball in the three-scale ball display area 600 to change its display color. In FIG. 177 (L), the variation display mode of the decorative symbol 500 is a reach mode, and the display color of the three-scale ball is changed from green to red as an example based on the promotion pattern determined using the promotion pattern determination table. The change is shown. Note that the display color of the three-scale ball may not change depending on the promotion pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177 (M), when the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed as, for example, “555”, which shows the jackpot symbol, the jackpot gaming state is set, and as shown in FIG. 177 (N), the display is made. In the area 4A, a “big hit” image 540 indicating the start of the big hit is displayed instead of the decorative design 500. According to such a fireworker look-ahead notice, the higher the final display number of fireworkers, the more the number of executions of hold promotion, the more likely the display color of the three-scale ball will change to a higher color due to the hold promotion. Since it increases, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of fireworks and the display color of the three shawls.

[Advance notice of holding information display role]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining the hold information display combination prefetching notice by the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178 (A), in the display area 4A, when a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 is displayed. Assume that the stored three-scale ball holding information is three as an example, and three three-sized balls are displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 according to this. Note that the hold information display combination pre-reading notice is also reflected from the time of starting winning, similarly to the fireworker pre-reading notice (winning hold information target) described above.

  At this time, when the three-scale ball holding information is newly stored according to the start winning prize, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), the fourth position from the left of the first three-size ball holding display area 610 (holding order). Is the fourth position), and a three-scale ball corresponding to the three-size ball holding information is additionally displayed. Further, in this example, it is determined that the hold information display character pre-reading notice is executed as an effect corresponding to the three shawl ball holding information corresponding to the starting winning prize, and the final display color ( Red in this example), a hold display change pattern (in this example, a hold display change pattern of “white” → “green” → “red” → “rainbow”), a hold information display accessory movable pattern, and the like are determined. As a result, the first display color of the three shaku balls is “white”. In the present embodiment, the display color always changes when the blades of the movable effect member 42A protrude.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed, and the display of the three balls in the three balls display area 600 is erased. At this time, the three-scale ball that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is located in the fourth of the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 as the holding order. Then, the movable effect member 42A appears so as to overlap with the fourth three-scale ball, and the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A emits green light based on the hold display change pattern. At this time, the display color of the fourth three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is also changed to green based on the hold display change pattern, but the display color is difficult to visually recognize by the movable effect member 42A. Further, the movable effect member 42A may swing up and down or left and right based on the hold information display accessory movable pattern. It should be noted that the display color of the three-scale balls may be visible when the movable effect member 42A is retracted and does not overlap therewith. Alternatively, only the display color of the three-scale ball may change without the movable effect member 42A appearing at all.

  Next, in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three shackle ball hold information is shifted one by one, and the first three shaku ball hold information stored in the hold information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 is the hold. Stored in the information storage area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), in the display area 4A, the three-scale balls are displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, and the decorative design is based on the corresponding three-scale ball holding information. 500 variable displays are started. Further, in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, unless the three-size ball holding information is newly stored, the three-sized ball is displayed as if it has been moved to the left and decreased. At this time, the three-scale ball that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is located at the third position in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 as the holding order. Then, the movable effect member 42 </ b> A moves in the left direction so as to overlap with the third three-scale ball. At this time, the light emitting lens 42 </ b> B of the movable effect member 42 </ b> A emits green light based on the hold display change pattern. The display color is green based on.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (E), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed, and the display of the three balls in the three balls display area 600 is erased. Also at this time, the movable effect member 42A is in a state where it overlaps with the three-scale ball (third) that is the target of the pre-reading notice. At this time, the display color of the three-scale ball may be made visible by retracting the movable effect member 42A. In addition, the display color of the three-scale ball is basically changed to a higher color by reserve promotion, but may be changed to a lower color.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 178 (F), when the three-scale ball that is the object of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, and the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed accordingly, finally. The movable effect member 42A moves to the position of the three measure ball display area 600 so as to overlap with the three measure balls, and the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A has a final color based on the hold display change pattern. Emits red light. At this time, the display color of the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is changed to the same color as that of the light emitting lens 42B based on the hold display change pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (G), in the display area 4A, the variation display mode of the decorative design 500 becomes the reach mode. At this time, the movable effect member 42A swings up and down based on the hold information display accessory movable pattern or protrudes the blade in a state where it overlaps the three-scale ball display area 600, and the rainbow based on the final display color pattern. The color changes. FIG. 178 (G) shows a state in which the movable effect member 42A has changed its color to rainbow by projecting the blades. In this case, the three-dimensional ball may be made visible by retracting the movable effect member, and the display color of the three-scale ball may be different from the emission color of the light-emitting lens. Further, only the display color of the three-scale ball may be changed without the movable effect member 42A appearing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (H), when the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed as, for example, “222” indicating the jackpot symbol, it becomes a jackpot gaming state. Although not particularly shown, in the display area 4A, Instead of the decorative symbol 500, a “big hit” image indicating the start of the big hit is displayed. According to such hold information display combination pre-reading notice, the display color of the light emitting lens 42B and the three-scale ball changes to a higher color as the number of hold information increases and the number of appearances of the movable effect member 42A increases. Since the possibility increases, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be increased according to these display colors. In addition, during execution of the hold information display role pre-reading notice, even when the hold information becomes 5 or more, the state in which the four three shaku balls are individually displayed in the first three shaku ball holding display area is maintained, The 5 to 8 th three-dimensional balls are displayed in the second three-dimensional ball holding display area according to the number.

[Advance notice of changes in the number of pending information]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the pending information number change prefetching notice by the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179 (A), in the display area 4A, when a three-scale ball is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 and the decorative symbol 500 is being displayed in a variable manner, the three-scale ball is displayed according to the start winning prize. When the hold information is newly stored, the three shank balls corresponding to the three shank ball hold information are displayed at the fourth position from the left of the first three shaku ball hold display area 610 (the hold position is the fourth position). It is additionally displayed. In this example, it is determined that the reservation information number change look-ahead notice is executed as an effect corresponding to the three-scale ball holding information corresponding to the start winning prize, and the final display color of the three-size ball (in this example) Red), a hold display change pattern (in this example, a hold display change pattern of “white” → “green”), and the like. Note that when the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is first displayed in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610, the display color is always white.

  Then, while the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed, if three-scale ball holding information is newly stored in accordance with the start winning prize, as shown in FIG. 179 (B), the first three-ball ball holding display area 610 is displayed. The display of the three shaku balls from the second to the fourth position from the left is erased, and the three shaku balls corresponding to these including the newly stored amount are collectively displayed in the second three shaku ball holding display area 620. The That is, the three shaku balls that are subject to the pre-reading notice are included in the three shaku balls that are displayed together in the second three shaku ball holding display area 620.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (C), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is fixedly displayed, and the display of the three-scale balls in the three-scale ball display area 600 is erased.

  Then, unless the three-scale ball hold information is newly stored, the three-size ball hold information corresponding to the next three-size ball displayed in the three-size ball display area 600 is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. The number of the three-scale ball holding information thus obtained is four, less than five. As a result, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), the collective display for the four three-scale balls in the second three-scale ball holding display area 620 is erased, and the four three-scale balls are displayed in the first three It is redisplayed in the shakudama hold display area 610. Then, in the three-scale ball display area 600, the next three-scale ball is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the corresponding three-scale ball holding information. At this time, the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is positioned in the third position of the first three-size ball holding display area 610 as the holding order, and the third three-sized ball was initially displayed in white. Is displayed again as if it moved from the second three-scale ball hold display area 620 to the first three-size ball hold display area 610, the display color of the three-size balls changes to green based on the hold display change pattern. Be made. In addition, in the state where the three shaku balls are displayed in the second three shaku ball holding display area, when one three shaku ball is erased, the three shaku balls in the second three shaku ball holding display area are not erased. However, when there is a three-sized ball displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area, the display color of the three-sized ball may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed, and the display of the three balls in the three balls display area 600 is erased.

  When such an operation is repeatedly performed and, as shown in FIG. 179 (F), when the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600, finally, this three-scale ball The display color of the ball is changed to green based on the hold display change pattern. It should be noted that the display color of the three-scale ball changes only once when it is redisplayed as if it has moved from the second three-size ball holding display area to the first three-size ball holding display area. However, the display color may be changed twice or more.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (G), in the display area 4A, the variation display mode of the decorative design 500 becomes the reach mode. Thereby, the player can wait for the final display of the decorative symbol 500 while visually recognizing the state in which the display color of the three-scale ball has finally changed to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (H), when the decorative symbol 500 is confirmed and displayed as, for example, a lost symbol, the next three ball is moved and displayed in the three ball ball display area 600, although not particularly shown. The variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started again. According to such a pre-change notice of the number of reserved information, the first three-scale ball holding display is not performed when the three-color ball is initially displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610, but the display color does not change. Since the display color of the three-scale ball may change from white to a different color when it is moved and displayed from the region 610 to the first three-size ball reservation display area 610 again through the second three-size ball reservation display area 620. The player can play a game while aiming for the number of pieces of pending information to be five or more. In addition, even when the number of held information is reduced from 5 or more to 4 and the 3 shaku balls are moved and displayed in the first 3 shaku ball holding display area 610, the display color of the 3 shaku balls is expected to change. The expectation for the big hit can be increased by changing the display color.

<Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
A modification of the fifth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same or similar points as those described above is omitted.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
As shown in FIG. 180, specifications according to the modification of the fifth embodiment are substantially the same as those shown in FIG. 98, but differ in the following points. That is, the number of hit patterns 1 to 6 is the same as that shown in FIG. 98, but a plurality of types of big hit symbols and probability variation patterns are associated with each of hit patterns 1 to 5. When such a plurality of types of jackpot symbols and probability variation patterns are provided, the following special symbol variation pattern determination table and effect pattern determination table are constructed.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
181 to 185 show modifications of the special symbol variation pattern determination table. 181 and 182 show the first special symbol variation pattern determination table, and FIGS. 183 to 185 show the second special symbol variation pattern determination table. Here, as shown in FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the short game state at the time of probability change (when the number of holds is 1 to 8), In addition to those corresponding to 1 to 100 times, those corresponding to ST 101 to 174 times, and those corresponding to ST 175 to 184 times, a specific number of fluctuations occurred between ST 1 to 100 times. The case corresponding to the case, the case corresponding to the case where the specific fluctuation number occurs between ST101 to 174 times, and the case corresponding to the case where the specific fluctuation number occurs between ST175 to 184 times. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table includes a hit type determination result (loss, small hit, big hit (probability variation 1 to 3)), and a random time determination random number (0 to 0). 99), various variation patterns, variation times, and variation pattern designation commands (h1 to h34). As shown in FIGS. 183 to 185, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the hit type determination result (loss, small hit, big hit (probability variation 1 to 11)), and the variation time determination random number (0 to 0). 99), various variation patterns, variation times, and variation pattern designation commands (h1 to h61).

  For example, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 184 (ST101 to 174 times, probability change time short hold counts 1 to 8), the hit type determination result is “big hit (probability variation 1 to 4)” and the variation time is determined. When any one of random numbers “25” to “49” is extracted, a “big hit variation pattern 19” having a variation time of 180 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern indicating that fact The designated command “h51” is generated. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 185 (specific variation number (ST101 to 174 times) probability variation time short hold number 1 to 8), the hit type determination result is “losing” and for variation time determination. When any of the random numbers “0” to “89” is extracted, the “reach loss variation pattern 14” whose variation time is 180 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern designation indicating that Command “h57” is generated.

  Such a second special symbol variation pattern determination table is used for the early stage (1 to 100 times) of the short game state at the time of probability change, one used for the middle stage (101 to 174 times), and the last stage (175 to 184). In the beginning, the fluctuation time is short on average, the fluctuation time is long in the middle, and the fluctuation time is longer in the middle than on the beginning. It is determined to be shorter. Further, as the second special symbol variation pattern determination table, different tables are used for the specific variation times in the early stage, the middle stage, and the final stage, and they are generally longer in all cases. In short, it is determined whether it falls within the specific number of fluctuations in the early, middle, and final stages of the probable short-time gaming state. If it falls into the specific number of fluctuations, the fluctuation time will inevitably become longer. .

[Direction pattern determination table]
186 and 187 show a second effect pattern determination table used in the ST mode. The second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the ST mode corresponds to each of the ST modes (1), (2), and (3), and the high expectation effect is not obtained with the specific number of fluctuations of the ST mode (1). Corresponding to each of the execution time and when the high expectation effect has been executed, and corresponding to each when the high expectation effect has not been executed and when the high expectation effect has been executed with the specific number of fluctuations in the ST mode (2). In the ST mode (3), the number of specific fluctuations is divided into those corresponding to when the high expectation effect has not been executed and when the high expectation effect has been executed. Here, the ST mode (1) means that the number of times of special symbol variation display corresponds to 1 to 100 times, and the ST mode (2) corresponds to the number of times of special symbol variation display 101 to 174 times. The ST mode (3) means that the number of times of special symbol variation display corresponds to 175 to 184 times.

  For example, in the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (2)) shown in FIG. 186, when “reach loss change pattern 10” is specified by the change pattern specifying command “h47”, the effect determination random number “0” is set. When any one of “19” is extracted, “Fireworks door break reach door red” is determined as a specific effect pattern, and any of the effect determination random numbers “20” to “99” is extracted Is determined as “fireworks door breakthrough reach door blue” as an effect pattern that does not correspond to the specific effect pattern. As a specific performance pattern, “Women's Door Breakthrough Reach Door Red” is also applicable. The specific effect pattern is also defined in the second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the ST mode (1) and the ST mode (3). In ST mode (1), “One-shot button reach large button” and “Triple button reach large button” correspond to the specific effect pattern, and in ST mode (3) “door break reach reach” corresponds to the specific effect pattern. . Furthermore, the specific effect pattern is also defined in the second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the high expectation effect non-execution with the specific number of fluctuations in the ST modes (1) to (3) shown in FIG. As described above, the degree of expectation for jackpot is calculated by dividing the number of effect determination random numbers at the time of jackpot by the total number of effect determination random numbers at the time of jackpot and loss. Thus, for example, in the case of “one-shot button reach large button”, the probability of losing is 10/100 based on “Leach Loss Fluctuation Pattern 7”, and the probability of being a big hit based on “Big Hit Fluctuation Pattern 15” is 50/100. Therefore, when the expectation degree of jackpot is calculated as a relative ratio thereof, it is about 83%. In the case of “Fireworks Door Breakthrough Reach Door Red”, the probability of losing based on “Leach Loss Fluctuation Pattern 10” is 20/100, and the probability of winning a big hit based on “Big Hit Fluctuation Pattern 19” is 80/100. Therefore, when the expected degree of jackpot is calculated as a relative proportion of these, it is 80%. Therefore, the production pattern of “one-shot button reach large button” or “firework door breakthrough reach red” corresponds to “high expectation production” (specific production pattern). On the other hand, in the case of “Fireworks Door Breakthrough Reach Door Blue”, the probability of losing based on the “Leach Loss Fluctuation Pattern 10” is 80/100, and the probability of winning a big hit based on the “Big Hit Fluctuation Pattern 19” is 20/100. Therefore, when the expected degree of jackpot is calculated as a relative proportion of these, it is 20%. Therefore, the production pattern of “Fireworks Door Breakthrough Reach Door Blue” does not correspond to “High Expectation Production” (specific production pattern). Thus, even in the second effect pattern determination table according to the modification, an effect pattern in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is approximately 60% or more is defined as a “high expectation effect” (specific effect pattern).

  In short, the number of specific fluctuations corresponding to each of the early, middle, and final stages of the short game state during probability change is determined, and when the number of specific fluctuations is reached, the second effect pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 187 is used. As a result, in the ST modes (1) to (3), if the specific effect pattern has never been executed before reaching the specific change count, the specific effect pattern is necessarily executed at the specific change count. . For example, the specific number of fluctuations is as follows. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the winning symbol flag and the specific variation count is defined in advance. In the case of “first special symbol big hit probability variation 1 (01H)”, the specific variation count “1” and “first special symbol”. In the case of big hit probability variation 2 (02H), the specific variation number “50”, in the case of “first special symbol big hit probability variation 3 (03H)”, the specific variation number “100”, “second special symbol big hit probability variation 1 (04H)” ”For specific variation number“ 30 ”,“ 2nd special symbol big hit probability variation 2 (05H) ”for specific variation number“ 70 ”,“ second special symbol big hit probability variation 3 (06H) ”for specific variation In the case of the number of times “110”, “2nd special symbol big hit probability variation 4 (07H)”, in the case of “the second special symbol big hit probability variation 5 (08H)”, the specific variation number “50”, “ Second special symbol jackpot change 6 (09H) " In the case of the specific variation number “120”, “the second special symbol big hit probability variation 7 (0AH)”, the specific variation number “180”, in the case of “the second special symbol big hit probability variation 8 (0BH)”, the specific variation number “ “60”, “2nd special symbol big hit probability variation 9 (0CH)”, the specific variation number “70”, “second special symbol big hit probability variation 10 (0DH)”, the specific variation number “130”, “second” In the case of “special symbol big hit probability variation 11 (0EH)”, the specific variation number is “140”.

  According to such a modification of the fifth embodiment, the specific effect pattern related to the high expectation effect is executed in any of the ST modes (1) to (3). The feeling of loss does not increase without the specific performance pattern being executed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced by the performance effect. Also, since the types of jackpot symbols are increased, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the execution timing of the specific effect pattern even when paying attention to the hit pattern, and this can also enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment.

  According to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to execute from the time when the hold information subject to the fireworks master pre-reading notice and the hold information display role pre-reading notice becomes valid, but after the target holding information is established, the future For example, a fireworks teacher pre-reading notice or a holding information display character pre-reading notice may be executed on condition that one piece of holding information in order is digested. In addition, if the fireworks master pre-reading notice and the hold information display feature pre-reading notice cannot be executed in time from the time when the target hold information is established, the execution of the effects related to these pre-read notices will be performed. Sometimes it may be executed. For example, if the hold information is established immediately before the end of the variable symbol display of special symbols, it is not possible to temporally execute an effect that the pyrotechnician decreases or an effect that operates the movable effect member or changes the display color. When the hold information is established, the effect may be executed at the time when the effects are completed, and the effect may be executed in a normal manner after the next hold information is consumed. In addition, the “fireworks pre-reading notice” and the “holding information display character pre-reading notice” are displayed after the first time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the establishment of the holding information that is the target of the pre-reading notice. The fireworks master pre-reading notice is executed for 3 seconds, and the “holding information display pre-reading notice” is 4 seconds). When the holding information is established, the sum of the first time and the second time is used. However, if it is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the symbol that is being variably displayed at the time when the hold information is established, the pre-read notice may be changed to a mode after a predetermined period. For example, if the number of fireworkers displayed in the “fireworks pre-reading notice” decreases, a fireworker corresponding to the number of people displayed after the reduction from the time condition is displayed as a production shortcut. When the display color changes in the “pre-fetching advance notice”, the movable effect member may overlap the target hold image with the display color changed immediately after the start winning is established. Also, even at each change when the pre-reading notice is executed, an effect based on the change pattern determined as the change time is executed, but if the time during which the effect can be executed exceeds the change time, a similar effect shortcut is used. You may make it perform. Such a prefetch notice can be applied not only to the fifth embodiment but also to the fourth embodiment.

  Further, according to the fifth embodiment, when any one pre-reading notice is executed for a plurality of types of pre-reading notices, other pre-reading notices are not executed. More than one type of prefetching notice may be executed in combination. Examples of the composite pattern are as follows.

(Composite pattern 1)
For example, in the case where “fireworks pre-reading notice” and “holding information display character pre-reading notice” are executed in combination, the movable effect member is moved so as to overlap the three shank balls subject to the pre-reading notice. When the shaku ball is displayed in the hold display area, an effect display operation related to hold promotion is performed such that a fireworker performs an action on the 3 shaku ball, and the move effect member holds the hold for each effect display operation. Appearing so as to overlap the display area, operations such as deformation can be performed.

(Composite pattern 2)
In addition, when the “fireworks pre-reading notice” and the “preservation information count change pre-reading notice” are executed in combination, a fireworker appears on the condition that the number of pieces of hold information has become four or less. Fireworks teacher look-ahead notice can be executed by reducing the number of teachers. In this case, there may be a situation where the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the hold display area without the number of hold information being less than 4, but when such a situation occurs, It is desirable not to execute fireworks pre-reading notice as cancellation.

(Composite pattern 3)
Furthermore, when the “holding information display role prefetching notice” and the “holding information number change prefetching notice” are executed in combination, the prefetching notice is subject to the condition that the number of holding information has become four or less. It can be moved so that a movable production | generation member may overlap with the 3 scale ball which becomes.

(Composite pattern 4)
Furthermore, all the prefetching notices such as “fireworks prefetching notice”, “holding information display character prefetching notice”, and “holding information number change prefetching notice” may be executed in combination. In this case, for example, on the condition that the number of the hold information is 4 or less, the fireworker may appear, and the movable effect member may be moved so as to overlap the three-scale ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice. .

  In addition, as a pre-reading notice composite pattern, a plurality of composite patterns may have different expectations for the big hit. For example, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be changed in the order of composite pattern 4> composite pattern 3> composite pattern 2> composite pattern 1.

  As an execution mode of the prefetching notice, it may be possible to change to another type of prefetching notice while executing one prefetching notice. In this case, for example, it is preferable that the information may be changed to a different type of pre-reading notice only when the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice corresponds to the jackpot confirmation.

  In addition, as the execution mode of the pre-reading notice, a lottery for determining whether or not to end the pre-reading notice during the pre-reading notice is performed every time the hold information is consumed, and the pre-reading notice is determined according to the lottery result. You may make it complete | finish in the middle of execution. In this case, when the hold information that is the target of the prefetch notice indicates a big hit, it is preferable to complete the prefetch notice without winning the lottery.

  With regard to “fireworks prefetching advance notice”, an effect (effect pattern) being executed may be promoted to a different effect.

  The production pattern is different in at least a part of the production mode every time the name is different. For example, the display mode may be different, but the voice and light modes may be the same.

  The pseudo-ream based on the jewel hold information may perform two or more temporary stop displays (three or more fluctuation displays).

  The “holding information number change pre-reading notice” can also be applied to those that have only one special symbol. For example, when the upper limit number of holds is 4, up to 2 hold images are individually displayed in the first hold display area, and when the hold information becomes 3 or more, the corresponding hold image is displayed in the second hold display area. In the second hold display area, for example, a hold image with a notation of “× 2” is displayed, and the display that has been provisionally determined on the condition that the hold information has been reduced by one in three or more states The reserved image may be displayed in a manner.

  The size of the reserved image that overlaps the movable effect member may be larger or smaller than the outer shape of the movable effect member, or may be the same size.

  For an effect pattern in which “button” is included in the name of the effect pattern, the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in response to an operation such as a push button.

  "Pre-reading notice" is executed from the establishment of the hold information until the decorative display of the decorative symbol based on the hold information is displayed, but from the establishment of the hold information to before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold information It is good also as what is done.

  Demo display (1) to (4) may be executable in any production mode.

  For example, an accessory with reels with numbers such as “1”, “2”, “3” on the outer periphery (reel accessory) is provided, and the reels are stopped multiple times during one special symbol change. A history of numbers that are displayed and stopped can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and the expected degree of change according to the mode of the history may be suggested.

  In addition, an effect pattern in which button operations can be performed a plurality of times (for example, three times) is provided, and in this effect pattern, every time the player performs a button operation, for example, (A) image, (B) image, (C) image Any one of the plurality of images may be displayed, and the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by a combination of the images displayed three times.

  In the above embodiment, the big prize opening shutter or shutter surface protrudes / retracts in the front / rear direction, tilts in the front / rear direction, and slides in the left / right direction to open / close the big prize opening or around the vertical axis. The prize winning opening can be opened and closed by turning, or the two prize winning shutters can be arranged in parallel, and the distance between the two prize winning shutters can be increased when opened to open and close the prize winning opening. May be.

  The surface shape of the prize winning shutter or the shutter surface may be a serrated rough surface, an uneven surface, a wavy surface, or a shape in which a plurality of convex portions are discretely arranged on the entire surface. According to this, the traveling speed of the game ball can be decelerated more effectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special winning opening has a characteristic configuration. For example, the above-described large winning opening shutter or the same shutter surface is applied to a blade member as an ordinary electric accessory, and the start opening is overloaded. You may make it possible to make a winning and control corresponding to this.

  Regarding the traveling speed of the game ball expressed in the description of the above embodiment, “decelerate” means that the game ball also stops.

  As another example of the third to fifth modifications, the entire area covered with the members constituting the stage (the upper stage, the main stage, etc.) may be used as the big prize opening.

  In the case where a plurality of large winning openings are provided, the prescribed number of winnings may be different for each large winning opening or the number of winning balls may be different. For example, as another example of the second modified example, for the first grand prize opening, the prescribed number of winnings per round is five, the number of winning balls per winning is five, etc. For example, the prescribed number of winnings per round may be 10 and the number of winning balls per winning may be 15 or the like.

  When winning a prize exceeding the prescribed number of winnings by Interpal during the round, for example, the following opening / closing pattern in which the estimated number of winnings at the first opening and the estimated number of winnings at the opening after closing during the round are changed May be provided. Specifically, when the number of specified winnings per round is 10, an opening / closing pattern in which the estimated number of winnings is 8 at the first opening and the estimated number of winnings is 4 at the opening, and the first opening An opening / closing pattern may be provided in which the estimated number of winnings is sometimes six and the estimated number of winnings is six at the time of later opening. According to such an opening / closing pattern, it is possible to realize specifications in which the number of over winnings is the same but the over winning process itself is different.

  In addition, the launch timing at which the number of winnings can be expected may be notified every time when the big winning opening is closed before the round game is executed. Thereby, even if the launch operation is stopped halfway in the big hit gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the over winning can not be realized.

  In addition, regarding the notification of the scheduled grant quantity, when a plurality of big prize winning openings are opened in one big hit gaming state, the number corresponding to each big winning prize may be notified. For example, the total number of scheduled grants is “2500”, the planned number of winning balls based on winning in the first grand prize opening is “1500”, and the number of scheduled winning balls based on winning in the second big winning opening When the number is “1000”, a notification is made so that the scheduled number of winning balls for the first winning prize opening is displayed as “1500” and the scheduled number of winning balls for the second winning prize opening is displayed as “1000”. Can do.

  As a modified example of the small hit probability, for example, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have a higher probability than the other. In this case, the one with a low probability of winning includes those that do not win the winning (0% winning probability). In addition, for those who have a high probability of winning a small hit, there is no possibility of not winning a small hit, and it may be a probability that all winnings other than the big win will be won. For example, when the update range of the random number for hit determination is 0 to 255, the big hit probability may be 1/256 and the small hit probability may be 255/256.

  As a modified example of the lottery related to the opening of the second start opening (ordinary symbol game lottery), a game ball is detected by a passing gate switch in one or both of a non-short game state and a short-time game state Even if it opens, you may make it determine any one of whether to open uniquely, without performing the lottery which concerns on the opening. For example, in the non-short-time gaming state, it may be always unopened without lottery, and in the short-time gaming state, it may be always opened without lottery. If only one of the non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state is selected as a non-lottery game, and the person corresponding to the non-lottery is in the non-short-time gaming state, it will be released by lottery. In the case where the person corresponding to the no lottery is in the short-time gaming state, a case where the lottery is not released in the non-short-time gaming state may be provided. That is, it is only necessary that the time-short gaming state has a higher probability of opening than the non-time-short gaming state. Moreover, about the opening pattern of a blade member, two or more types, such as opening for 1 second x 1 time, opening for 2 seconds x 2 times, etc., are provided. You may make it perform a lottery about which open pattern to use.

  When the variation example of the lottery relating to the small hit probability and the opening of the second start port described above is applied to each of the above-described embodiments, for example, if there are two prescribed winning numbers in the small hit, before the big winning port is opened With the interval between rounds or the interval between rounds between the opening of the big prize opening, it is possible to realize three or more over-winnings exceeding the prescribed number of winnings even in a small hit. For example, the big hit probability of the second special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 255/256, and in the non-short game state, the lottery is not released and in the short-time game state, it is opened in the no lottery. In such a case, in the short-time gaming state, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by small hits, and the game performance can be further developed. In addition, when the big hit probability of the first special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 1/256, and the probability of losing is 254/256, the interval between rounds before the big winning opening is opened or between the opening of the big winning opening With an interval during the round, it is possible to win three or more over-winnings that exceed the prescribed number of winnings even with small hits that are infrequent.

  As a display related to the big winning opening shutter and winning a prize, for example, by providing a ball detection sensor near the left end and near the right end, the expected winning number per round and the actual winning number are notified by a bar graph-like meter display or numerical display. You may make it do. For example, during a predetermined period until the big winning opening is opened, when a game ball is detected by the right-side ball detection sensor, the expected winning number is added and updated by meter display or numerical display, while the left-side ball detection is detected. When the game ball is detected by the sensor, the expected number of winnings is subtracted and updated by meter display or numerical display, and when the big winning opening is opened, the updated numerical value is presented according to the numerical value. For example, a display mode such as “maximum winning!”, “Medium winning!”, Or “small winning” may be performed.

  A single winning prize opening may be provided with a plurality of stage members (upper stage, main stage, etc.).

  The special winning opening may be provided with a specific area therein, and when a game ball passes through the specific area in the big hit gaming state, it may be shifted to the probability changing gaming state.

  As a gaming machine, it can also be applied to a gaming machine including a pachislot machine, a roulette machine, or a slot machine.

  Needless to say, those according to the above-described embodiments and modifications can be combined as appropriate.

  Based on the above embodiment or modification, the basic configuration and operational effects of the present invention will be listed below as supplementary notes.

(Appendix A1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A direction changing device (for example, the direction changing device 110) capable of changing the rolling direction of the game medium in the game area,
The direction changing device is:
Receiving a plurality of game media to change their rolling direction and receiving a plurality of received game media through a first discharge area (for example, the discharge port 111B) by a predetermined number (for example, a receiver (for example, Kroon 111),
A posture changing mechanism (for example, a plurality of game media received by the receiver can be discharged through the second discharge region (for example, the upper surface opening 111C) by changing the posture of the receiver according to the number of received game media. , Seesaw mechanism 112),
It is characterized by having.

  According to such a configuration, the plurality of game balls are received by the crune 111, a state where a predetermined number of game balls are discharged through the discharge port 111B, and a state where the plurality of game balls are discharged together through the upper surface opening 111C. Since it can be generated, the behavior change of the game sphere is rich, and it is possible to make the player interested in the trend of the game sphere.

(Appendix A2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
The receptor has a main body (for example, main body 111A) having a concave interior,
The first discharge region is formed so as to penetrate from the inside of the main body portion to the outside,
The second discharge area is an area different from the first discharge area, and is formed so that a plurality of game media can be discharged from the inside of the main body to the outside.
The posture changing mechanism is
A posture change member (for example, arm 112A) provided with the receptor on one end side and a weight member (for example, balance weight 112B) on the other end side;
A support member (for example, a support shaft 113) that supports the posture changing member so that the one end side of the posture changing member can be displaced to a first position and a second position lower than the first position;
Have
The posture changing member is
When the game medium is not received by the receiver, the weight member is supported so that the one end side is positioned at the first position,
When a predetermined number or more of game media is received by the receptor, the one end side is supported by the weight of the game media so as to be positioned at the second position,
The receptor is
When the one end side is located at the first position, the game medium received in the main body can be discharged through the first discharge area while allowing the game medium to roll inside.
When the one end side is located at the second position, the game medium received inside the main body can be discharged through the second discharge area.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game rich in changes in the behavior of the game ball with a simple mechanism without using a driving means such as a motor, and the weight of the received game ball and the weight of the balance weight 112B. Accordingly, the support posture of the arm 112A changes, and if one end of the arm 112A is displaced from a high position to a low position, it is possible to be interested in the fact that many game balls are discharged from the clown 111. A novel gimmick that is rich in behavioral changes can be realized.

(Appendix A3)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
A passing area provided in the gaming area, through which a game medium can pass (for example, a special prize opening 37);
A game value giving means (for example, a payout device 83) capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the passing area;
When the posture is changed by the posture change mechanism, the receiver is in a posture in which a plurality of game media can be discharged with the second discharge region directed toward the passage region.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls are discharged together from the cruiser 111 through the upper surface opening 111C, these game balls are guided to the big winning opening 37, and thus more game balls are given. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the occurrence of a situation that is advantageous to the player, and thus to enhance the interest of the game.

(Appendix B1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A passing area (for example, the first start port 211, the second start port 241) through which the game medium can pass in the game area;
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state (for example, big hit game state) on the condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, LED unit 5) capable of variably displaying and stopping display of identification information (for example, special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means,
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the passage area, the specific mode for the identification information On-hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing on-hold information (for example, start memory, three-scale ball on-hold information) including information indicating whether or not to stop display at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
A hold image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) capable of displaying a hold image (for example, a three-scale ball) as an image corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means;
Display of the hold image corresponding to the hold information based on whether or not the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is specific hold information indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. A holding image display mode temporary determination means (for example, sub CPU 71) that can temporarily determine the mode from any of a plurality of display modes including a special display mode (for example, a colored display color);
The identification information display means is capable of starting a variable display of identification information based on the hold information on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display unit based on the stored hold information, the hold information storage unit may reduce the number of stored hold information by deleting the hold information.
The on-hold image display means includes:
When the number of stored hold information in the hold information storage means is a specific number (for example, 4) or less, the hold image corresponding to the hold information of the specific number or less is displayed in the first display area (for example, the first three shaku balls). Display in the hold display area 610),
When the number of stored hold information in the hold information storage unit is larger than the specific number, at least a hold image corresponding to the specific number of hold information is displayed in the second display area (for example, the second three-scale ball hold display area 620). )
In a state where the number of stored hold information is larger than the specific number and the stored number is reduced, and the hold image can be displayed in the first display area, the hold image display mode provisional determination means When there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
If the number of stored information does not decrease in a state where the number of stored hold information is greater than the specific number, even if there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the reserved image display mode temporary determining unit The reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in a display mode (for example, white display color) different from the special display mode.

  According to such a configuration, when a reserved image (three-sized balls) is displayed in the second three-scale ball holding display area 620, when the number of stored information is reduced, a colored display color is displayed as a special display mode. If there is a provisionally determined on-hold image, the on-hold image is displayed in the first three-scale ball on-hold display area 610 in a colored display color that is a special display mode, while the number of stored hold information is greater than a specific number If there is a reserved image whose color display color is provisionally determined as a special display mode, the reserved 3rd ball is held in a white display color with a display mode different from the special display mode. It will be displayed in the display area 610. As a result, the regularity of the pattern in which the reserved image is displayed in the special display mode is broken, so that the prefetching notice using such a reserved image can be made novel and surprising, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be increased.

(Appendix B2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
The passage area is
A first passage region (for example, the first start port 211);
A second passage region different from the first passage region (for example, the second start port 241),
The specific game state transition determination means is
First specific game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific game state on condition that a game medium has passed through the first passage area;
And a second specific gaming state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the specific gaming state on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the second passage area,
The identification information display means includes
First identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display) capable of variably displaying and stopping display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first specific gaming state transition determining means. Part 53),
Second identification information display means (for example, second special symbol display) capable of variably displaying and stopping the second identification information (for example, second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second specific gaming state transition determining means. Part 54), and
The gaming state control means enters the specific gaming state when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode on the first identification information display means or the second identification information display means. It is possible to perform control to shift,
The holding information storage means includes
When the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display means, the first passing area is displayed as a game medium. When the variable display of the first identification information is suspended based on the fact that the first identification information is passed, the first suspension information including information indicating whether or not the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, First holding information storage means (for example, a first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63) capable of storing the first predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display means, the second passage area is displayed as a game medium. Second variable information including information indicating whether or not the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode when the variable display of the second identification information is suspended based on the fact that Second reserved information storage means (for example, a second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63) capable of storing the second predetermined number as an upper limit,
The first hold information is provided on the condition that the first identification information display means stops displaying the first identification information, and the second identification information display means stops displaying the second identification information. It is possible to start the variable display of the first identification information based on
The second hold information is provided on the condition that the second identification information display means stops displaying the second identification information and the first identification information display means stops displaying the first identification information. It is possible to start the variable display of the second identification information based on
The first hold information storage means first deletes the first hold information when the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display means based on the stored first hold information. The number of stored hold information may decrease,
The second hold information storage means erases the second hold information when the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display means based on the stored second hold information. The number of stored hold information may decrease,
The on-hold image display mode provisional determination means
Based on whether or not the first hold information stored in the first hold information storage means is the first specific hold information indicating that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. The display mode of the hold image corresponding to one hold information can be determined to any one of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
Based on whether the second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is the second specific hold information indicating that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. 2 The display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information can be determined from any of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
The on-hold image display means includes:
A hold image can be displayed as an image corresponding to the first hold information and the second hold information stored in the first hold information storage means and the second hold information storage means;
When the sum of the number of stored first hold information in the first hold information storage means and the number of second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number, the first hold equal to or less than the specific number A hold image corresponding to the information and the second hold information can be displayed in the first display area;
When the sum of the number of stored first hold information in the first hold information storage means and the number of second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is greater than the specified number, at least the specified number of first A hold image corresponding to the hold information and the second hold information can be displayed in the second display area;
A hold image can be displayed in the first display area after the total of the stored numbers decreases in a state where the total stored number of the first hold information and the stored number of the second hold information is larger than the specific number. In the state, when there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the reserved image display mode temporary determining means, the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
In the state where the total number of storages of the first hold information and the storage number of the second hold information is greater than the specific number, the stored image display mode provisional determination means Even if there is a hold image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the hold image can be displayed in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode,
The specific number is not less than the first predetermined number and not less than the second predetermined number.

  According to such a configuration, when a reserved image (three-sized balls) is displayed in the second three-scale ball holding display area 620, the total number of the first held information and the second held information is stored even at one. If there is a reserved image whose color display color is provisionally determined as the special display mode, the reserved image is displayed in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 in the color display color of the special display mode. If the total number of stored 1-hold information and second-hold information does not decrease in a state larger than the specific number, even if there is a hold image whose color display color is temporarily determined as a special display mode, the hold image Is displayed in the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 in a white display color of a display mode different from the special display mode. Such a specific number (four) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number (four) that is the storable number of the first hold information, and the second predetermined number (four) that is the storable number of the second hold information. ) That's it. Therefore, when the total number of stored first hold information and second hold information is greater than the specific number, both the first hold information and the second hold information are always stored. Thereby, according to the stored number of both the first hold information and the second hold information, the regularity of the pattern in which the hold image corresponding to these hold information is displayed in the colored display color of the special display mode is broken. Such a pre-reading notice using a reserved image can be made novel and surprising, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

(Appendix B3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The on-hold image display means includes:
In the first display area, it is possible to individually display the hold image for the hold information stored in the hold information storage unit,
In the second display area, it is possible to display one hold image for the specific number of hold information stored in the hold information storage means,
The reserved image corresponding to the first display area can be displayed in the special display mode on condition that the one reserved image is no longer displayed in the second display area.

  According to such a configuration, when one reserved image is no longer displayed in the second three-scale ball holding display area 620, the reserved image corresponding to the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 is specially displayed. Since it is individually displayed in the colored display color of the mode, when the display position of the reserved image is switched from the second 3 size ball holding display area 620 to the first 3 size ball holding display area 610, the color display color is used as a special display mode. It is possible to clearly distinguish the hold image displayed in the above by distinguishing it from other images, so that the so-called prefetch notice can be easily recognized.

(Appendix C1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A passing area (for example, the first start port 211, the second start port 241) through which the game medium can pass in the game area;
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state (for example, big hit game state) on the condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 53, a second special symbol display, etc.) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information (for example, special symbols) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Part 54),
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the passage area, the specific mode for the identification information On-hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing on-hold information (for example, start memory, three-scale ball on-hold information) including information indicating whether or not to stop display at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
Based on whether or not the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is specific hold information indicating that the identification information is to be stopped and displayed in the specific mode, a specific effect (for example, a fireworks teacher pre-reading notice) Specific production determination means (for example, sub CPU 71) capable of determining whether or not to execute the production)
When the execution of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means, the effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing the specific effect,
The identification information display means is capable of starting a variable display of identification information based on the hold information on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed.
The specific effect is an effect capable of updating the display number of a specific image (for example, a fireworks character image 800),
The production execution means
When execution of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determining means based on the predetermined hold information, the specific effect can be executed before the identification information is variably displayed based on the predetermined hold information. And
A plurality of identification information changing effects (for example, an effect based on a promotion pattern) during at least a part of the time when the identification information based on the predetermined hold information is in a variable display state (for example, a hold promotion timing) in the identification information display means. ) Is possible, and
When the specific effect is executed based on the predetermined hold information, the specific image can be displayed even during the variation display of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information,
The identification information variation effect that is executed during the variation display of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information can be changed to a different identification information variation effect based on the display number of the specific image.

  According to such a configuration, the number of specific images (fireworks) is updated before the identification information (special symbol, decorative symbol) is variably displayed based on the predetermined hold information that is subject to the prefetching notice. As an effect, an effect related to the fireworker pre-reading notice is executed. In the specific effect, the identification information based on the predetermined hold information is displayed in a variable manner according to the number of display of the fireworker as the specific image during at least a part of the period. One of the plurality of identification information fluctuation effects (effect based on the promotion pattern) is executed. Even when the identification information based on the predetermined hold information is being displayed in a variable manner, the specific image may remain displayed. During the variable display, the identification being executed based on the number of remaining display images of the specific image may be displayed. There is a case where the presentation during information fluctuation is changed to a different one. As a result, it is possible to perform a specific effect related to the change of the identification information fluctuation effect executed during the variation display of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information. A certain look-ahead notice can be realized, which in turn can increase the fun of the game.

(Appendix C2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
The production execution means
While displaying the hold image corresponding to the hold information and when the identification information is variably displayed based on the hold information, the hold image corresponding to the hold information is displayed as the currently used hold image (for example, the three-scale ball display area). 600 three-scale balls)
In the identification information display means, the current use pending image can be displayed in a plurality of different display modes (for example, display colors) in at least a part of the period in which the identification information is in a variable display.
During the variation display of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information, the display mode of the currently used hold image can be changed based on the display number of the specific image,
According to the display mode of the currently used reserved image, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the identification information being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the specific mode.

  According to such a configuration, during the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information that is subject to the pre-reading notice, the currently used hold image (the three shank balls) based on the remaining display number of the specific image (fireworker) The display color of the three-dimensional ball in the display area 600 is changed, and the display color of the currently used reserved image suggests the possibility that the identification information being changed and displayed may be stopped and displayed in a specific manner, that is, the expectation level of jackpot Therefore, during the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information subject to the pre-reading notice, not only the remaining display number of the specific image but also the display color of the currently used hold image can be noted. The effect can be enhanced.

(Appendix C3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
A specific area in which the game medium can pass in the game area (for example, a lost mouth 242);
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, the production hold information storage unit (for example, work RAM 73) capable of storing the production hold information (for example, jewelry hold information) up to a predetermined number;
Game value giving means (for example, a payout device) that can give a game value on the condition that a game medium passes through the passage area, but does not give a game value even if the game medium passes through the specific area. 83), and
The effect execution means can display an effect hold image corresponding to the effect hold information stored in the effect hold information storage means (for example, the gem display area 700 and the gem hold display area 710). Yes,
Based on whether or not the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is the specific hold information, an effect hold image determining means (for example, a display color) for determining the display mode (for example, display color) of the effect hold image is determined. And a sub CPU 71).

  According to such a configuration, although the production hold information (gem hold information) does not contribute to the provision of the game value (game ball), the production hold image corresponding to the production hold information (the gem display area 700 and the gem display area 700 and the game hold information). Jewels in the jewel hold display area 710) are displayed, and the display mode (display color) of the effect hold image can be determined based on the specific hold information, thereby preventing a situation in which game value is excessively imparted. It is possible to pay attention also to the display mode of the reserved image for effects, and as a result, the effect of the effects can be further enhanced.

(Appendix D1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (for example, a game area 1p) having a game area in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can roll;
A passing area (for example, the first start port 211, the second start port 241) through which the game medium can pass in the game area;
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state (for example, big hit game state) on the condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 53, a second special symbol display, etc.) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information (for example, special symbols) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Part 54),
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the passage area, the specific mode for the identification information On-hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing on-hold information (for example, start memory, three-scale ball on-hold information) including information indicating whether or not to stop display at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
When the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, the other hold information stored before the predetermined hold information stored based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the passing area is, It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect (for example, an effect related to a fireworks pre-reading notice) based on whether or not the specific hold information indicates that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. Specific production determining means (for example, the sub CPU 71);
When the execution of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means, the effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing the specific effect,
Whether the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display means It is possible to determine whether or not
When the execution of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination unit based on the other hold information, the effect execution unit determines the specific game by the specific game state transition determination unit based on at least the other hold information. The specific effect can be executed before it is determined whether or not to shift to a state.

  According to such a configuration, although the specific effect is executed when the predetermined hold information is newly stored, the transition of the specific game state is internally performed based on the other existing hold information. Since the specific performance (fireworks pre-reading notice) is executed before the judgment result is obtained, it is possible to realize a novel and unexpected pre-reading notice by such a specific effect, which in turn increases the interest of the game. it can.

(Appendix D2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
The specific effect is an effect capable of updating the display number of a specific image (for example, a fireworks character image 800),
The production execution means
Any of a plurality of identification information variation effects (for example, an effect based on a fireworker reduction pattern) during at least a part of the identification information display in the identification information display means (for example, hold promotion timing). Is feasible and
When the specific effect is executed based on the other hold information, the specific image can be displayed even after the variation display of the identification information based on the other hold information.
The identification information variation effect that is executed during the variation display of the identification information based on the other hold information can be changed to a different identification information variation effect based on the display number of the specific image.

  According to such a configuration, in the specific effect related to the fireworker pre-reading notice for the existing hold information target, the specific image is displayed during at least a part period (hold promotion timing) during which the identification information (decorative symbol 500) is variably displayed. One of a plurality of identification information changing effects (effects based on the promotion pattern) is executed according to the number of fireworks displayed. And even if the identification information based on other existing hold information is being displayed in a variable manner, the specific image may remain displayed. During the variable display, the specific image is being executed based on the remaining display number of the specific image. There are cases in which the identification information fluctuation effect is changed to a different one. As a result, it is possible to perform a specific effect related to the change of the identification information variation effect performed during the variation display of the identification information based on the other hold information, so that the novel and unexpected for the other hold information A certain look-ahead notice can be realized, which in turn can increase the fun of the game.

(Appendix D3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The production execution means
While displaying the hold image corresponding to the hold information and when the identification information is variably displayed based on the hold information, the hold image corresponding to the hold information is displayed as the currently used hold image (for example, the three-scale ball display area). 600 three-scale balls)
During the variation display of the identification information based on the other hold information, the display mode (for example, display color) of the currently used hold image can be changed based on the display number of the specific image,
According to the display mode of the currently used reserved image, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the identification information being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the specific mode.

  According to such a configuration, during the variable display of the identification information (decorative pattern 500) based on other existing hold information, the currently used hold image (the three scales) based on the display number of the specific image (fireworker 800). The display mode (display color) of the ball display area 600 is changed, and depending on the display mode of the currently used reserved image, the identification information during the variable display can be stopped and displayed in a specific mode (big hit symbol) Therefore, during the variable display of identification information based on other hold information subject to pre-reading notice, not only the display number of specific images but also the display mode of currently used hold images can be noted. The production effect can be enhanced.

(Appendix E1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A passing area (for example, the first start port 211, the second start port 241) through which the game medium can pass in the game area;
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state (for example, big hit game state) on the condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 53, a second special symbol display, etc.) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information (for example, special symbols) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Part 54),
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the passage area, the specific mode for the identification information On-hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing on-hold information (for example, start memory, three-scale ball on-hold information) including information indicating whether or not to stop display at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
Hold image display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) capable of displaying a hold image corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means (for example, the three shaku balls of the first three shaku ball hold display area 610); ,
A holding display combination (for example, a movable effect member 42A) that can be displaced so as to at least partially overlap the holding image displayed on the holding image display means,
The identification information display means is capable of starting a variable display of identification information based on the hold information on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed.
The hold image display means is capable of moving and displaying a hold image in which at least a part of the hold display combination overlaps based on the fact that the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display means.
The hold display combination is displaceable based on the hold image that is at least partially overlapped and moved and displayed by the hold image display means, and at least a portion of the hold image after moving display is displayed after the displacement. It is possible to overlap.

  According to such a configuration, interest and attention are gathered not only for the movement display of the hold image (three shank balls) but also for the behavior of the hold display accessory (movable effect member 42A) that is displaced so as to overlap the hold image. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect by realizing a novel and surprising production gimmick, and consequently to enhance the entertainment of the game.

(Appendix E2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
Based on whether or not the hold information corresponding to the hold image in which at least a part of the hold display combination overlaps is the specific hold information indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the hold display is performed. It further comprises a holding display accessory display mode determining means capable of determining the display mode (light emission color) of the accessory,
The hold display combination can be displayed based on the display mode determined by the hold display combination display mode determining means.

  According to such a configuration, the display mode (the light emission color of the light-emitting lens 42B) of the hold display accessory differs depending on whether or not the hold information subject to the prefetch notice is the specific hold information. Since it is strongly impressed that the identification information (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in a specific manner (big hit symbol), the effect of the effect can be enhanced as an effect gimmick related to the pre-reading notice.

(Appendix E3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The holding display character is
A movable member (for example, a blade) that can vary between a first position (non-projecting position) and a second position (projecting position) different from the first position;
In association with the movement of the movable member from the first position to the second position, it is possible to perform display based on the display mode determined by the holding display accessory display mode determination unit. Features.

  According to such a configuration, the display mode of the hold display combination is different in relation to the fact that the movable member (blade) of the hold display combination (movable effect member 42A) protrudes, and identification information (decoration) is used as a so-called pre-reading notice. Since it is strongly impressed that the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner (hit symbol), the effect can be enhanced as an effect gimmick related to the pre-reading notice.

(Appendix F1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A passing area (for example, the first start port 211, the second start port 241) through which the game medium can pass in the game area;
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state (for example, big hit game state) on the condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area When,
A variation display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of determining a variation display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) of identification information (for example, a special symbol) based on a determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining unit;
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 53, a second special symbol display unit 54) for performing variable display of identification information based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit;
An effect pattern determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for determining an effect pattern based on the change display pattern determined by the change display pattern determining means;
On the basis of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination means, effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing effects in accordance with the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner (for example, a big hit symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining unit, the gaming state control unit (for example, control for shifting to the specific gaming state) Main CPU 61),
A special game that is relatively advantageous over a non-special game state (for example, a non-probable change non-short game state) until the number of times that the identification information is changed to a predetermined number (for example, 184 times) after the end of the specific game state. Special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a state (for example, a short game state at the time of probability change),
The variable display pattern determining means is configured to display a variable display when executing the variable display of the identification information when the number of variable displays of the identification information after the end of the specific gaming state reaches a specific number of times (for example, the number of specific variations) As a pattern, a specific variation display pattern (for example, reach loss variation patterns 14 and 15) can be determined,
In the case where the specific variation display pattern is determined by the variation display pattern determination unit, the effect pattern determination unit is
If a specific performance pattern (for example, “fireworks door breakthrough reach door red”, “female door breakthrough reach door red”) is not determined in the special gaming state, the specific performance pattern can be determined,
If the specific production pattern is determined in the special gaming state, a special production pattern different from the specific production pattern (for example, “Fireworks Door Break Reach Door Blue”, “Women Door Break Reach Door Blue” ) Can be determined,
The production execution means
When the specific effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means, the specific effect is executed as the effect accompanying the change display of the identification information,
When the special effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means, the special effect is executed as the effect accompanying the change display of the identification information.

  According to such a configuration, in the special gaming state (short game state at the time of probability change), the specific variation display pattern (variation pattern) is used as the variation display pattern (variation pattern) when the variation display count of the identification information reaches the specific count (specific variation count). If the reach loss variation pattern 14, 15) is determined, if a specific performance pattern (“firework door breakthrough reach door red”, “female door breakthrough reach door red”) has not been determined, If the production pattern is determined, if a specific production pattern is decided, a special production pattern that differs from the specific production pattern at a specific number of times ("Fireworks Door Break Reach Door Blue", "Women Door Break Reach Door" Blue ") is determined. In other words, in the special gaming state, the specific performance based on the specific performance pattern can be executed as many times as possible, but the number of executions can be reduced as much as possible. However, the effect on the performance by the specific performance can be effectively exhibited.

(Appendix F2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
When the specific effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific manner in the identification information display means, compared to when the special effect pattern is determined. It is characterized by a high probability.

  According to such a configuration, when a specific effect is executed based on a specific effect pattern (“fireworks door break reach door red”, “female door break reach door red”), a special effect pattern is performed. The identification information (special symbol) is displayed in a stopped state in a specific manner (big hit symbol), compared to the case where special effects are executed based on ("Fireworks Door Breakthrough Reach Door Blue", "Women Door Breakthrough Reach Door Blue") In other words, since the degree of expectation for the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) is increased, the expectation for the specific performance can be increased in the special gaming state (short gaming state when the probability change), and in the special gaming state The fall of interest can be prevented effectively.

(Appendix F3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The specific number of times includes a first specific number of times and a second specific number of times different from the first specific number of times,
The specific aspect includes a first specific aspect and a second specific aspect different from the first specific aspect,
The variable display pattern determining means includes
As a variable display pattern when the number of variable display times of the identification information reaches the first specific number of times after the end of the specific gaming state shifted based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first specific mode, Specific variation display pattern can be determined,
As the variable display pattern when the number of variable display times of the identification information reaches the second specific number of times after the end of the specific gaming state that has been shifted based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second specific mode, The specific variation display pattern can be determined.

  According to such a configuration, the specific number of times (specific fluctuation) in which the specific variation display pattern (reach loss variation patterns 14 and 15) is determined in the special gaming state (probability variation short gaming state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The number of times) depends on whether the stop display mode of the identification information (special symbol) determined to shift to the specific gaming state before shifting to the special gaming state is the first specific mode or the second specific mode It will be different. In other words, in the special gaming state, the specific effect may be executed when the number of times of the identification information change display reaches the first specific number, or the specific effect is executed when the second specific number of times is reached. In some cases, the specific effect can be executed irregularly, so that it is difficult to grasp the execution timing of such a specific effect, and it can be felt as if the specific effect was executed accidentally.

(Appendix G1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A rolling area where the game medium can roll in the gaming area (for example, the conduction port 221);
Any of a plurality of passages including a first passage (for example, a ball passage leading to the first starting port 211) and a second passage (for example, a ball passage leading to the introduction port 212) for the game medium having passed through the rolling region. A sorting member (for example, a sorting crank 230) that can be sorted;
A first passage area (for example, the first start port 211) through which the game medium that has been distributed to the first passage by the sorting member and passed through the first passage can pass;
A second passage area (for example, the second start port 241) and a third passage through which the game medium that has been distributed to the second passage by the sorting member and that has passed through the second passage are received. A rolling member (e.g., a cruel 240) having a plurality of passage areas including a region (e.g., a lost mouth 242);
A game value providing means (for example, a payout device 83) capable of providing a game value on the condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing area or the second passing area; .

  According to such a configuration, the game balls are distributed to one of the first passage and the second passage by the distribution member (distribution crank 230), and the game balls distributed to the second passage are rolled. After being received by the member (Kroon 240), it passes through the second passage region (second starting port 241) to which the game value (game ball) is given or passes through the third passage region (losing port 242). As a result, the behavior of the game ball is richly changed, and it is possible to make the player interested in the trend of the game ball.

(Appendix G2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
Specific game state transition for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, big hit gaming state) on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing area or the second passing area Determination means (for example, main CPU 61);
A first specific gaming state defined so that the gaming value given by the gaming value granting unit is relatively reduced based on the fact that the specific gaming state transition judging unit judges to shift to the specific gaming state. For example, the first special symbol jackpot (probability variation 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, the second special symbol jackpot (probability variation 1) specified so that the game value given by the game value granting means is relatively increased. 1 to 4)) and a gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to any one of the plurality of specific gaming states,
The gaming state control means is configured to play the second passing area more than the case where the specific gaming state transition judging means determines to shift to the specific gaming state based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through the first passing area. If it is determined by the specific gaming state transition determining means to transition to the specific gaming state based on the passage of the medium, it is easier to perform control to shift to the second specific gaming state,
The game value giving means does not give a game value even if a game medium passes through the third passage area.

  According to such a configuration, the game ball is relatively given when it passes through the second passing region (second starting port 241) rather than passing through the first passing region (first starting port 211). Since it is easy to shift to the second specific gaming state (second special symbol jackpot (probability variation 1 to 4)) in which the gaming value (game ball) increases, it is assigned to the second passage rather than the first passage, Since the expectation is higher for the game ball passing through the second passage region than in the three passage region (losing mouth 242), it is possible to make the player more interested by the trend of the game ball. In addition, when it is distributed to the first passage, the game ball passes through the second passage region or the third passage region when it is distributed to the second passage region. In such a case, the game value may not be given, but the game value that is higher when the game ball passes through the second pass area is higher than the game value that passes through the second pass area. Since it is easy to shift to the specific game state, it is possible to balance between the case where the game is distributed to the first passage and the case where the game is distributed to the second passage so as not to be extremely superior or inferior. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Appendix G3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
A first effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative symbol 500, etc.) can be executed based only on the passage of the game medium to the first passage area or the second passage area, and the game medium to the third passage area Production execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing the second production (for example, demo display (2) to (4)) based only on the passage of
The effect execution means generates a third effect (for example, a decorative symbol based on both the passage of the game medium to the first passage area or the second passage area and the passage of the game medium to the third passage area). 500 pseudo-continuous rendering) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the passing of the game ball to the first passing area (first starting port 211) or the second passing area (second starting port 241), and the third passing area (losing port 242) Based on both the passing of the game ball, the first effect (variable display etc. of the decorative symbol 500) and the second effect (demo display (2) to (4)) based on only one of these passing Since different third effects (effects related to the pseudo-ream) can be executed, a plurality of effects can be executed in a variety of ways so that the effects differ depending on the passing area through which the game ball has passed. Can enhance the interest of

(Appendix H1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A first passage area (for example, a first start port 211 and a second start port 241) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main game state) for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state (for example, big hit game state) on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 53, a second special symbol display, etc.) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information (for example, special symbols) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Part 54),
A variation display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of determining a variation display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) of the identification information based on a determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining unit;
Identification information display control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the identification information display means to display the identification information in a variable manner based on the fluctuation display pattern determined by the fluctuation display pattern determination means;
After the identification information is variably displayed based on the variability display pattern determined by the variability display pattern determining means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, big hit symbol), and the specific game Gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to a state;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first passage area, the identification information is specified. A holding information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing holding information including information indicating whether or not to stop display in the form of
A second passage area through which game media can pass in the gaming area (for example, a lost mouth 242);
A variable display pattern capable of storing a variable display pattern determination information (for example, jewelry holding information) that can determine the variable display pattern based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second passage area, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Information storage means for determination (for example, work RAM 73);
A game value can be imparted when a game medium passes through the first passage area, while a game value provision means (for example, a payout device 83) does not impart a game value even when the game medium passes through the second passage area. ) And
The specific game state transition determination means can determine whether to shift to the specific game state based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means,
The variable display pattern determination means determines the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means and the variable display pattern determination on the condition that the variable display pattern determination information is stored in the variable display pattern determination information storage means. The variable display pattern can be determined based on the usage information.

  According to such a configuration, the identification information (special symbol, decorative symbol) is variably displayed as the game ball passes through the first passing region (first starting port 211, second starting port 241), and the first When the game ball passes through the two passing area (losing mouth 242), the variable display pattern of the identification information (decorative pattern) is determined based on the variable display pattern determination information (jewel holding information) stored accordingly. May be. In other words, since the relevance display of the identification information based on the passage of both the first pass area and the second pass area is related, and interest and attention are gathered in the fluctuating display, it is decorated as a novel and surprising effect. In addition to realizing the variable display of symbols, it is possible to enhance the effect of production and, in turn, increase the interest of the game. In addition, since the game value (game ball) is not excessively given even when the game ball passes through a plurality of pass regions such as the first pass region and the second pass region, the degree of attention to the variation display of the decorative symbol The effect can be enhanced without diluting.

(Appendix H2)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, the hold information is not stored in the hold information storage means, and the variable display pattern determination information is stored in the variable display pattern determination information storage means. In the case where it is stored, it is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, demo displays (2) to (4)) based on the information for determining the variation display pattern.

  According to such a configuration, a predetermined effect (demonstration display (2) to (4)) is executed based on the storage number of the hold information and the variable display pattern determination information (jewel hold information). It is possible to make the game balls more interested in passing through the 1 passing area (first starting port 211, second starting port 241) and the second passing area (losing port 242), and to increase the interest of the game. it can. In addition, the use of the variable display pattern determination information can be varied depending on the presence / absence of the hold information, and a variety of effects related to the demonstration display can be executed. This also increases the interest of the game. it can.

(Appendix H3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
In the effect execution means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, no hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, and the change display pattern determination information storage means varies. When display pattern determination information is not stored, a specific effect (for example, demo display (1)) different from the predetermined effect can be executed based on the predetermined condition being satisfied. Features.

  According to such a configuration, when neither the hold information nor the variable display pattern determination information (jewel hold information) is stored, if a predetermined time elapses as a predetermined condition, the specification is different from the predetermined effect. Since it can be switched to the production (demo display (1)), the production effect can be enhanced.

(Appendix H4)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The gaming state control means includes a special gaming state (for example, a probability-changing short gaming state) and a non-special gaming state (for example, a non-probability varying non-short-time gaming state) that is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state compared to the special gaming state. Can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including
The production execution means
During the non-special game state, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, the hold information is not stored in the hold information storage means, and the variable display pattern determination information storage means When the variable display pattern determination information is stored, a predetermined effect (for example, demo display (2), (3)) can be executed based on the variable display pattern determination information.
Regardless of whether or not the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means during the special gaming state, the variable display pattern determination information is stored in the variable display pattern determination information storage means A predetermined effect (for example, demo display (4)) can be executed based on the variable display pattern determination information.

  According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern determination information (in accordance with the conditions (in the non-special game state (non-probability change non-short game state)) or the special game state (probability change short-time game state) ( Since a predetermined effect (demonstration display) based on the jewelry holding information) can be executed, the variable display pattern determination information stored according to the passing of the game ball to the second passing area (losing mouth 242) is predetermined. This can be reflected in the production of the game, thereby enhancing the production effect and the fun of the game. Further, in the non-special gaming state, if there is no holding information (three-scale ball holding information), a predetermined effect (demo display (2), (3)) is given based on the variable display pattern determination information (jewel holding information). On the other hand, in the special gaming state, a predetermined effect (pseudo-ream, demo) is based only on the information for determining the variable display pattern, regardless of whether or not the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed. The display (4)) can be executed, so that the player determines the display state of the identification information and the presence / absence of the hold information and the variable display pattern determination information when the predetermined effect is executed. It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the game is in a special game state.

(Appendix I1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board (eg, game board 1) having a game area (eg, game area 1p) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) can roll;
A first passage area (for example, a first start port 211 and a second start port 241) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main game state) for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state (for example, big hit game state) on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passage area. CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 53, a second special symbol display, etc.) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information (for example, special symbols) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Part 54),
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first passage area, the identification information is specified. 1st hold information (for example, main RAM63, for example) which can memorize | store the 1st hold information (for example, 3 shawl ball hold information) including the information which shows whether it is stopped and displayed in the aspect of this is made into a predetermined number as an upper limit. Work RAM 73),
A second passage area through which game media can pass in the gaming area (for example, a lost mouth 242);
Second holding information storage means (for example, work RAM 73) capable of storing second holding information (for example, jewelry holding information) up to a predetermined number based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second passing area. ,
A game value can be imparted when a game medium passes through the first passage area, while a game value provision means (for example, a payout device 83) does not impart a game value even when the game medium passes through the second passage area. )When,
Production execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The identification information display means is capable of starting a variable display of identification information based on the first hold information on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed.
In the effect execution means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, the first hold information is not stored in the first hold information storage means, and the second hold information storage means When the second hold information is stored, a predetermined effect (for example, demonstration displays (2) to (4)) can be executed based on the second hold information.

  According to such a configuration, a predetermined effect (demo display (2) to (4)) is not allowed depending on the presence / absence of the second hold information (jewel hold information) that does not contribute to the provision of the game value (game ball). Since it can be executed at a definite timing, a novel and surprising production can be realized, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the production effect.

(Appendix I2)
Preferred embodiments of the present invention are:
The gaming state control means includes a special gaming state (for example, a probability-changing short gaming state) and a non-special gaming state (for example, a non-probability varying non-short-time gaming state) that is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state compared to the special gaming state. Can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states including
The production execution means
During the non-special game state, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, the first hold information is not stored in the first hold information storage means, and the second hold information When the second hold information is stored in the storage means, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, demo display (2), (3)) based on the second hold information,
When the second hold information is stored in the second hold information storage means regardless of whether or not the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means during the special gaming state, the second hold information is stored. A predetermined effect (for example, pseudo-ream, demo display (4)) based on the hold information can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, in a non-special game state (non-probability non-short-time game state), if there is no first hold information (three shawl ball hold information), predetermined based on the second hold information (jewel hold information) While there are cases in which the effects (demo display (2), (3)) are executed, it is related to whether or not the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed in the special game state (probability change short game state). In addition, since the predetermined effect (pseudo sequence, demo display (4)) can be executed based only on the second hold information, the player can display the identification information when the predetermined effect is executed. By determining whether or not the first hold information and the second hold information are present, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the game is in the special game state.

(Appendix I3)
Another preferred embodiment of the present invention is:
The gaming state control means includes
A plurality of game states including a special game state (for example, a probability change time short game state) and a non-special game state (for example, a non-probability change non-short time game state) which is a relatively disadvantageous game state than the special game state. Can be controlled to any of the gaming states,
In the non-special game state, when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display means in a special mode (small hit symbol), it is possible to shift to a specific game state (for example, a small hit game state). And, after the end of the specific gaming state, can be controlled to a non-special gaming state,
The production execution means
During a predetermined period (for example, special mode) in the non-special game state, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, and the first hold information is stored in the first hold information storage means. In addition, when the second hold information is stored in the second hold information storage unit, a first predetermined effect (for example, demo display (3)) based on the second hold information can be executed. Yes,
In the non-special game state (for example, in the normal mode in the non-probable non-temporal game state) after the predetermined period has elapsed, the identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display means, and the first When the first hold information is not stored in the hold information storage means and the second hold information is stored in the second hold information storage means, the first hold information is based on the second hold information. A second predetermined effect (for example, demo display (2)) different from the predetermined effect can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the end of the specific gaming state (small hit game state) in which the stop mode of the identification information is transferred in a special mode (small hit symbol) during the non-special gaming state (non-probability changing non-short game state). After that, it is a non-special game state, but a predetermined effect (demo display (3)) executed based on the second hold information (jewel hold information) during a predetermined period (special mode) after the end of the specific game state. And the predetermined aspect (demonstration (2)) executed based on the second hold information after the end of the predetermined period is different, so that the predetermined period seems to have shifted to an advantageous gaming state. An impression can be given and by extension, the interest of a game can be heightened.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device 5 LED unit 26 Launching device 32 1st starting port 33 2nd starting port 34 Blade member 35 Passage gate 36 1st grand prize port 37 Grand prize port, 2nd grand prize port 42A Movable Production member 42B Light-emitting lens 53 First special symbol display unit 54 Second special symbol display unit 61 Main CPU
63 Main RAM
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 Dispensing device 110 Direction changing device 111 Kroon 111A Main body portion 111B Discharge port 111C Top surface opening 112 Seesaw mechanism 112A Arm 112B Balance weight 113 Spindle 211 First start port 221 Conduction port 230 Sorting crank 240 Clune 241 Second start port 242 Loss port 500 decorative pattern 610 first three-scale ball holding display area 620 second three-size ball holding display area 600 three-shaped ball display area 610 first three-size ball holding display area 620 second three-size ball holding display area 700 the jewelry display Area 710 Gem hold display area 800 Character image (fireworker)

Claims (3)

A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area through which game media can pass in the gaming area;
Specific game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific game state on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area;
Identification information display means capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means;
A game state control means for performing control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the identification information display means;
When the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display means, when the variation display of the identification information is suspended based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the passage area, the specific mode for the identification information On-hold information storage means capable of storing on-hold information including information indicating whether or not to stop display at an upper limit of a predetermined number;
A hold image display means capable of displaying a hold image as an image corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means;
Display of the hold image corresponding to the hold information based on whether or not the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is specific hold information indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. A provisional image display mode provisional determination means capable of provisionally determining any one of a plurality of display modes including a special display mode;
The identification information display means is capable of starting a variable display of identification information based on the hold information on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed.
When the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display unit based on the stored hold information, the hold information storage unit may reduce the number of stored hold information by deleting the hold information.
The on-hold image display means includes:
When the number of stored hold information in the hold information storage means is a specific number or less, a hold image corresponding to the hold information of the specific number or less can be displayed in the first display area,
When the number of stored hold information in the hold information storage means is larger than the specific number, at least a hold image corresponding to the specific number of hold information can be displayed in the second display area,
In a state where the number of stored hold information is larger than the specific number and the stored number is reduced, and the hold image can be displayed in the first display area, the hold image display mode provisional determination means When there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
If the number of stored information does not decrease in a state where the number of stored hold information is greater than the specific number, even if there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the reserved image display mode temporary determining unit The gaming machine can display the hold image in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode. The passage area is
A first passing region;
A second passage region different from the first passage region,
The specific game state transition determination means is
First specific game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific game state on condition that a game medium has passed through the first passage area;
And a second specific gaming state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the specific gaming state on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the second passage area,
The identification information display means includes
First identification information display means capable of variably displaying and stopping the first identification information based on the determination result by the first specific gaming state transition determining means;
Second identification information display means capable of variably displaying and stopping the second identification information based on the determination result by the second specific gaming state transition determining means,
The gaming state control means enters the specific gaming state when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode on the first identification information display means or the second identification information display means. It is possible to perform control to shift,
The holding information storage means includes
When the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display means, the first passing area is displayed as a game medium. When the variable display of the first identification information is suspended based on the fact that the first identification information is passed, the first suspension information including information indicating whether or not the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, First holding information storage means capable of storing the first predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display means, the second passage area is displayed as a game medium. Second variable information including information indicating whether or not the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode when the variable display of the second identification information is suspended based on the fact that Second hold information storage means capable of storing the second predetermined number as an upper limit,
The first hold information is provided on the condition that the first identification information display means stops displaying the first identification information, and the second identification information display means stops displaying the second identification information. It is possible to start the variable display of the first identification information based on
The second hold information is provided on the condition that the second identification information display means stops displaying the second identification information and the first identification information display means stops displaying the first identification information. It is possible to start the variable display of the second identification information based on
The first hold information storage means first deletes the first hold information when the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display means based on the stored first hold information. The number of stored hold information may decrease,
The second hold information storage means erases the second hold information when the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display means based on the stored second hold information. The number of stored hold information may decrease,
The on-hold image display mode provisional determination means
Based on whether or not the first hold information stored in the first hold information storage means is the first specific hold information indicating that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. The display mode of the hold image corresponding to one hold information can be determined to any one of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
Based on whether the second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is the second specific hold information indicating that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. 2 The display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information can be determined from any of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
The on-hold image display means includes:
A hold image can be displayed as an image corresponding to the first hold information and the second hold information stored in the first hold information storage means and the second hold information storage means;
When the sum of the number of stored first hold information in the first hold information storage means and the number of second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number, the first hold equal to or less than the specific number A hold image corresponding to the information and the second hold information can be displayed in the first display area;
When the sum of the number of stored first hold information in the first hold information storage means and the number of second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is greater than the specified number, at least the specified number of first A hold image corresponding to the hold information and the second hold information can be displayed in the second display area;
A hold image can be displayed in the first display area after the total of the stored numbers decreases in a state where the total stored number of the first hold information and the stored number of the second hold information is larger than the specific number. In the state, when there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the reserved image display mode temporary determining means, the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
In the state where the total number of storages of the first hold information and the storage number of the second hold information is greater than the specific number, the stored image display mode provisional determination means Even if there is a hold image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the hold image can be displayed in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific number is not less than the first predetermined number and not less than the second predetermined number. The on-hold image display means includes:
In the first display area, it is possible to individually display the hold image for the hold information stored in the hold information storage unit,
In the second display area, it is possible to display one hold image for the specific number of hold information stored in the hold information storage means,
The hold image corresponding to the first display area can be displayed in the special display mode on the condition that the one hold image is no longer displayed in the second display area. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.